KONICA MINOLTA C500 CF5001 Service Manual Field Service

Service Manual
[Field Service]
CF5001
Dual references may be used on the following:

Official Options name
Popular Options name
AFR-20
C-208
:
:
RADF, DF
LT
FN-120
FN-9
:
:
FNS
FNS
Cover Inserter D
PK-5
:
:
PI
PU
TU
ISW
TMG-3
In-System Writer
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
II ADJUSTMENT
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
Replacing the dust filter /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2
Replacing the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3
1.4
Replacing the toner collection box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Angle adjustment of the operation board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.5
Removing and reinstalling the main board unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
2. SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2.1
2.2
Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Removing and reinstalling the platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2.3
Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2.4
Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
2.5
2.6
Removing and reinstalling the exposure lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Removing the scanner wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
2.7
Reinstalling the scanner wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
3. WRITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
3.1
3.2
Screw that must not be removed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Removing and reinstalling the write unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
IV SERVICE
1.1
III SERVICE TOOL
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Flow of the disassembly of the process unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
4.2
4.3
4.4
Cleaning the charging corona unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Cleaning/replacing, removing and reinstalling the charging wire assy
/the charging control plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Pulling out the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
4.5
Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning brush unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
4.7
4.8
Replacing the belt cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

Replacing the toner collection sheet /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
4.9
Replacing the belt separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
4.10 Replacing the transfer belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39

4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
4.12 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
4.13 Replacing the drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
VI DIAGRAMS
4.1
V CODE LIST
4. PROCESS UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
CONTENTS
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.14 Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

4.15 Replacing the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
4.16 Replacing the developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
4.17 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
4.18 Removing and reinstalling the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
4.19 Removing and reinstalling the image correction unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
5. TONER SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
II ADJUSTMENT
5.1
5.2
Opening and closing the toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53

Replacing the charging dust filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

6.1
Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
6.2
6.3
Removing and reinstalling the paper feed trays /1 to /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
6.4
Replacing the double feed prevention rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
6.5
Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
III SERVICE TOOL
6.6 Removing and reinstalling the tray up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62

7. BY-PASS TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
7.1
Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
7.2
Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69

8. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.1
Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.2
Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
9. FIXING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
9.1 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
IV SERVICE
9.2
Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
9.3
Replacing the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
9.4
9.5
Replacing the fixing lower heater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79

Replacing the fixing roller /U, ball bearing /U and the heat insulating sleeve /U . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
9.6
Replacing the fixing roller /L, ball bearing /L and the heat insulating sleeve /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
9.7
Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /3, and removing and reinstalling
the fixing temperature sensor /1 and the thermostat /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
9.8
Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /4, and removing and reinstalling
the fixing temperature sensor /2 and the thermostat /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
V CODE LIST
9.9 Replacing the fixing drive gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96

9.10 Replacing the fixing cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98
9.11 Replacing the fixing torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100
10. REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102
10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102
10.2 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
10.3 Replacing the separation discharging plate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
10.4 Replacing the transfer ground plate unit and the 2nd transfer roller /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
VI DIAGRAMS
10.5 Replacing the registration roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107

10.6 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 and /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
10.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 and /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110
10.8 Replacing the ADU pre-registration clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
10.9 Replacing the decurler roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
ii
CONTENTS
11.2 Installation / Remove of the Memory Unit (OPTION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115
AFR-20 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
1.1 RADF hinge opening/closing angle adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
1.2
Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119
1.3
Removing and reinstalling the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120
1.4 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121

2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122
2.1
Cleaning the no paper sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122
2.2
Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123
2.3
2.4
Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125
Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
II ADJUSTMENT
11.1 Installation of the Key Counter Socket (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
11. OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
3.1
Cleaning the registration roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
3.2
3.3
Cleaning the registration sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130

Removing and reinstalling the conveyance belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

4.1
Cleaning the paper exit roller/the paper exit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
4.2 Cleaning the reverse roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

5. REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134
III SERVICE TOOL
3. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
C-208 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
1.2
1.3
Removing and reinstalling the clutch replacement cover and the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137
Removing and reinstalling the paper feed pick-up cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138
2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139

2.1
Cleaning the paper dust removing brush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
2.2
2.3
Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140

Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141
2.4
Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142
2.5
Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144
3. TRAY UP/DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145

3.1 Removing and reinstalling the rear drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145
3.2
Removing and reinstalling the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
V CODE LIST
1.1
IV SERVICE
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
FN-9/FN120 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1.1
1.2
Removing and reinstalling of the booklet tray (FN-9 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159

Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
1.3
Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
1.4
Removing and reinstalling of the side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
1.5
Removing and reinstalling of the finisher door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161

iii
VI DIAGRAMS
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
1.6
Removing and reinstalling of the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162
1.7
Removing and reinstalling of the main tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163
1.8
Removing and reinstalling of the main paper exit opening cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
1.9 Removing and reinstalling of the booklet paper exit opening cover (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
2. CONVEYANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165
2.1
Replacing the paper exit roller /A (sponge roller). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165
2.2
Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167
II ADJUSTMENT
2.3 Removing and reinstalling of the paper exit opening unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168
3. MAIN TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170
3.1
Replacing the tray up/down motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170
3.2
Removing and reinstalling of the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171
4. STACKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
4.1 Replacing the stacking assist roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
4.2
Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
4.3
Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-176
III SERVICE TOOL
5. STAPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
5.1 Removing and reinstalling of the stapler unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
5.2
Replacing the clincher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-180
5.3
Replacing the stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182
PK-5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. PUNCH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185
1.1 Replacing the Punch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185
1.2
Cleaning the Punch Edges and Punch Scraps Full PS (PS802) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188
IV SERVICE
Cover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. External Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189
1.1 Removing / Re-installing the External covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189
2. Paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191
2.1
Replacing the Paper feed roller and Feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191
2.2
Replacing the Double feed prevent roller and Torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-192
V CODE LIST
TMG-3 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. TRIMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193
1.1 Replacing the trimmer knife /U and trimmer knife /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193
II
ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.1
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
VI DIAGRAMS
4. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

4.1
Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
4.2
4.3
Display transition of 36 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Display transition of 25 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
4.4
Display transition of Key Operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

iv
CONTENTS
6. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
6.1
6.2
List of adjustment items for 25 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
6.3
Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
6.5
Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

6.4.1
6.4.2
Standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Non-standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
6.4.3
Wide paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

6.5.1
6.5.2
Count reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Change setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
6.6
Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
6.7
Parts counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

6.7.1
6.7.2
Count of special parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Count of each parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
6.8
Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
6.9
Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
6.10 M/C serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

6.11 Indication of ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
6.12 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
6.13 Setting date input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
6.14 Board change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
7. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
7.1
7.2
III SERVICE TOOL
6.4
II ADJUSTMENT
Checking method of the P function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
7.2.1
7.2.2
High voltage adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Drum peculiarity adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
7.2.3
Sensor output check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
7.2.4
Exclusive paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
IV SERVICE
5.1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
7.2.5 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

7.3 Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
7.3.2
Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
7.3.3
7.3.4
RADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

Centring adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
7.3.5
Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
7.3.6
Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Image quality adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81

7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
7.4.2
Printer gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
7.4.3
Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
7.4.4
7.4.5
Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88

Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
7.4.6
ACS adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
7.4.7
Density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91

v
V CODE LIST
7.4
Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
VI DIAGRAMS
7.3.1
II ADJUSTMENT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
7.5
7.4.8
Tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
7.4.9
Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
7.5.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95

7.6 Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
7.7
7.8
7.9
Test pattern density setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100

Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
7.8.1
7.8.2
Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101

Fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
7.8.3
Cover sheet tray size adjustment (Cover Inserter D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
7.8.4
Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
7.8.5
7.8.6
Punch adjustment (PK-5 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103

Three-folding adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
7.8.7
2 positions staple pitch adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
IV SERVICE
III SERVICE TOOL
8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
8.2
Adjustment data display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
8.3
Hard disk check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
8.4
8.5
Input check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109

Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131

9.1
Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
9.2
9.3
Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132

Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
9.4
Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
9.5
Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
9.6
9.7
FNS adjustment of the by-pass conveyance guide plate magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138

FNS adjustment of the by-pass gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
9.8
FNS adjustment of the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141
9.9
FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144

9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
V CODE LIST
9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150

9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FN-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FN-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158
9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
VI DIAGRAMS
9.21 LCT tray mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167

9.22 LCT skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
vi
CONTENTS
9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176

9.28 PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch hole position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
9.29 Sensitivity adjustment for the PK paper edge sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
9.30 PI Centering Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
9.31 Adjusting the tilt of PI (when PK punch is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
III SERVICE TOOL
1.3.2
1.3.3
Data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

ISW transfer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3.4
Instances of ISW transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.3.5
Setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
2. UPDATING WITH ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

2.1 Setting Up ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
2.2
2.1.1
Installing the application program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
2.1.2
Setting up ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
2.1.3
2.1.4
ISW Trns Main Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Parallel port setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Copying Transfer Data (Update Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
2.3
Connecting the CF5001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
2.4
Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
2.4.1 Update operation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
2.4.2
Checking the ROM version of the copier (before updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.3
Preparing the copier to transfer.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.4
2.4.5
Running ISW Trns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2.4.6
Selecting a version of transfer files (update data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
2.4.7
Verifying transfer files (update data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
2.4.8
2.4.9
Transmitting transfer files (update data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Exiting ISW Trns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
2.4.10 Verifying the ROM version of the copier (after updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
2.5
ISW Trns Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2.6
Troubleshooting ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

2.6.1 Unable to run ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.7
2.6.2
Send file is not displayed when a combo box item is selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.3
NG produced by a file check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
2.6.4
2.6.5
?? produced by a file check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Unsuccessful file transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Connecting to the ISW connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

2.7.1
Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3 INTERNET ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.1 What is the Internet ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
vii
III SERVICE TOOL
Board used for the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
IV SERVICE
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3.1
V CODE LIST
1.3
Description of the ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Installing the USB driver for ISWTrns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
VI DIAGRAMS
1.1
1.2
II ADJUSTMENT
1. ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
3.2
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.3
Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.4
Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

3.4.1
3.4.2
3.5
Setting on Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Setting on Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

3.5.1
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
II ADJUSTMENT
3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

3.6 Internet ISW using Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.7
V CODE LIST
IV SERVICE
III SERVICE TOOL
3.8
3.6.1
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.6.2
How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

3.7.1 Prior announcement to administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.2
If power failure occurs during data rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.3
ISW of multiple programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.7.4 If ISW fails in low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.1
What is a proxy server? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.2
Authentication of proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.8.3
3.8.4
Type and command list for authentication on proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
4 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

4.1
What is the Mail remote notification system?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4.2
4.3
Operation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4.4
How to use the Mail remote notification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
4.5
Disabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
IV SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.1 Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.2
Maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
1.3
Periodic check items (main body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
1.4
1.5
Periodic check items (AFR-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Periodic check items (C-208). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
1.6
Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
1.7
Periodic check items (Cover Inserter D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
1.8
1.9
Periodic check items (TMG-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
1.10 Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
VI DIAGRAMS
2. COPY MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

2.1
2.2
Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
2.3
PM parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
viii
CONTENTS
V CODE LIST
1. JAM CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. ERROR CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
3. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
VI DIAGRAMS
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
AFR-20 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
1.3
C-208 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
1.4
1.5
FN-120/FN-9 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

TMG-3 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

2.1
Main Body connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
2.2
2.3
AFR-20 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

C-208 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
2.4
FN-120/FN-9 connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
2.5
TMG-3 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

3.1 Main Body timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
3.2
AFR-20 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
3.3
C-208 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
3.4
3.5
FN-120/FN-9 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52

TMG-3 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
III SERVICE TOOL
1.2
II ADJUSTMENT
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

1.1 CF5001 parts layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
4.1
AFR-20 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
4.2
4.3
C-208 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61

FN-120/FN-9 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
4.4
TMG-3 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
4.5
Cover Inserter D Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
IV SERVICE
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8)
5.2
5.3
5.4

5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8

VI DIAGRAMS
5.1
V CODE LIST
4.6 PK-5 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68

5. APPENDIX
ix
VI DIAGRAMS
V CODE LIST
IV SERVICE
III SERVICE TOOL

II ADJUSTMENT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
Blank page
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Minolta Corporation strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by Minolta-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service manual was printed.
Accordingly, Minolta Corporation does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in
this Service manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

CAUTION
In this Service manual, each of three expressions
DANGER,
WARNING, and
CAUTION is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.

When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.

:Prohibition when using the copier.
:Direction when using the copier.
General precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General prohibition
Do not touch with wet hand
Do not disassemble
General instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
1.
MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY MINOLTA
Minolta copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and
a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical
aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For
this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

Using any cables or power cord not specified by Minolta.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by Minolta. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by Minolta.
Using parts not specified by Minolta.
S-2
2.
CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Minolta copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in
order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However,
in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain
safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
2.1 Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet

Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Minolta. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a.
Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
b.
If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by Minolta.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
S-3
kw
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
WARNING: Ground Lead

Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-4
WARNING: Ground Lead

Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
2.2. Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling

When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat
source such as a heater.
A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.
Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:
Temperature: 10 C to 30 C
Humidity: 10 % to 80 % (no dew condensation)
Avoid other environments as much as possible.
CAUTION: Ventilation
Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette smoke,
or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
S-5
CAUTION: Ventilation
The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (Service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.
Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from
the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
S-6
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.
(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)
Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
S-8
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
3.
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency
measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.

If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried
out quickly and Minolta Corporation must be notified.
To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site
checks, in accordance with instructions issued by Minolta Corporation.

For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in Serious Accident
Report/Follow-up Procedures.
4.
CONCLUSION
Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration.
Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer
engineer.
When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must
verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
S-9
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious
accidents.
Overall protection circuit
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit
These safety circuits are described below to provide
them in order to prevent servicing errors that may
the service engineer with a renewed awareness of
impair their functions.
1.
Overall protection circuit

CBR1
NF
CBR2
8050sf001
1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)

CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in
the AC line.
CAUTION:
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
2.
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating
prevention circuit
PRCB
ACDB
TH1
L2
TH3
TH2
Control
section
AC driver
section
FHCB
TS1
L3
TS2
L4
TH4
RL1
RL1
8050sf002e
2.1 Protection by software

The output voltage from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is read
by the CPU. If this voltage is abnormal, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening main relay (RL1).
CAUTION:
The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the
specified clearances.
The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit

The output voltages from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2), fixing
temperature sensor /3 (TH3), and fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) are compared with the abnormality
judgment reference value in the comparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1, TH2, TH3, or TH4
exceeds the reference value, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening RL1.
CAUTION:
The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the
specified clearances.
Periodically check the contact between the fixing upper roller and TH3 and the contact
between the fixing lower roller and TH4, and replace them if any abnormality is detected.
The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2)

When the temperature of the fixing upper roller exceeds the specified value, TS1 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L2 and L3 directly. When the temperature of the fixing lower roller exceeds the specified value, TS2 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L4 directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2.
S-12
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid
burns and electric shock.
8050sf003e
CAUTION
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury.
S-13
8050sf004e
CAUTION
S-14
8050sf005e
CAUTION
S-15
8050sf006e
CAUTION
S-16
8050sf007e
CAUTION
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury..
S-17
PS
Unplug the machine before removing platen glass.

Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d'exposition.
Desenchufe la maquina antes de quitar el vidrio.
~
Desconecte a unidade da tomada antes de remover o vidro de exposicao.
8050sf008e
CAUTION
S-18
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
EXTERIOR
Caution:
Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before disassembly or assembly.
1. EXTERIOR
1.1
Replacing the dust filter /2
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle

Dust filter /2: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the filter cover
[2].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3001
2. Pull out the dust filter /2 [2] from the filter cover
[1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
1-1
[2]
8050ma3002
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
EXTERIOR
1.2
Replacing the dust filter /1

and the ozone filter /1

Dust filter /1: Every 100,000 copies
Ozone filter /1: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover /
[1]
2 [2].
[2]
[1]
8050ma3004
2. Pull out the filter replacement duct [1].
[1]
1-2
8050ma3005
EXTERIOR
ter /3 [3] from the filter replacement duct [1].
[1]
[3]
[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Remove the 2 dust filters /1 [2] and the ozone fil4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
When reinstalling the ozone filter /1, be careful not snap and fracture it.
When reinstalling the dust filter /1, be sure to
press it against the stopper section [4] of the
filter replacement duct.
[4]
1-3
8050ma3006
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
EXTERIOR
1.3
Replacing the toner collection box

Toner collection box: Every 50,000 copies (to be
replaced by the user)
B. Procedure
1. Open the toner collection door [1] and pull out
[1]
the toner collection box [2].
[2]
1-4
8050ma3007
EXTERIOR
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Peel the label [2] off the toner collection box [1]
and plug the entrance of the toner collection box
[1].
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
1-5
8050ma3008
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
EXTERIOR
1.4
Angle adjustment
operation board
of
the
Note:
The operation board can be set at the two
steps of 7 and 18 degrees depending on the
front cover /2 provided or not provided.
When the front cover /2 provided: 7 degrees
When the front cover /2 not provided: 18
degrees
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply
[3]
door [2].
[4]
[5]
[3]
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and release the fixing of

the operation board [4].
3. With the operation board raised up, remove the
front cover /2 [5] (when the angle is changed
from 7 to 18 degrees).
4. Fasten the operation board [4] with 2 screws [3].
5. Close the front door [1] and the toner supply
door [2].
[2]
Note:
When changing the angle of the operation
board from 18 to 7 degrees, install the front
cover /2 by following Step 3.
[1]
1-6
8050ma3009
Removing and reinstalling

the main board unit
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.5
EXTERIOR
A. Procedure
1. Remove the platen cover.
2. Remove the filter cover. (See "1.1 Replacing the
dust filter /2.")
3. Loosen 2 screws [1], remove 13 screws [2], and
then remove the rear cover [3].
[8]
[6] [5] [7]
[6] [5]
[4]
4. Remove the side cover /2. (See "1.2 Replacing

the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1.")
5. Remove the screws [5], one for each, and then
remove the 2 original cover supports [6].
[4]
6. Remove 2 caps [4].

7. Remove 4 screws [7] and then remove the scan-
[2]
ner cover /R [8].
[2]
[2]
[3]
8. Remove the special screw [1].
9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the
[1]
[3]
8050ma3010
[1]
board seal plate /2 [3].
[2]
1-7
8050ma3011
EXTERIOR
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10. Remove 5 connectors [1].
[1]
11. With the lock lever [2] brought down this side,
[3]
[1]
release the lock and pull out the ribbon cable [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3012
Note:
Move the lock lever [1] forward, then insert the
ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector
[2]
while ensuring that the conductive face of the

ribbon cable [3] is positioned on the opposite
side of the lock lever.
[1]
1-8
[3]
EXTERIOR
original position, lock the ribbon cable [2].
[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Then with the lock lever [1] brought back to its
[1]
[1]
board seal plate /4 [2].
[2]
1-9
8050ma3013
EXTERIOR
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
13. Remove a bracket cable clamp [1].
[4]
[3]
15. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the main

board unit [4].
steps in reverse.
Note:
When removing or reinstalling the main board
unit, be careful that the battery on the memory
board (MB) does not touch with the frame.
[2]
[1]
1-10
[3]
8050ma3014
SCANNER
2.1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. SCANNER
Screws that must not be
removed
Note:
Screws that have been paint-locked are not
[1]
allowed to be removed. So, be careful not to

remove them.
[1]
2.2
[1]
[1]
8050ma3015

the platen glass
A. Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the original positioning plate /R [2].
[4]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[5]
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the original positioning plate /L [4].
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and the remove the scanner cover /M [6].
4. Remove the platen glass [7].
steps in reverse.
Note:
Be sure to reinstall the platen glass with its
white reference plate [8] up.
[3]
1-11
[8]
[7]
8050ma3016
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
SCANNER
2.3

the CCD unit
A. Procedure for removal

1. Remove the platen glass. (See "2.2 Removing
and reinstalling the platen glass.")
2. Remove the connector [1].
3. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the CCD
cover [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the ribbon cable cover [5].
[4]
[1]
[5] [3]
[2]
8050ma3141
5. With the lock lever [1] brought down, release the

lock and pull out the ribbon cable [2].
Note:
Move the lock lever [1] downward, then insert
the ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector
while ensuring that the conductive face of the
ribbon cable is positioned on the opposite
side of the lock lever.
Then bring the lock lever back to its original
position, lock the ribbon cable.
[1]
1-12
[2]
8050ma3142
SCANNER
6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD
[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
unit [2].
Note:
Be careful not to remove screws other than
those
mentioned
above.
Otherwise,
it
becomes necessary to make all sort of optical

adjustments which cannot be handled in the
field.
Be careful not to touch the lens. This may
result in poor images.
steps in reverse.
[1]
1-13
8050ma3143
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
SCANNER
2.4

the exposure unit
A. Procedure for removal

1. Remove the slit glass. (See "2.2 Removing and
reinstalling the slit glass.")
2. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing of the toner supply section.")
[2]
4. Remove 6 screws [1].
[1]
[2]
5. After removing the relay connector [4] with the

scanner cover /F [3] shifted to the front side
once, remove the scanner cover /F [3].
[3]
[4]
[1]
8050ma3017
1-14
SCANNER
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the fixing of
[1]
the exposure unit [2].
[5]
[4]
[2]
7. Rotate the exposure unit [2] while holding it horizontally, pull it up and place it upon the scanner
room [6].
[3]
[6]
9. Remove the screw [2] and release the cable [4]
[2]
[5]
[1] [3]
[1]
8050ma3018
[5]
from the cable holder [3].

10. Remove the exposure unit [5].
[4]
1-15
8050ma3019
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
SCANNER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
B. Procedure for reinstallation

1. Set the exposure unit [1] into the main body.
2. Move the V-mirror unit [2] to the paper exit side,
[2]
[4]
[1]
and pass an optical positioning jig [3] through

each of the exposure unit [1] and the V-mirror
unit [2] from the front side.
Note:
When reinstalling the exposure unit, be sure
to use the optical positioning jig.
3. Fasten the exposure unit [1] with 2 screws [4].
4. Remove 2 optical positioning jigs [3].
5. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[4]
[3]
1-16
8050ma3020

the exposure lamp
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.5
SCANNER
A. Procedure
1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing
and reinstalling the exposure unit.")
2. Cut the binding band [1] and release the fixing
of the cable [2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the HP
[1]
[3]
[6]
detection plate [4].

4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove L1 (exposure lamp) [6].
steps in reverse.
[2]
1-17
[4]
[5]
8050ma3021
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
SCANNER
2.6
Removing the scanner wire
A. Procedure
1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing
and reinstalling the exposure unit.")
3. Remove the screw [2] and remove the scanner
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
cover /R [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and remove the scanner
cover /L [5].
[5]
5. Loosen the screws [1], one for each, and
release the fixing of two spring fixing plates [2].
8050ma3022
[2]
[1]
1-18
8050ma3023
SCANNER
8. Remove the scanner wire /R [2] from the drive
/R [2] from the spring fixing plate [1], and then

remove the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of
pulley [10].
9. Remove the scanner wire /F [11] by following
the pulley /3 [4], the outside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /2 [6].
7. Remove the metal bead [8] of the scanner wire /
R [2] from the wire stopper [7], and then remove
the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of the inside
of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /1 [9].
Steps 5 to 7.
Note:
The scanner wires /F and /R are installed symmetrically.
[9]
[5]
[10]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[11]
[2]
1-19
[7] [8]
8050ma3024
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6. Remove the wire terminal [3] of the scanner wire
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
SCANNER
2.7
Reinstalling the scanner wire
A. Procedure
1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side,
and pass the optical positioning jig [2] through
[1]
the V-mirror unit [1] from the front side.

Note:
Be careful not to damage the mirror with the
jig.
When reinstalling the scanner wire, be sure to
fasten the V-mirror with the optical positioning jig.
[2]
2. Drop into the fitting hole of the drive pulley [4] a
[6] [5]
metal bead [3] provided at the center of each of
8050ma3025
[1]
the scanner wires /F [1] and /R [2], and starting
[4]
from this hole, wind the scanner wire 2.5 turns

[5] outwards and 3.5 turns [6] inwards.
[3]
[7]
[8]
Note:
For the scanner wires /F and /R, common
wires are used.
Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that
[8]
[4]
the wire terminal is on the outside and the

metal bead [7] on the inside.
Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that
both ends of the wire come out under the
drive pulley.
Be sure to wind each of the scanner wires
closely around the drive pully with no wire
running on another wire.
[5] [6]
[2]
[4]
[3]
3. After winding the scanner wires /F and R/, be

sure to fasten each wire end with a tape [8] so
that it will not come off.
1-20
[7]
8050ma3026
SCANNER
6. Reinstall the scanner wire /F [11] by following
[3] side (inside) which is wound around the drive
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the metal bead
Steps 4 and 5.
pulley [1] through the pulley /1 [4] and the V-mirror pulley [5] in this order, and then hook the
metal bead [3] onto the wire stopper [6].
5. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the wire terminal
[7] side (outside) which is wound around the
drive pulley [1] through the pulley /2 [8] and the
outside of V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /3 [9]
in this order, and then hook the wire terminal [7]
onto the spring fixing plate [10].
[9]
[5]
[10]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[3]
FRONT
[2]
[3]
[1]
[11]
[2]
1-21
[7] [8]
8050ma3027
SCANNER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7. Tighten the screws [1], one for each, and fasten

the 2 spring fixing plates [2].
[2]
[1]
1-22
8050ma3140
WRITING
3.1
Screw that
removed
must
not
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. WRITING
be
Note:
The screws [1] of each unit of the YMCK are
not allowed to be removed. So, be careful not
to remove them.
[1]
1-23
8050ma3028
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
WRITING
3.2

the write unit
Warning:
Be sure that the write unit should not be
powered with it slid from its normal installation position.
Be sure not to remove the write unit cover
while being supplied with power. Otherwise,
laser beams get into your eyes and you may
lose your sight.
Note:
Be sure not to remove the write unit cover. Do
not loosen the screws, either.
When removing the write unit, be careful not
to touch the dust glass (to prevent the mirror
from being stained).
Be sure not to remove the write unit for at
least two minutes after the main power switch
is turned off.
When replacing the side cover /1, insert the
prong [1] on the side cover /1 into the notch
on the main body.
[1]
8050ma3175
A. Procedure
1. Open the by-pass tray [1].
[4]
[5]
[2]
2 [3].
1 [5].
[3]
[1]
1-24
8050ma3029
WRITING
[2]
5. Remove 10 screws [2] and then remove the fan
[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Remove 5 relay connectors [1].

holder /R [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3030
Note:
Check the direction where the fan is assembled.
[1] Turn the label side inside.
[2] Turn the label side outside.
[1]
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the write
[3]
pressing board [2] while pressing it downward.
[2]
5001ma3030
[1]
7. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove 2 write

cooling ducts [4].
Note:
Be sure to hold the upper half of the write
pressing board when removing it.
[4]
[3]
1-25
[2]
8050ma3031
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
WRITING
8. Remove the connectors [1], 2 each, and then

remove the write unit /Y [2], write unit /M [3],
[1]
[2]
write unit /C [4] and the write unit /K [5].
[1]

steps in reverse.
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[1]
8050ma3032
Note:
The write units /C, /M and /Y are all common.
The bottom of the write units /C, /M and /Y is
provided with a wire tension spring [1] which
differentiates these three write units from the
write unit /K.
Be careful not install any other write unit in
the installation place for the write unit /K.
[1]
1-26
8050ma3034
PROCESS UNIT
4.1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. PROCESS UNIT
Flow of the disassembly of
the process unit section
Open the toner supply section
Open the front fan cover
Pull out the process unit
Remove the charging corona unit
Pull out the transfer belt unit
Remove the drum cartridge
Remove the developing unit
Remove the process unit
Remove the image correction unit
1-27
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
4.2
Cleaning the charging

corona unit
A. Procedure
Note:
The charging corona units are provided for
the four colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and
black. These units are common. Do not reuse
a charging corona unit that was once used for
a color since it has been stuck with the toner
of the color.
1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section.")
2. With the lever [2] of the charging corona unit [1]
pressed down once to the lower right side, pull
out the charging corona unit this side for
removal.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3037
1-28
PROCESS UNIT
3. Remove a charging cleaning block [3] from the
[3]
charging suction assembly [2] provided on the
[1]
outside of the toner supply unit [1].

Note:
There are two charging cleaning blocks provided. Be sure to use either of these two
blocks when cleaning the charging corona.
[2]
8050ma3038
4. Holding the charging corona unit [2] so that the

charging control plate [1] comes up, set the
charging cleaning block [3] to the notch and
insert it from under the bottom on the rear side,
[1]
and turn it about 45 clockwise.

Note:
If the charging wire is cleaned with the charg-
[2]
ing control plate facing down, there is a risk

that dust that has stuck to the charging wire
sticks to the charging control plate. So, when
cleaning the charging wire, be sure to hold the
charging corona unit so that the charging
control plate comes upward.
5. Clean the charging wire [4] by sliding back and
forth the charging cleaning block [3].
steps in reverse.
[3]
1-29
8050ma3039
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
4.3
Cleaning/replacing, removing and reinstalling

the charging wire assy
/the charging control plate

Charging wire assy: Every 100,000 copies
Charging control plate: Every 200,000 copies
Charging grid spring: Every 200,000 copies
Note:
The charging corona unit is made up of a
charging wire assy, charging control plate and
a charging grid spring.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the charging corona unit. (See "4.2
Cleaning and replacing the charging corona
unit.")
2. Remove 2 charging control springs [1] and then
remove the charging control plate [2].
3. Clean the charging control plate by blowing off
dust with a blower brush.
steps in reverse.
Note:
Be sure to install the charging control plate so
that the side on which the charging control
spring is hooked comes to the front of the
[2]
charging corona unit.

Be sure to install each of the charging control
springs with its tips [3] of both ends point
toward the charging wire.
[1]
[3]
1-30
[2]
8050ma3040
Pulling out the process unit
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.4
PROCESS UNIT
Note:
In order to prevent the main body from falling
down, the process unit and the ADU are provided with a safety mechanism so that they
cannot be pulled out at the same time.
If the ADU has been pulled out when pulling
out the process unit, be sure to push it back
into the main body.
A. Procedure
2. Loosen the screw [1] and open the front fan
[2]
cover [2].
[1]
3. Bring down the stand handle /L [1] and the
stand handle /R [2] to the inside at the same
8050ma3035
[3]
time to release the fixing of the process unit [3].

Then, hold each of the stand handles to pull out
the process unit [3].
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
1-31
8050ma3036
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
4.5

the transfer belt unit
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out
the process unit.")
2. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each.
[2]
3. After turning once the belt positioning shaft [2]

counterclockwise, pull it out for removal.
[1]
[1]
8050ma3043
4. Remove the supporting rod [3] from the charging corona suction assembly [2] provided on the
[3]
[1]
inside of the toner supply unit [1].

Note:
The supporting rod is an auxiliary device to
allow a removed transfer belt unit to self
stand. When removing the transfer belt unit,
be sure to make necessary arrangements in
advance.
[2]
1-32
8050ma3044
PROCESS UNIT
[1]
fer belt unit [2].
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. With the handle [1] raised up, remove the trans-
[2]
Note:
Be careful not to touch and damage the transfer belt [3] with bare hands.
Make sure to grab both ends of the handle of
the transfer belt with both hands.
[3]
Hold
Hold
[1]
[2]
5001ma3045
6. Set the supporting rod [2] to the transfer belt unit

[1] to allow it to self stand.
steps in reverse.
Note:
Make sure not to touch and damage the transfer belt unit with the drum at installation.
[2]
1-33
[1]
8050ma3046
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
When reinstalling the transfer belt unit [1], be
[1]
sure to turn the cam [3] clockwise fully until it

will not turn any more before starting work.
Be sure to install the transfer belt unit so that
2 transfer support blocks /F [4] and the 2
transfer support blocks /R [5] are accompanied with the guide pins [2] provided at two
places each at front and rear.
[2]
[2]
Be sure not to rotate the transfer belt when

the transfer belt unit self stand with a supporting rod.
[3]
[5]
1-34
[4]
8050ma3047
Replacing the belt cleaning

brush unit
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.6
PROCESS UNIT

Belt cleaning brush unit: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
2. Remove 2 screws [2] while holding the belt
[2]
cleaning unit [1] by hand, and then remove the
[2]
belt cleaning unit.

3. Replace the belt cleaning brush unit with a new
one.
steps in reverse.
Note:
[1]
The belt cleaning unit is made up of the belt

cleaning brush unit and the parts listed below.
(For details of these parts, see "4.7 Replacing
the belt cleaning blade" and "4.8 Replacing
the toner collection sheet /1.")
Belt cleaning blade : 1 piece
Blade spring : 2 pieces
[3]
Stop ring : 2 pieces

Blade fulcrum shaft : 1 piece
8050ma3048
Toner collection sheet /1 : 1 piece

Toner collection sheet /2 : 1 piece
Screw : 3 pieces
Before installing the belt cleaning unit, apply
the setting powder on the portion [3] on the
transfer belt.
When reinstalling it, set the guide sections
provided on both sides below the belt cleaning unit to the pins of the transfer belt unit,
and then attach the screws.
1-35
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
4.7
Replacing the belt cleaning

blade

Belt cleaning blade: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the belt cleaning unit. (See "4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning unit.")
2. Remove 2 blade springs [1].
[4]
3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the
[3]
blade support shaft [3] and remove the belt

cleaning blade [4].
steps in reverse.
Note:
Before installing the belt cleaning unit, coat
the entire surface on the side on the transfer
belt, on which the belt cleaning unit is to be
mounted, with the setting powder.
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3049
1-36
Replacing the toner collection sheet /1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.8
PROCESS UNIT

Toner collection sheet /1: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the belt cleaning unit.
2. After removing 3 screws [1], remove the toner
collection sheet /2 [2] and then remove the toner
collection sheet /1 [3].
steps in reverse.
Note:
Be careful not to fold the PET sheet of the
toner collection sheet /1, or damage it by hitting it on the edge.
[1]
[2]
1-37
[3]
8050ma3159
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
4.9
Replacing the belt separation claw

Belt separation claw: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the sep-
[3]
aration claw unit [2].

Note:
Be careful not to touch and/or damage the
[4]
transfer belt [3] with bare hands.

When reinstalling the separation claw unit, be
sure to apply setting powder to the semicircle
[4] of the transfer belt [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3050
3. Remove the screws [1], one each, and then

remove 3 transfer belt separation claws [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3051
1-38
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.10 Replacing the transfer belt

A. Screw that must not be removed
Note:
The screws [1] shown in the drawing below
are not allowed to be removed. Be careful not
to remove them.
B. Periodically replaced parts/cycle

Transfer belt: Every 200,000 copies
[1]
8050ma3148
C. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-
[1]
ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")
[1]
2. Remove the belt cleaning unit. (See "4.6

Replacing the belt cleaning unit.")
3. Remove the separation claw unit. (See "4.9
Replacing the belt separation claw.")
4. Remove 2 tension springs [1].
8050ma3053
1-39
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. Stand up the transfer belt unit [1] by using the
[2]
front side of the transfer belt unit [1] as the bot-
[3] [6]
tom.
6. Remove the screw [2] and release the fixing of
the handle [3].
[7]
7. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the shaft

stopper [5].
8. Remove the screw [6] and then remove the tension plate /R [7].
[4]
[5]
Note:
When reinstalling the tension plate /R, knock
against the projection of the tension plate /R.
9. Remove 2 screws [8] and then remove the high
voltage supply curler /R [9].
10. Remove the stop ring [10] and then remove the
bearing [11].
[12]
[1]
Note:
When reinstalling the stop ring, be sure to
raise the shaft so that the stop ring is set in
[11]
[8]
the groove of the shaft.

11. Pull up the transfer belt [12] for removal.
Note:
Be sure to reinstall the transfer belt so that
[10]
[9]
8050ma3054
the rear side stamped with "UP SIDE" at the

edge of the belt comes up.
When holding the transfer belt by hand, hold it
within 10mm from the upper end. Be careful
not touch any part other than this.
steps in reverse.
8050ma3152
Note:
Be careful not to touch and/or damage the
transfer belt with bare hands.
Before installing the belt cleaning unit, coat
the entire surface on the side on the transfer
belt, on which the belt cleaning unit is to be
mounted, with the setting powder.
1-40
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer

roller
1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K: Every 200,000
copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing
[5]
the transfer belt.")
[7]
2. Place the transfer belt unit as shown in the illustration.

3. Remove the stop ring [1].
4. After removing 1 bearing [2], slide the stopper /4
[3] to open the tip end of the transfer release
arm [4].
5. Remove the 1st transfer roller /K [6] while sliding
[7]
[7]
it.
6. Remove 3 1st transfer rollers/Y, /M, /C [5].
[4] [3]
Note:
[7] [6]
[3] [4]
Be sure to reinstall the 1st transfer roller so

that a shallow groove near the groove of the
E-ring comes this side.
7. Remove the E-rings [7], 2 each, from each of
the 1st transfer rollers.
steps in reverse.
1-41
[1]
[2]
8050ma3055
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
4.12 Replacing the 2nd transfer

roller /U
2nd transfer roller /U: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing
the transfer belt.")
2. After raising the 2nd transfer roller /U [1] once,
[2]
remove it diagonally from the lower side.

Note:
The fixing of the 2nd transfer roller /U was
released when the transfer belt was removed
at the time of the removal of the high voltage
supply curler.
Be sure to reinstall the 2nd transfer roller /U
[1]
so that the shaft end with a dent comes to the

bottom.
3. Remove 2 bearings [2] from the 2nd transfer
roller /U [1].

steps in reverse.
2
[2]
1-42
[1]
8050ma3056
the
drum
car-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.13 Replacing
tridge
PROCESS UNIT

Drum cartridge: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
Note:
The drum cartridges are provided for the four
colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black,
and they are all common. However, be sure to
avoid reusing a drum cartridge that was once
used for a color since it has been stuck with
the toner of that color.
2. After raising once both ends [2] of the drum stay
/U [1], hold them and remove the drum cartridge
/Y [3].
[2]
[8]
3. Remove the drum cartridge /M [4], drum car-
[7]
[3]
tridge /C [5] and the drum cartridge /K [6] in the

same manner as in Step 2.
steps in reverse.
[4]
[1]
[5]
Note:
When reinstalling each drum cartridge, be
[6]
sure to check if both ends of the cartridge

have been dropped into the grooves of the
drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8]. (The
drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8] are
for yellow drum cartridges. Repeat the steps
for other cartridges in the same manner.)
When reinstalling the drum cartridge /K [6], be
careful that the mylar [9] is not caught up.
Be careful not touch and damage the photosensitive material of the drum with bare
hands.
When the drum cartridge is not used for a
long period of time, be sure to store it in the
dark place with a cover on it (to shield the
light).
1-43
[9]
8050ma3057
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
4.14 Removing and reinstalling

the drum
A. Screw that must not be removed
Note:
Screws that are paint locked are not allowed
to be removed. Be careful not to remove them
at all costs.
[1]
[1]
8050ma3058
B. Procedure
1. Remove the drum cartridge. (See "4.13 Replacing the drum cartridge.")
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the drum
stay /U [2].
[1]
[2]
1-44
8050ma3059
PROCESS UNIT
remove the coupling /A [2].

[6]
5. Remove the position adjusting plate /R [8].

screw idler gear [5].
7. Remove 3 screws [6] (be careful not to remove
black screw.).
8. Remove the position adjusting plate /F [7].
9. Hold both ends of the drum [9] and raise it up for
[9]
removal.
[7] [5]
[4]
Note:
Be sure to reinstall the drum so that the coupling side of the drum flange comes to the
rear side of the drum cartridge.
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
1-45
[1]
[8]
8050ma3060
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Remove the coupling shaft /A [1] and then
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
4.15 Replacing
unit
the
developing

Developing unit: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
Note:
Be careful not to fold the Teflon sheet posted
at the developing sleeve side of the developing unit upper cover.
When cleaning the developing unit, be sure to
use Hydro-Wipe which is specified as a CE
tool. Using paper or cloth other than HydroWipe will cause the developing regulation
plate in the developing unit to be stuck with
dust and lint of the paper or cloth, thus resulting in white streaks on the images.
The developing units are provided for the four
colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black,
and they are all common. However, be sure to
avoid reusing a developing unit that was once
used for a color since it has been stuck with
the toner of that color.
[2]
[3]
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove 4 developing support legs [3] provided inside the toner
supply unit [2].
Note:
When placing the developing unit by itself, be
sure to set the developing support legs to the
body of the developing unit as a seat to prevent the toner bristles section from getting in
[1]
[3]
touch with other sections.

3. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out
the process unit.")
8050ma3062
1-46
PROCESS UNIT
4. Remove the screws [1], 3 each, and then
[1]
remove 2 developing pressing blocks [2] while
[1]
sliding the upper side of the developing pressing

blocks.
[2]
8050ma3063
5. Remove the relay connectors [1], 1 each, and

then remove 4 developing units [2] one at a time.
steps in reverse. Place an appropriate color
label supplied with the developing unit on the
new unit.
Note:
Be careful not to open the developing unit
cover.
[1]
1-47
[2]
8050ma3064
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
4.16 Replacing the developer

Developer: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit. (See "4.15 Replacing the developing unit.")
2. Put the developing unit [1] on end and rotate its
upper end in drawing an arc to discharge developer. After discharging the developer, repeat
Steps 3 and 4 below to discharge all of the
developer.
8050ma3149
3. Install the rotating jig [1] provided inside the

toner supply unit to the coupling [2] on the agita-
[1]
[2]
tor screw side and turn it in the arrow-marked

direction.
8050ma3150
1-48
PROCESS UNIT
4. Install the rotating jig to the coupling [1] on the
[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
developing sleeve side and turn it in the arrowmarked direction.

Note:
If the jig is turned in the reverse direction, it
sometimes occurs that the developer is not
discharged completely. Be careful not to turn
it in the reverse direction.
5. Charge a new developer. (See "7. 36 mode," "II .
Adjustment" in Field Service.)
8050ma3151
1-49
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
4.17 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid

Developer: Every 1,500,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the solenoid lever [2].
3. Remove the relay connector [3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and release the cable [6]
from the cable clamp [5].
5. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the SD1
(belt separation claw solenoid) [8].
steps in reverse.
Note:
When having reinstalled the solenoid bar,
[8]
check to see if the shaft [9] of SD1 (belt separation claw solenoid) moves smoothly while
sliding it.
[7]
[4]
1-50
[5] [6] [3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3069
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY

the process unit
A. Procedure
2. Remove all of the drum cartridges. (See "4.13
Replacing the drum cartridge.")
3. Remove all of the developing units. (See "4.15
Replacing the developing unit.")
4. Remove the screws [1], 2 each.
Note:
When removing the process unit, be sure to
remove in advance the transfer belt unit, drum
[8]
cartridge and the developing unit.

Be careful not to remove black screws.
5. Push back the process unit [6] until it becomes
[4]
possible to see the screw [5] through each hole

[4] of the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3].
[2]
[6]
[1]
[5]
6. Remove the screws [5], 1 each.

Note:
7. Pull out the process unit [6] again. Then remove
it from the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3] as
explained below:
[6]
[7]
The projection [7] on the guide rail /L is set into

the notch [8] of the process unit. The notch [10]
of the process unit is placed on the projection [9]
on the guide rail /R. Accordingly, slide the guide
rail /L a little against the process unit to remove
[4]
it from the guide rail /L, and then remove it from

the guide rail /R by raising the process unit.
[5] [3]
[1]
steps in reverse.
[10]
[9]
8050ma3070
1-51
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT

the image correction unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the process unit. (See "4.18 Removing
and reinstalling the process unit.")
2. Remove a relay connector [1].
3. Remove 2 screws and then remove the image
correction unit [3].
[4]

steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
When removing the image correction unit, be
sure to remove in advance the process unit.
When removing the image correction unit, be
careful not to touch the drum drive shaft [4] of
each color. Otherwise, this may cause stress
to it.
1-52
[3]
[1]
[4]
8050ma3071
TONER SUPPLY
5.1
Opening and closing

toner supply section
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. TONER SUPPLY
the
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Loosen the screw [2] and open the toner supply
section [3].
Note:
With the toner supply section left open, be
sure not to apply force to the toner supply
sections such as the operation board. If
applied, the hinge of the toner supply section
may be deformed.
When closing the toner supply section,
tighten the screw with a hand before using a
[1]
driver to prevent stripping the thread.
[2]
[3]
8050ma3072
3. Remove once the door lock [2] provided on the

inside of the toner supply section [1] and replace
it at a new position where it becomes a stopper.
4. Close the front door following the steps for
opening in reverse order.
Note:
When the toner supply section is opened, be
sure to replace the door lock to a new position
where it becomes a stopper and prevent it
from getting in touch with the process unit
when being pulled out.
[2]
[2]
1-53
[1]
[1]
8050ma3073
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TONER SUPPLY
5.2
Replacing the charging dust

filter

Charging dust filter: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove the charging dust filter [3] from the
charging suction assembly [2] provided on the
[3]
[1]
inside of the toner supply section [1].

steps in reverse.
[2]
1-54
8050ma3074
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
6.1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3

the paper feed unit
A. Procedure
Note:
Since the composition of the paper feed trays
/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is
made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1 [1].
[3]
paper feed unit cover [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3160
1-55
I DIS./ASSEMBLY

4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down
shaft screw [3].
5. After sliding the paper feed unit [4] to the rear
side, lift it up. Remove the connector [5] and
[3]
then remove the paper feed unit [4].

[5]
steps in reverse.
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3161
1-56

the paper feed trays /1 to /3
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6.2
A. Procedure
Note:
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and lift up the paper feed
[1]
tray /1 [2] for removal.

steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3162
1-57
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6.3
Replacing the paper feed

roller and the feed rubber

Paper feed roller: Every 2,500,000 copies (Every
800,000 copies in actual replacement count)
Feed rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Every
B. Procedure
Note:
3. Remove 2 stop rings [1], slide 2 bearings [2] to
[1]
the outside and then remove the paper feed

roller assembly [3].
[2]
1-58
[3]
8050ma3163
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Remove a bearing [1].
[7]
5. Remove a stop ring [2] and then remove the

paper feed roller [3].
feed roller [5].
7. Remove the feed rubber [6] from the feed roller
[5].
steps in reverse.
[6]
Note:
[5]
Be sure to install the feed rubber [6] so that

the paint mark [7] turns in the arrow-marked
[4]
[1]
direction.
Be sure to check that each roller is not stuck
with grease.
[3]
1-59
[2]
8050ma3164
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6.4
Replacing the double feed

prevention rubber

Double feed prevention rubber: Every 400,000
copies (Every 125,000 copies in actual replacement count)
B. Procedure
Note:
3. Remove the paper feed roller assembly.
[5]
double feed prevention roller [2].

5. Remove the gear [3] from the double feed prevention roller [2].
6. Remove the double feed prevention rubber [4]
from the double feed prevention roller [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
Be sure to install the double feed prevention
rubber [4] so that the paint mark [5] turns in
the arrow-marked direction.
Be sure to check that the double feed prevention roller is not stuck with grease.
[3]
1-60
[4]
[2]
8050ma3165

clutch and the pre-registration clutch
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6.5

Paper feed clutches /1 to /3 (MC7, MC9, MC11):
Every 4,000,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies
in actual replacement count)
Pre-registration clutches /1 to /3 (MC8, MC10,
MC13):
Every
4,000,000
copies
(Every
2,000,000 copies in actual replacement count)

B. Procedure
Note:
[6]

MC7 [3].
MC8 [5].
[3]

steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
When reinstalling the clutches, be sure to
check that the stopper [6] of each clutch is in
the specified position.
[1]
[5]
1-61
[4]
8050ma3166
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6.6

the tray up/down wire
Wire length:
Up/down wire /A and up/down wire /C: 531mm
Up/down wire /B and up/down wire /D: 160mm
A. Removing the wire
Note:
3. Remove the paper feed tray /1.
4. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the wire
[7] [5]
cover /FR [2].
[6]
[2]

cover /FL [4].
cover /RR [6].
cover /RL [8].
[1]
[3]
[8]
1-62
[4]
8050ma3167
8. Remove an E-ring [1].
9. Slide the drive pulley [2] to the inside and
15. Slide the drive pulley [14] to the inside and
remove the wires /C [3] and /D [4].
remove the wires /A [15] and /B [16].
10. After removing an E-ring [5], remove the pulley

[6] and release the wires /C [3] and /D [4] from
the wire restraining cover [7].

[18] and release the wires /A [15] and /B [16]
from the wire restraining cover [19].
11. Remove a screw [8] from the bottom of the
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /D

[4].
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /B

[16].
[10] and release the wire /C [3] from the wire
[22] and release the wire /A [15] from the wire
restraining cover [11].

restraining cover [23].

paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /C
paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /A
[3].
[15].
[11]
[9]
[10]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[8]
[4]
[1]
[12]
[23]
[2]
[22]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[15]
[20]
[16]
[21]
[15]
[24]
[14] [13]
1-63
8050ma3168
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
B. Attaching the wire
4. After winding the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10]

around the pulley [11], insert it into the shaft [13]
Note:
together with the wire restraining cover [12] and

fasten it with an E-ring [14].

Note:
Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley
1. Install the wire /C [3] to the wire holding shaft [2]

with a screw [1] from the bottom side of the
[11] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the outside and the wire /D [10] to the inside.
paper feed tray.

2. After winding the wire /C [3] around the pulley
5. After sliding the drive pulley [15] to the outside
[4], insert it into the shaft [6] together with the

wire restraining cover [5] and fasten it with an E-
with the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10] inserted

into the up/down drive shaft [14], fasten it with
ring [7].
an E-ring [16].
3. Install the wire /D [10] to the wire holding shaft

[9] with a screw [8] from the bottom side of the
paper feed tray.
[5]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[12]
[11]
[4]
[13]
[3]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[16]
[2]
[1]
[14] [15]
[17]
[18]
[17]
8050ma3169
1-64
Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley

[14] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the outside and the wire /D [10] to the inside.
6. Install the wires /A [17] and /B [18] by following
Steps 1 to 5.
Note:
After completion of attaching the wires, be
sure to rotate the up/down drive shaft by hand
to check to see if the up/down plate goes up
and down smoothly.
1-65
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
BY-PASS TRAY
7. BY-PASS TRAY
7.1

roller and the feed roller

Paper feed roller: Every 800,000 copies in actual
replacement count
Feed roller: Every 125,000 copies in actual
replacement count
B. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and
reinstalling the ADU.")
[1]
paper feed solenoid cover [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Remove the stop ring [1].
[2]
4. Remove the bearing [2] and then remove the
8050ma3075
[1]
paper feed roller unit [3].
[3]
1-66
8050ma3076
BY-PASS TRAY
[2]
shaft [2] and remove the paper feed gear
[3]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. After removing the stop ring [1], pull out the feed
assembly [3].
6. Remove the paper feed roller [4] from the paper
feed gear assembly [3].
[4]
7. Remove the feed roller assembly [2] from the
by-pass drive shaft [1].
[1]
8050ma3077
[1]
8050ma3078
[4]
8. Remove the feed roller [3] from the feed roller

assembly [2].
Note:
Be sure to install the feed roller [3] so that the
paint mark [4] turns in the direction shown in
the drawling.
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
Note:
Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1]
so that the actuator section [2] coincides with
[4]
[3]
[2]
the detection section of the PS47 (no paper

sensor /BP) [3].
Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1]
so that the tip end of the paper feed side of
the paper up/down lever comes into contact
with the inside of the top plate of the paper
feed roller unit [1].
[1]
1-67
8050ma3079
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
BY-PASS TRAY
7.2

prevention roller

Double feed prevention roller: Every 125,000
copies in actual replacement count
B. Procedure
1. Remove the paper feed roller and the feed roller.
(See "Replacing the paper feed roller and the
feed roller.")
2. Remove 2 double feed pressure springs [1].
3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the dou-
[7]
ble feed prevention shaft [3] and remove the

flange [4] and the double feed prevention roller
assembly [5].
4. Remove the double feed prevention roller [6]
from the double feed prevention roller assembly
[5].
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
roller [6] so that the paint mark [7] turns in the
direction shown in the drawing.
[1]
1-68
[3] [2] [4]
[6]
[5]
8050ma3080

clutch /BP
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7.3
BY-PASS TRAY

Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6): Every 2,000,000
copies in actual replacement count
B. Procedure
3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and
reinstalling the fixing unit.")
4. Remove 4 screws [1]. (One of the screws is
installed on the underside of the ADU cover/R
[2].)
5. After pulling out the ADU cover /R [2] halfway,
[1]
remove 2 relay connectors [3] and then remove

the ADU cover /R [2].
6. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the
[1]
[2]
stand pulling lever [5].

7. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the ADU
cover /L [7].
[7]
[6]
1-69
[5]
[4]
[3]
8050ma3081
BY-PASS TRAY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]
[2]
paper feed clutch /BP (MC6) [3].

steps in reverse.
[1]
8050ma3082
Note:
When reinstalling the paper feed clutch /BP
[1]
(MC6) [1], be sure to set the stopper in the

detente groove [2].
[2]
1-70
8050ma3083
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
8.1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
8. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
the vertical conveyance
A. Procedure
[4]
4 [2].
5 [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
1-71
8050ma3170
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Pull out the paper feed trays /1 [1], /2 [2] and /3

[3].
[5]
4. Loosen a screw [4].

6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the side
cover /3 [7].
[6]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050ma3171
7. Push up the hooks [1] in 2 positions at both

sides, and separate the by-pass up/down cover
[2] from the vertical conveyance section [3].
[3]
[2]
1-72
[1]
8050ma3172
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE

9. Pull out the vertical conveyance section [2],
[1]
remove a connector [3] and then remove the

vertical conveyance section [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
When installing the vertical conveyance section, be sure to fasten it with screws with the
vertical conveyance door closed.
[3]
[2]
1-73
8050ma3173
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
8.2
Replacing the intermediate

conveyance clutch /1

Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13):
Every 2,000,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the vertical conveyance section.
2. Remove a connector [1].
[4]
3. Remove an E-ring [2] and then remove the

spacer [3] and the gear [4].
MC13 [6].
[3]
[7]
steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
When reinstalling the clutch, be sure to check
[1]
that the stopper [7] of the MC13 is in the specified position.
[6]
1-74
[5]
8050ma3174
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9. FIXING
Caution:
The fixing unit is very hot immediately after
turning off the main switch (SW2). In order to
avoid getting burnt, be sure to start operation
after the temperature goes down sufficiently.
9.1
Screws that must not be

removed
2 double nuts [1] are not allowed to be removed. Be

careful not to remove them.
[1]
8050ma3153
1-75
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
9.2

the fixing unit
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the ADU.
3. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing
knob [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the fixing
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
cover /F [4].
8050ma3098
5. Open the reverse section [1] and remove a

screw [1] and 3 connectors [3]. And then remove
[1]
[5]
[5]
[4]
the fixing unit [4].

Note:
When removing or reinstalling the fixing unit,
slide it toward front and raise it while holding
both ends [5] at front and rear.
steps in reverse.
[2]
[3]
8050ma3099
1-76
Replacing the fixing upper

heater lamps /1 and /2
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.3
FIXING

Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2): Every 2,500,000 copies
Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3): Every 2,500,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
cover /R [2].
[2]
Note:
Be careful not to touch the glass section of
the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This
may shorten the effective life of the heater
lamp.
Be careful not to damage the surface of the
fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing
[1]
or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to

contact and damage the inner surface of the
fixing roller.
When the installation is completed, check to
8050ma3100
see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to

the fixing plate and the faston terminal is
properly installed.
3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web
[3]
motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at

the 3 places.
[2]
[1]
1-77
8050ma3154
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper

unit [2].
Note:
The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When
attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder section securely into the screw hole.
[2]
[1]
[1]
8050ma3101
5. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] at the front, and a

clamp fixing screw [2], 2 faston terminals [3] and
a screw [4] at the rear. And then remove the fixing plate [5] and pull out gently the fixing heater
lamps /1 and /2 [6] from the fixing roller /U [7] for
[1]
removal.
Note:
When removing the faston terminal, be sure to
[2]
hold it at the connector.

steps in reverse.
[7]
[3]
[6]
Note:
Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so
that the maker mark indication comes to the
rear.
When reinstalling the fixing heater lamps,
please note that the lamp fitting holes on the
fixing plate are different.
1-78
[5]
[4]
8050ma3102
Replacing the fixing lower

heater lamp
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.4
FIXING

Fixing lower lamp (L4): Every 2,500,000 copies
B. Procedure
cover /R [2].
[2]
Note:
Be careful not to touch the glass section of
the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This
may shorten the effective life of the heater
lamp.
[1]
fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing

or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to
contact and damage the inner surface of the
fixing roller.
When the installation is completed, check to
8050ma3103
see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to

the fixing plate and the faston terminal is
properly installed.
[3]

the 3 places.
[2]
[1]
1-79
8050ma3155
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper

unit [2].
Note:
The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When
attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder section securely into the screw hole.
[2]
[1]
[1]
8050ma3104
5. Remove the clamp fixing screw [1] and the con-
[1]
nector [2] at the front.
[2]
1-80
8050ma3105
FIXING
a screw [3] at the rear to remove the fixing plate
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]. And then pull out gently the fixing heater

lamp [5] from the fixing roller /L [6] for removal.
steps in reverse.
Note:
Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so
[3]
[2]
that the maker mark indication comes to the

rear.
[4]
8050ma3106
1-81
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6. Remove a clamp screw [1], a connector [2] and
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
9.5
Replacing the fixing roller /U,

ball bearing /U and the heat
insulating sleeve /U

Fixing roller /U: Every 100,000 copies
Heat insulating sleeve /U: Every 600,000 copies
Ball bearing /U: Every 600,000 copies
[1]
B. Procedure
[2]

2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the fixing unit
upper cover.
Note:
When removing the fixing unit upper cover,
raise it up without tilting it to avoid damage to
the fixing roller /U.
3. Remove the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2.
8050ma3177
1-82
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Remove the fixing upper lamps /1 and /2.

5. Remove the rear side O-ring [3].
Remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the
ball bearing [5] at the rear side, from the fixing
roller /U [6].
Note:
fixing roller.
6. Remove the fixing roller /U [6].
7. Remove the O-ring [1] and then remove the fixing gear [2].
[3] [4] [5] [6]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
8. After removing the O-ring [3] of front side,

remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the
ball bearings /U [5] from the fixing roller /U [6].
steps in reverse.
Note:
After replacing the fixing roller, check whether
the fixing temperature sensor /3 is contacting
with the roller.
When fixing temperature sensor /3 is soiled
with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

[5]
cleaner and cleaning pad.

When having replaced the fixing roller /U, be
[4]
sure to make adjustments by referring to the

36 mode "Adjustment item list." Otherwise,
[3]
poor images may result.

Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripheries of the heat insulating sleeve with Maltemp
FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it.
When reinstalling them, be sure to take note
of the directions of the ball bearing and the
flange of the heat insulating sleeve. Reinstall
them so that their upper surface turns to the
inside as seen in the picture in which they are
arranged after disassembly.
1-83
8050ma3108
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
9.6
Replacing the fixing roller /L,

ball bearing /L and the heat
insulating sleeve /L

Fixing roller /L: Every 100,000 copies
Heat insulating sleeve /L: Every 600,000 copies
Ball bearing /L: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove the fixing cover /R.
3. Open the fixing upper unit.
[2]
(See 9.4 Replacing the fixing lower heater

lamp.
4. Remove the fixing lower heater lamp.
entrance plate /L [2].
Note:
Be careful not to damage the paper passage
[1]
section of the entrance plate /L.
8050ma3109

fixing rollers /U and /L with the entrance plate
/L.
[3]
[2]
6. After loosening the stopper screw [1] once, open

the fixing paper exit guide [2] up to the turnout
position and retighten it temporarily and then
remove the fixing roller /L [3].
Note:
fixing roller.
[1]
[1]
8050ma3110
1-84
FIXING
7. Remove the ball bearings /L [1], 1 each at both
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]
sides, and the heat insulating sleeves /L [2], 1

each at both sides, from the fixing roller /L.
steps in reverse.
Note:
Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripheries of the heat insulating sleeve with Multemp
FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it.
When reinstalling them, be sure to take note
of the directions of the ball bearing and the
flange of the heat insulating sleeve.
After replacing the fixing roller/r, check
[2]
whether the fixing temperature sensor /4 is in

touch with the roller.
When fixing temperature sensor /4 is soiled
[1]
with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum

cleaner and cleaning pad.
8050ma3111
1-85
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
9.7
Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /3, and removing and reinstalling the fixing
temperature sensor /1 and
the thermostat /1
Caution:
After installing the fixing temperature sensor
/3, be sure to check that the sensor section is
in touch with the fixing roller. If not, the temperature control may go abnormal or the fixing temperature sensor /3 may detect the low
fixing temperature abnormality.
Be sure to check that the wiring harness is
not in touch with the fixing roller.
Caution:
The thermostat /1 is an essential safety part.
Be sure to follow the cautions and steps
given below when removing and reinstalling.
Caution:
After completion of the installation of the
thermostat /1, be sure to check that the wiring
harness is not in touch with the fixing upper
roller.
Be sure to fasten the thermostat /1 after positioning it properly with a positioning jig
(4969-1885-01). Be sure to apply screws with
screw lock paint. Also be sure to conduct this
adjustment under the pressure-released condition and the temperature low condition of
the fixing roller /U.

Fixing temperature sensor /3: Every 2,500,000
copies
1-86
FIXING
ture sensor /3)

upper cover [2].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3112
3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1] and the connector
[1]
[2].
[2]
8050ma3113
[2]
temperature sensor /3 [2].
[1]
Note:
When reinstalling it, check that the sensor
section of the fixing temperature sensor is in
touch with the fixing roller.
steps in reverse.
8050ma3114
1-87
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing tempera-
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling the

fixing temperature sensor /1)
1. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the
[2]
mounting board [2] of the fixing temperature

sensor /1.
[1]
8050ma3115
[1]
[2]
Note:
Be careful not to change the position of the
set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /1.
Be careful not to damage the internal surface
of the sensor.
A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling
it.
steps in reverse.
8050ma3139
D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /1)

1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2]
of the thermostat /1 and then remove the ther-
[1]
[2]
mostat section.
[1]
8050ma3116
1-88
FIXING
[1]
mostat /1 [3] from the thermostat mounting
[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the therboard [2].
[3]
8050ma3117
E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat)

1. Fasten the thermostat /1 [2] with 2 screws [1].
[2]
[1]
8050ma3118
2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board [2] with 2

screws [1].
3. Connect 2 faston terminals [3] to the thermostat
/1.
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050ma3119
1-89
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. With a thermostat positioning jig (4969-1885-01)

set between the thermostat /1 [1] and the fixing
upper roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting

board with 2 screws so that the mounting board
becomes the same thickness as the positioning
[1]
jig.
Specification: a = 3.1 0.2mm
[2]
8050ma3120
5. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with

screw lock paint.
[1]
1-90
8050ma3121
9.8
FIXING
Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /4, and removing and reinstalling the fixing
temperature sensor /2 and
the thermostat /L
Caution:
After reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /4, be sure to check that the sensor section is in touch with the fixing roller. If not, the
temperature control may go abnormal or the
fixing temperature sensor /4 may detect the
low fixing temperature abnormality.
Be sure to check that the wiring harness is
not in touch with the fixing roller.
Caution:
The thermostat /L is an essential safety part.
Be sure to follow the cautions and steps
given below when removing and reinstalling.
Caution:
After completion of the installation of the
thermostat /L, be sure to check that the wiring harness is not in touch with the fixing
lower roller.
Be sure to fasten the thermostat /L after positioning it properly with a positioning jig
(4969-1886-01). Be sure to apply screws with
screw lock paint. And also be sure to conduct
this adjustment under the pressure-released
condition and the temperature low condition
of the fixing roller /L.

Fixing temperature sensor /4: Every 2,500,000
copies
1-91
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing temperature sensor /4)

entrance plate /L [2].
Note:
[2]
Be careful not to damage the paper passage

section of the fixing admission plate /L [2].
[1]
3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1], connector [2] and a
screw [3], and then remove the fixing tempera-
8050ma3122
[1]
ture sensor /4 [4].

Note:
When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the
[3]
sensor section of the fixing temperature sensor /4 is in touch with the fixing roller.
steps in reverse.
[4]
[2]
8050ma3123
C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling the

fixing temperature sensor /2)
[1]
1. Remove a clamp screw [1], connector [2] and 2

screws [3], and then remove the mounting board
[4] of the fixing temperature sensor /2.
[3]
1-92
[2]
8050ma3124
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY

Note:
Be careful not to change the position of the
set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /2.
Be careful not to damage the internal surface
of the sensor.
A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling
it.
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3125
D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /L)

1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2]
of the thermostat /L and then remove the thermostat section.
[1]
[2]
1-93
8050ma3126
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ther-
[1]
mostat /L [3] from the thermostat mounting

board /L [2].
[3]
[2]
8050ma3127
E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat /

L)
1. Fasten the thermostat /L [2] with 2 screws [1].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3128
2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board /L [2]
[3]
with 2 screws [1].

3. Connect 2 faston terminals [4] to the thermostat
[4]
/L [3].
[2]
1-94
[1]
8050ma3129
FIXING
set between the thermostat /L [1] and the fixing

lower roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting
board /L with 2 screws so that the mounting
board becomes the same thickness as the posi-
tioning jig.
Specification: a = 2.7 0.2mm
[1]
[2]
8050ma3130
5. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with

screw lock paint.
[1]
1-95
8050ma3131
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. With a thermostat positioning jig (4969-1886-01)
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
9.9
Replacing the fixing drive

gear

Fixing drive gear: Every 1,000,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove the connector [1] and a screw [2], and
[2]
[5]
[4]
then remove the PS16 (fixing pressure release

sensor) [3].
Note:
Be careful not to damage the PS16 [3].
3. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the
actuator [5].
Note:
Be sure to take note of the direction of the
actuator when reinstalling it.
[3]
[1]
8050ma3132
[3]

the 3 places.
[2]
[1]
1-96
8050ma3155
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. Remove 3 screws [1] and the connector [2], and

then remove the fixing drive panel assembly [3].
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3133
[2]
drive gear [2].

steps in reverse.
Note:
When installing the fixing drive gear, apply
Multemp FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) on it.
[1]
8050ma3134
1-97
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
9.10 Replacing the fixing cleaning

unit
Fixing cleaning unit: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then the remove the
[1]
fixing upper cover [2].
[2]
Note:
When removing the fixing upper cover, raise it
up without tilting it to avoid damage to the fixing roller /U.
8050ma3156

cleaning unit [2].
[2]
Note:
Be sure to turn the web drive gear [3] to take
up the slack of the cleaning web before reinstalling it to the fixing unit.
[1]
1-98
[3]
8050ma3157
FIXING
to press it against the paper exit side [2] hori-
[2]
[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
When reinstalling it to the fixing unit, be sure

zontally while being careful that the paper
entrance prevention plate [1] does not get in
touch with the roller. This is because the
paper entrance prevention plate may cause
damage to the roller.
steps in reverse.
Note:
After replacing the fixing cleaning unit, be
sure to reset the count of the fixing cleaning
unit in accordance with the 25 mode "Parts
counter - Count of special parts."
If not, a problem such as image smudge may
arise because the web feed amount becomes
less than the set value or the machine displays the message "The fixing cleaning unit is
require to be replaced. Contact the service
manager or the authorized distributor and is
disabled to copy or print.
1-99
8050ma3158
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
9.11 Replacing the fixing torque

limiter
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
Fixing torque limiter: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Place it gently on an even table with its paper
feed side down.
3. Remove the E-ring [1].
[1]
4. Slide the shaft [1] to the rear side, and pull it out
with the notch [2] of the shaft aligned with the
[2]
8050ma3144
[1]
panel.
8050ma3145
1-100
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. Remove the E-ring [1].
[1]
8050ma3146
[1]
8050ma3147
6. Remove the gear [1] and the fixing torque limiter

[2] and replace the fixing torque limiter with a
new one.
Note:
The shaft [3] contains a pin [4]. Be careful that
the pin does not get lost.
steps in reverse.
[4]
1-101
[3]
[2]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
10. REGISTRATION/ADU/
REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
the ADU
Note:
In order to prevent the main body from falling
down, the process unit and the ADU are provided with a safety mechanism so that they
cannot be pulled out at the same time.
If the process unit has been pulled out when
pulling out the ADU, be sure to put the process unit back into the main body.
A. Procedure
2. Release the lock and pull down the ADU release
lever [1] counterclockwise and pull out the ADU
[2].
4. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever
and the ADU cover /L. (See "7.3 Replacing the
paper feed clutch /BP").
5. Remove the paper feed solenoid cover. (See
"7.1 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed
roller.")
[1]
1-102
[2]
8050ma3084
[1]
7. Remove the screw [2] and then release the fixing of the ADU wiring harness assembly [3].
[2]
[3]
8050ma3085

9. Remove the screw [2].
10. Push back the ADU [6] so that each of the
screws [5] can be seen through the holes [4] in
the guide rail /L [3], and then remove the screws
[5] one at a time.
[1]
[9]
[7]
Note:
[10]
11. Pull out the ADU [6] once again and move the
guide pin [8] of the guide rail /R [7] into the turnout place of the oblong hole [9].
12. Remove the ADU [6] from the guide rails /L [3]
and /R [7].
[8]
Note:
When removing the ADU [6], please note that
this work requires two persons, with one person at the paper feed side and the other at the
paper exit side.
When removing the ADU [6], a person at the
paper feed side must hold the ADU handle /R
[10].
When removing the ADU [6], a person at the
paper exit side must hold the handle provided
at the center of the fixing positioning rail [11].
[6]

steps in reverse.
1-103
[11]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3086
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.2 Replacing the

cleaning sheet
registration

Registration cleaning sheet: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the regis-
[2]
tration cleaning sheet [2].

steps in reverse.
[1]
1-104
8050ma3087
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.3 Replacing the separation

discharging plate unit
Separation discharging plate unit: Every 100,000
copies
B. Procedure
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the transfer
[2]
release cover.
[1]
5. Remove 2 separation fitting screws [2].
6. Raise the separation discharging plate unit [2]
8050ma3176
[2]
[3]
once, remove a faston [3] and then remove the

separation discharging plate unit [2].
Note:
When removing the faston from the separation discharging plate unit, be sure to pull out
straight the faston cover section.
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
When reinstalling the separation discharging
plate unit, be sure to fasten in advance the
separation fitting screw on the front side for
positioning.
1-105
8050ma3088
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.4 Replacing
the
transfer
ground plate unit and the
2nd transfer roller /L
Transfer ground plate unit: Every 1,000,000 copies
2nd transfer roller /L: Every 200,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the separation discharging plate unit
[1]. (See "10.3 Replacing the separation discharging plate unit.")
[4]
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the

transfer ground plate unit [3].
3. Remove 2 stop rings [5].
4. Slide each of 2 bearings [6] to the outside and
remove the 2nd transfer roller /L [4].
5. Remove 2 bearings [6] from the 2nd transfer
roller /L [4].
[1] [6]
steps in reverse.
Note:
Be careful not to touch with bare hands the
2nd transfer roller /L [4] on any sections other
than the shaft section.
When installing the 2nd transfer roller /L,
install it with the dent on the roller shaft
comes to the rear of the machine (instead of
coming to the side contacting with the transfer earth plate).
1-106
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[5]
8050ma3089
the
registration
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.5 Replacing
roller

Registration roller: Every 1,500,000 copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the registration cleaning sheet. (See
"10.2 Replacing the registration cleaning
sheet.")
paper feed clutch /BP.")
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the gear
cover [2].
5. Remove the stop rings [4], 1 each, and then
[6]
[7]
remove the bearings [5], 1 each at front and

rear.
6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the registration unit [7].
Note:
[3] [6]
When removing the registration unit [7], open

the conveyance guide plate /U [8] and slide
[1]
[2]
[8]
the registration unit toward the rear of the

ADU to pull out the shaft of the front side from
the ADU panel, and then remove the registration unit.
[5]
[5]
1-107
[4]
[4]
8050ma3090
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the registration gear [2] and the pin [3].
[5]
[6]
Note:
When reinstalling the registration gear [2], be
sure to attach the pin [3] without fail.
[7]
8. Remove 2 registration pressure springs [4].

9. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and 2 bearings [6] and
[4]
then remove the registration roller [7].

steps in reverse.
Note:
When reinstalling the registration unit, be
[3]
careful not to damage the paper passage of

the guide plate.
Make sure to replace the registration pressure
springs to the original position.
[6]
[1]
1-108
[2]
[5]
[4]
8050ma3091
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.6 Replacing the intermediate

conveyance clutches /2 and /3
B. Procedure
1. Remove the ADU cover /R. (See "7.3 Replacing
the paper feed clutch /BP.")
[5]
[6]
intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) [3].

intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) [6].
steps in reverse.
Note:
When reinstalling the MC4 and MC5, be sure
to take note of the position of the stopper.
[2]
[4]
1-109
[1]
[3]
8050ma3092
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 and /2

ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1):
ADU pre-registration clutch (MC2):
B. Procedure
1. Remove the ADU release lever and the ADU
cover /L (See "7.3 Replacing the paper feed
clutch /BP").
[5]
[6]
[1]
ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) [3].

ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) [6].
steps in reverse.
Note:
When reinstalling the MC1 and MC2, be sure
to take note of the position of the stopper.
[3]
[4]
1-110
[2]
8050ma3093
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.8 Replacing the ADU pre-registration clutch

ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3):
B. Procedure
paper feed clutch /BP.")
2. Remove two relay connectors [1].
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the ADU
[3]
[1]
lock section [3].
[2]
8050ma3094
[1]
ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) [2].

steps in reverse.
Note:
When reinstalling the ADU lock section, be
sure to take note of the stopper position of the
the MC3.
[2]
1-111
8050ma3095
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.9 Replacing the decurler roller

Decurler roller: Every 100,000 copies
B. Procedure
3. Remove the paper exit drive belt /1 [1].
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and the screw [3], and the
remove the paper exit guide plate /4 assembly
[4].
Note:
The screw [2] and the screw [3] are different in
length. Be sure to take note of the position of
the screw [3] when reintalling the assembly.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
1-112
8050ma3096
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the knob

[2].
[16] [13] [12]
[9]
[17]
6. Remove the paper exit mounting plate /F [3] and

the paper exit open/close spring /F [4].
7. Remove two screw [5] and then remove the
bearing [6].
paper exit drive pulley /1 [8] and the pin [9].
[15] [14] [11] [10] [8] [7]
paper exit drive gear /4 [11] and the pin [12].

10. Remove the bearing [13], paper exit mounting
plate /R [14], curler /1 [15] and the paper exit
open/close spring /R [16].
11. Slide the bearing [17] to the inside and remove
the decurler [18].
steps in reverse.
[5] [6] [5]
Note:
[18]
When reinstalling the paper exit drive pulley /1

[8], be sure to take note of the direction of the
belt guide.
When the decurler roller is replaced, reset "5.
[4]
Parts counter" and "1. Count of special

parts." If not, the fixing jam may occur.
[2]
1-113
[1]
[3]
8050ma3097
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
OTHER
11. OTHER
6. Remove dummy connector.

Connect the Key Counter Socket connector.
11.1 Installation of the Key

Counter Socket (OPTION)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the Filter Cover.
See 1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2.
2. Remove the Hinge cover and Scanner cover /R.
See 1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main
board unit.
3. Remove the Key Counter Cover from the Scanner cover /R.
.
4969D513aa
Note:
Scanner cover /R.
When the Key Counter Socket is mounted, Set

to the Software DIP Switches.
*25mode: DipSW No.4 Bit.4
Key Counter Cover
Key counter removal recovery.

*25mode: DipSW No.9 Bit.3 - 0
Operation at the counter removal.
4969D510aa
4. Remove two screws and the Cover.
4969D511aa
5. Use two screws, secure the Key Counter

Socket.
4969D512aa
1-114
OTHER
5. To mount the memory unit successfully.
a
Insert the memory unit into the memory slot

while being careful to ensure the direction is as
Note: Handling
Precautions against static electricity.
Keep the memory unit in an antistatic bag
shown in the picture.

Fit the slot pins into the holes at both ends of
the memory unit, and then push it down so that
while transporting or storing.
the claws at both ends of the slot secure the
Discharge electricity from your body by
memory unit.
touching somewhere metallic portion before

handling, when working on the place where
static electricity tend to generate such as on a

carpet.
Do not touch the gilded pins of memory unit
directly with hands. Direct touch may cause
malcontinuity.
Do not give the mechanical shock to the memory unit by dropping or bending and so on.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the Platen cover to Main Board unit.
See 1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main
board unit.
2. Pull it out toward you to remove it from the main
body.
Note:
When pulling out the main board assembly, be
careful that the memory board doesnt touch
the stay.
4969D515aa
6. When demounting the memory unit.

a
Release the claws at both ends of the slot.
Raise the memory unit gently to remove it.
3. If the HDD-7 is installed, remove it.
4. Memory unit into the memory slots (4 places) of

a
the Image processing board.
4 places
4969D516aa

steps in reverse.
Image processing board (IPB)
4969D514aa
1-115
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
11.2 Installation / Remove of the

Memory Unit (OPTION)
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
OTHER
Blank page
1-116
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
EXTERIOR
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
AFR-20 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR
1.1
RADF hinge opening/closing angle adjustment
A. Replacing 70-degree and 40-degree fixtures

1. Untighten 4 screws [1] and remove 2 hinge
opening/closing angle adjusting fixtures [2].
[1]
Fixtures are for 70 or 40-degree use and can be

distinguished by the stamp on them.
2. Install 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting
fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [2] positively.
[2]
1-117
df3193001
EXTERIOR
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
B. Fixing the fixture at 90 degrees

Note:
When removing RADF or when opening RADF
to remove the scanner components, the fixture should be fixed at an degree of 90. If not,
the RADF installing metal plate may be
deformed.
1. Fix the hinge opening/closing angle adjusting
fixture at an angle of 90 by either one of the following methods. Two types of fixtures, 70 and
40-degree use, are installed. They can be distinguished by the mark on them.
70-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixture: As shown in the drawing right,
untighten 4 screws [1], slide down 2 adjusting
fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [2] positively.
40-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixture: Untighten 4 screws [1], install 2
adjusting fixtures [2] changing their upper and
lower positions and retighten 4 screws [2] posi-
[2]
[1]
[1]
tively.
2. After completion of required process, return
them to the original positions.
[2]
1-118
df3193002
1.2
EXTERIOR

the front cover
1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and paper exit

cover [2].
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
2. Untighten 2 screws [3] and remove the front

cover [4].
3. Install the removed components in the steps
reverse to removal.
df3193003
1-119
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
EXTERIOR
1.3
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

the rear cover
1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and paper exit

cover [2].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[3]
2. Untighten 2 screws [3] and remove the rear

cover [4].
3. Install the removed components in the steps
reverse to removal.
[2]
1-120
df3193004
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

the registration roller cover
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.4
EXTERIOR
1. Open the paper feed cover [1].

2. Pull up the paper feed tray [2].
3. Unscrew 4 screws [3] and remove the registra-
[3]
tion roller cover [4].

steps in reverse.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
df3193005
1-121
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PAPER FEED
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
2. PAPER FEED
2.1
Cleaning the no paper sensor
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (See "1.4

Removing and reinstalling the registration roller
cover.")
2. Clean the no paper sensor (PS304) [1] with a
brush, etc.
[1]
df3193006
1-122
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

the paper feed unit
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.2
PAPER FEED

2. Push 2 claw locks [2] at both ends of the paper
[2]
feed cover [1] to release and remove the paper

feed guide [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
df3193007
1-123
PAPER FEED
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Untighten 1 screw [1] and remove the shaft fixing plate [2].
[1]
4. Remove 2 snap rings [3].

5. Pushing 2 bearings [4] inward, remove the
paper feed unit [5].
[2]
[5]

steps in reverse.
[4]
1-124
[3]
[3]
[4]
df3193008
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.3
PAPER FEED

Feed roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every
625,000 copies for actual durable count)
Paper feed roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every
B. Procedure
1. Remove the paper feed unit. (See "1.4 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit.")
df3193009
2. Remove 1 bearing [1].

3. Remove 1 snap ring [2] and remove 1 pin [3].
[1] [6]
[8]
[7]
[10]
[12] [11]
4. Remove the gear [4] and remove the belt [5].

5. Remove the black snap ring [6] and remove 1
pin [7] (long pin) and gear [8].
6. Remove the plastic arm [9] and remove 1 pin
[10].
7. Remove 1 snap ring [11] and remove the paper
feed roller assembly [13] from the arm [12].
[5]
1-125
[3]
[4] [2] [9]
[13]
df3193010
PAPER FEED
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
8. Remove 1 snap ring [1].
[2]
9. Remove 1 feed roller [2] and replace with new
[3]
one.
10. Remove 1 snap ring [3] and remove 1 pin [4].
11. Remove 2 paper feed rollers [5] and replace
with new ones.
steps in reverse.
Note:
Be careful not to lose the paper feed roller and
feed roller fixing pins.
[4]
[1]
1-126
[5]
df3193011
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

prevention roller
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.4
PAPER FEED

Double feed prevention roller: Every 1,800,000
copies (every 625,000 copies for actual durable
count)
B. Procedure
2. Release the claw lock of the double feed prevention unit cover [2] and remove the cover.
[2]
[1]
[2]
df3193012
1-127
PAPER FEED
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Holding both edges of the roller shaft, stand the

double feed prevention roller [1].
[1]
df3193013
4. Remove the double feed prevention unit [1] and

replace with new one.
[1]

steps in reverse.
df3193014
1-128
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
PAPER FEED
3.1
Cleaning
roller
the
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. PAPER FEED
registration

cover.")
2. Moisten cloth with alcohol and wipe 3 registration rollers [1] with the cloth.
[1]
df3193015
1-129
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PAPER FEED
3.2
Cleaning
sensor
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
the
registration

cover.")
2. Clean PS301 (registration sensor) [1] with a
blower brush, etc.
[1]
df3193016
1-130
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

the conveyance belt
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.3
PAPER FEED
Note:
Be careful not to touch the belt roller or avoid
damage or crease on it. If touching it by hand,
hold at the area of 20mm from the edges in
the width direction.
1. Fix the hinge opening/closing angle adjusting
fixture at an angle of 90 degrees.
2. Open RADF [1] vertically.
3. Slide 2 stoppers [3] in the upper part of the conveyance belt [2] rightward and loosen.
4. Remove the drive interlocking belt [4] on the left
lower inside of the conveyance belt [2].
5. Remove the conveyance belt unit.
[3]
Note:
[1]
[2]
[3]
When reinstalling, fit the drive interlocking

belt to the conveyance belt unit securely.
[4]
1-131
df3193017
PAPER FEED
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and stand the roller.
[1]
7. Remove the conveyance belt.

steps in reverse.
[1]
1-132
df3193018
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
4.1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
Cleaning the paper exit
roller/the paper exit sensor
1. Open the paper exit cover [1].
[2]
2. Moisten the cloth with alcohol and wipe 4 paper
[1]
exit rollers [2] with the cloth.

3. Clean the paper exit sensor (PS306) [3] with a
brush, etc.
[3]
4.2
df3193019
Cleaning the reverse roller
1. Open the paper exit cover [1].
[2]
2. Open the reverse guide [2].
[1]
df3193020
3. Moisten the cloth with alcohol and wipe 5

reverse rollers [1] with the cloth.
[1]
df3193021
1-133
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
5. REMOVING AND
REINSTALLING RADF
Note:
Before removing RADF, fix the RADF hinge
opening/closing angle at 90 degrees. Fix the
fixture also at 90 degrees when opening RADF
and removing parts of the scanner section. If
not, RADF installing metal plate may be
deformed.
[2]
2. Fix 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixtures [2] at an angle of 90 degrees.

Two types of fixtures, 70 and 40-degree use, are
installed. They can be distinguished by the
mark on them.
70-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixture: Untighten 4 screws [3], slide down 2
adjusting fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [3]
positively.
40-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixture: Untighten 4 screws [3], install 2
adjusting fixtures [2] changing their upper and
[3]
[1]
[3]
lower positions and retighten 4 screws [3] positively.
df3193023
3. Open RADF [1] vertically.

4. Remove 3 screws [2] and 2 fixtures [3].
5. Raise and remove RADF [1].
steps in reverse.
Note:
[3]
[1]
[3]
After installing RADF, perform the 36-mode

"RADF installing position adjustment".
[2]
1-134
[2]
df3193024
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
EXTERIOR
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
C-208 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
1. EXTERIOR
1.1

the front cover
1. Remove the LCT from the main body.

2. Open the top cover [1], remove 4 screws [2] and
then remove the right side cover [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
1-135
lt2113004
EXTERIOR
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Open the front door [1] and remove 3 screws [2]

provided on the side inside the door.
4. Remove a screw [3] on the upper face.
5. Remove 2 screws [4] on the right side and then
remove the front cover [5].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[4]
1-136
lt2113005
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

the clutch replacement cover
and the rear cover
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.2
EXTERIOR
1. Remove the right side cover.

[1]
clutch replacement cover [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Remove 12 screws [1] and then remove the rear
cover [2].
[2]
lt2113007
[1]

steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
[1]
lt2113008
1-137
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
EXTERIOR
1.3
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

the paper feed pick-up cover

2. Open the top cover [1].
3. Remove the spring [3] from the paper feed unit
[2].
5. Pull out the paper feed pick-up cover /B [5] to
[4]
the right side and remove it.

steps in reverse.
[5]
Note:
Be sure to fit the spring that connects the top
cover to the paper supply unit without fail.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
1-138
lt2113009
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
PAPER FEED
2.1
Cleaning the paper

removing brush
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. PAPER FEED
dust

2. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B.
3. Close the top cover [1].
4. Clean the paper dust removing brush [2] with
[1]
the blower brush.

steps in reverse.
Note:
[2]
1-139
lt2113010
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PAPER FEED
2.2
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

the paper feed unit

4. Slide 2 bearings [2] to the outside and remove
[2]
[3]
[2] [1]
the paper feed unit [3].

steps in reverse.
Note:
[1]
1-140
lt2113011
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.3
PAPER FEED

Paper feed roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every
Feed roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every
B. Procedure
3. Remove the paper feed unit [1].
[1]
lt2113012
4. Remove the bearing [1].

5. Remove 2 stop rings [2] and then remove the
arm [3].
6. Remove the holder plate [4].
7. Remove a stop ring [5].
8. Remove the feed roller [6] and replace it with a
new one.
9. Remove the paper feed roller [7] and replace it
with a new one.
[1] [2] [3] [5]
[7]
[4]

steps in reverse.
[6]
1-141
lt2113013
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PAPER FEED
2.4
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

prevention roller

Double feed prevention roller: Every 600,000
copies (Every 500,000 copies in actual replacement count)
B. Procedure
Note:
Be sure to lower the up/down plate to its lower
most position in advance by pressing the tray
down switch (SW100) with electricity supplied.
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the pro-
[1]
tective cover [3].
[3]
[2]
lt2113014
[1]
lt2113015
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the double feed prevention unit [2].
[2]
1-142
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
PAPER FEED
6. With the "D" cuts [2] of the shaft and the fixture
attached together, remove the double feed prevention roller [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
7. Remove the double feed prevention roller rubber
lt2113016
[3]
[2] from the shaft [1] and replace it with a new

one.
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
roller rubber [2] so that the paint mark [3]
turns in the arrow-marked direction.
Be sure to check to see if the PET sheet for
the drive gear cover is not damaged.
Be sure to check that the double feed prevention roller is not smeared with grease.
[2]
1-143
lt2113017
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PAPER FEED
2.5
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

clutch and the pre-registration clutch

Paper feed clutch (MC101): Every 2,500,000
copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in actural
replacement count)
Pre-registration
clutch
(MC102):
Every
2,500,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in

actural replacement count)
B. Procedure
[2]
[1]

clutch replacement cover [3].
[3]
[2]
lt2113018

6. Remove 2 clutches [3] and replace them with
new ones.
steps in reverse.
Note:
When reinstalling them, be sure to check that
a stopper for each clutch is in its specified
position.
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
lt2113019
1-144
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
TRAY UP/DOWN
3.1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. TRAY UP/DOWN
the rear drive
A. Removing the cover

Note:
2. Remove the right side cover and the front cover.
3. Remove the clutch replacement cover and the
rear cover.
B. Removing the paper feed drive
1. Remove 9 connectors [1] provided on the rear
left side.
[1]
[1]
[1]
2. Remove the paper feed clutch (MC101) and the
pre-registration clutch (MC102) [1]. See ("2.5
Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-
[2]
lt2113020
[1]
registration clutch").
lt2113021
1-145
TRAY UP/DOWN
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Remove 6 screws [1], remove then a bearing [2]
[3]
and the LCT drive unit [3].
[2]
[1]
5. Remove 2 connectors [4] provided on the back

of the LCT drive unit [3] and then remove the
LCT drive unit [3].
[1]
[4]
lt2113022
C. Removing the up/down drive

1. Remove 6 connectors [1] provided on the lower
back side.
[1]
[1]
1-146
lt2113023
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
TRAY UP/DOWN
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]

4. Remove 2 bearing [3] and then remove the
guide plate [4].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
lt2113024
5. Remove the gear [1].

Note:
When reinstalling this gear, be sure to make
the positioning adjustments of the remaining
paper detection gear at this step. For positioning adjustments, see "D. Reinstalling the
rear drive."
6. Remove an E-ring [2] and a pin [3] and then
remove the gear [4].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
lt2113025
7. Remove an E-ring [1], and then remove a bear-
[3]
ing [2], the gear [3] and a bearing [4].

8. Remove an E-ring [5] and then remove the gear
[4]
[6] and a pin [7].
[1]
[7] [5]
1-147
[6]
[2]
lt2113026
TRAY UP/DOWN
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9. Remove an E-ring [1] and then remove a bearing [2].
[2]
10. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the up/
lt2113027
[1]
down motor unit [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
1-148
[1]
lt2113028
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
TRAY UP/DOWN
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
D. Reinstalling the rear drive

Note:
Reinstall the rear drive following the removal
steps in reverse, but be sure to make positioning adjustments of the remaining paper detection gear at "C. Removing the up/down drive."
1. Conduct in reverse the steps 10 to 6 of "C.
Removing the up/down drive."
2. With the up/down plate at its lower most position, stop the actuator of the remaining paper
detection gear [1] at the position where it
[2]
detects the remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105)

[2] and install the gear [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
lt2113030
3. Conduct in reverse the steps 1 of "C. Removing

the up/down drive."
lt2113031
1-149
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TRAY UP/DOWN
3.2
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

the up/down wire
A. Wire length:
Up/down wire /A: 1450mm (4 wires)
Assist wire /C: 1240mm
Assist wire /D: 820mm
B. Removing the wire
Note:
2. Remove the right side cover, front cover, clutch
replacement cover, and the rear cover.
3. Remove the rear drive.
4. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [1] clockwise as
[2]
seen from the rear side to lift the up/down plate
[11]
[4]
[2] up to its upper most position.
[10]
Note:
When the springs [3] and [4] are removed in
[13]
the succeeding steps, the up/down plate [2]

comes down. For this reason, be sure to support the up/down plate [2] by hands. (This
work requires two persons.)
[5]
[12]
[6]
5. Remove the spring [3] and then remove the
[7]
[7].
6. After releasing the winding of the assist wire /C
[5]
[5] around the drive pulley [8], remove the E-ring
8. Remove the spring [4] and then remove the

assist wire /D [10] from the guide pulleys [11],
[12] and [13].
9. After releasing the winding of the assist wire /D
[10] around the drive pulley [14], remove the Ering [15] and then remove the drive pulley [14].
10. Remove the assist wire /D [10] from the up/
down drive shaft [1].
11. Bring down the up/drive plate [2].
1-150
[10]
[1]
[9] and then remove the drive pulley [8].

7. Remove the assist wire /C [5] from the up/down
drive shaft [1].
[1]
[3]
assist wire /C [5] from the guide pulleys [6] and
[15]
[14]
[9]
[8]
[1]
lt2113032
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
TRAY UP/DOWN
drive pulley [3] while releasing the winding of the

up/down wire /A [2].
13. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the up/
[11]
[10]
[12]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[2]
14. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the guide

pulleys [5], [6] and [7].
[6]
Note:
When removing the up/down wire /A [2]
[7]
installed onto the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7],

be sure to pull out the wire from a notch [8]
provided on the side of each pulley to move
the wire cover [9] of each pulley to the location where the notch [8] can be avoided.
15. Remove a screw [10] and then remove the up/
[5]
down wire protective cover [11].

16. Pull out the up/down wire /A [2] from the upper
surface [12] of the LCT main body to remove it.
[2]
[8]
[4]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
lt2113034
1-151
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TRAY UP/DOWN
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY

drive pulley [3] while releasing the winding of the
up/down wire /A [2].
18. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the up/
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[12]
[2]
[2]
[6]
19. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the guide

pulleys [5], [6] and [7].
Note:
When removing the up/down wire /A [2]
[2]
[5]
installed onto the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7],

be sure to pull out the wire from a notch [8]
provided on the side of each pulley to move
[7]
the wire cover [9] of each pulley to the location where the notch [8] can be avoided.
[4]
[3]
20. Remove a screw [10] and then remove the up/

down wire protective cover [11].
[3]
21. Pull out the up/down wire /A [2] from the upper
surface [12] of the LCT main body to remove it.
[2]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[4]
lt2113035
22. In the same manner as Steps 12 to 16, remove
[1]
the up/down wire /A [1] on the rear side.

23. In the same manner as Steps 17 to 21, remove
[2]
lt2113037
1-152
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
TRAY UP/DOWN
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
C. Reinstalling the wire

1. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the hole [1]
provided on the upper surface of the LCT main
[6]
body.
2. Reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide
[2]
[2]
[7]
[1]
pulleys [3], [4] and [5] in this order.
[4]
Note:
When reinstalling the up/down wire /A [2] onto
the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5], be sure to
insert the wire into the pulley through the
notch [6] provided on the side of each pulley
and then move the wire cover [7] of each pul-
[5]
[2]
ley to the wire that has been already inserted.
[3]
When moving the wire cover [7], move it first

to the position where the notch [6] can be
avoided and then move the wire in the notch
[8]
[10]
[6] into each pulley.

3. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the wire
installation hole [9] provided inside the up/down
drive shaft [8].
Note:
The up/down drive shaft [8] is provided with 3
wire installation holes each on the front side
and the rear side. In this step, the inner-most
wire installation hole is used.
4. Insert the drive pulley [10] into the up/down
drive shaft [8] so that the notch [11] of the drive
pulley [10] comes to the position in which the up/
down wire /A [2] is put.
5. Fit the E-ring [12] and fasten the drive pulley
[10].
1-153
[2]
[6]
[7]
[10]
[12]
[11]
[2]
[9]
[8]
lt2113039
TRAY UP/DOWN
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the hole [1]
[2]
provided on the upper surface of the LCT main

body.
7. Reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide
pulleys [3], [4] and [5] in this order.
[7]
[6]
[2]
[1]
[4]
Note:
When reinstalling the up/down wire /A [2] onto
the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5], be sure to
[3]
insert the wire into the pulley through the

notch [6] provided on the side of each pulley
and then move the wire cover [7] of each pulley to the wire that has been already inserted.
When moving the wire cover [7], move it first
to the position where the notch [6] can be
[5]
avoided and then move the wire in the notch

[6] into each pulley.
8. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the wire
installation hole [9] provided at the middle of the
up/down drive shaft [8].
[2]
[6]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[10]
[2]
[10] [11]
[12]
Note:
and the rear side. In this step, the wire installation hole at the middle is to be used. Since
the inner-most wire installation hole has been
already used, however, only two wire installation holes can be confirmed for this steps. As
a result, the one near to the drive pulley that
has been already installed is the wire installation hole [9] at the middle.
9. Insert the drive pulley [10] into the up/down pulley shaft [8] so that the notch [11] of the drive
pulley [10] comes to the position into which the
up/down wire /A [2] is put.
10. Fit the E-ring [12] to fasten the drive pulley [10].
1-154
[8]
[9]
lt2113040
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
TRAY UP/DOWN
up/down wire /A [1] on the rear side.
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
11. In the same manner as Steps 1 to 5, reinstall the
[2]
12. In the same manner as Steps 17 to 21, reinstall
[1]
lt2113041
13. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [1] clockwise as
[3] [4]
seen from the rear side to lift the up/down plate

[2] up to its upper most position.
[9] [17]
Note:
[16]
Be sure to wind up the up/down wire /A form
[17] [2]
inside to outside in each drive pulley.

The up/down plate [2] comes down by its own
[4]
weight if the installation of the assist wire /C

[3] and the assist wire /D [4] have not been
[14]
completed. For this reason, be sure to support the up/down plate [2] by hands until the
installation of Step 23 is completed. (This
[3]
[15]
work requires two persons.)
[8]
14. Insert the assist wire /C [3] into the wire installa-
[9]
tion hole [5] provided outside the up/down drive
[7]
shaft [1].
[7]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[13]
[1]
Note:
[5]

and the rear side. However, since the wire
installation holes on the inside and at the middle have been already used, only the wire
installation hole on the outside can be confirmed for this steps.
15. Insert the drive pulley [6] into the up/down drive
shaft [1] so that the notch [7] of the drive pulley
[6] comes to the position into which the assist
wire /C [3] is put.
1-155
[18]
[10]
[6]
[1]
[11]
[12]
lt2113043
TRAY UP/DOWN
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
16. Wind the assist wire /C [3] around the drive pul-
[3] [4]
ley [6] one turn counterclockwise as seen from

the front side.
Note:
[9] [17]
[16]
Be sure to wind the assist wire /C [3] from
[17] [2]
inside to outside in the drive pulley [6].
[4]
17. Reinstall the assist wire /C [3] onto the guide
pulleys [7] and [8] in this order and then fasten
[14]
them with the springs [9].

Note:
[3]
[15]
[8]
spring [9] when reinstalling it.
[1]
[9]
[7]
19. Insert the assist wire /D [4] into the wire installation hole [11] provided outside the up/down
[7]
[3]
ley [12] one turn clockwise as seen from the rear
[18]
[5]
drive pulley [1] so that the notch [13] of the drive

assist wire /D [4] is put.
21. Wind the assist wire /D [4] around the drive pul-
[13]
[1]
drive shaft [1].

20. Insert the drive pulley [12] into the up/down
pulley [12] comes to the position into which the
[4]
[10]
[6]
[1]
[11]
[12]
lt2113046
Note:
The up/down drive shaft [1] is provided
with 3 wire installation holes each on the
side.
front side and the rear side. However, since

the wire installation holes on the inside
Note:
Be sure to wind the assist wire /D [4] from
and at the middle have been already used,

only the wire installation hole on the out-
inside to outside in the drive pulley [12].
side can be confirmed for this steps.

22. Reinstall the assist wire /D [4] onto the guide
pulleys [14], [15] and [16] in this order and then
fasten them with the spring [17].
Note:
spring [17] when reinstalling it.
1-156
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
TRAY UP/DOWN
[2]
with a screw [1] for each.

25. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [3] counterclock-
[1]
[2]
[1]
wise as seen from the rear side to bring down

the up/down plate [4].
26. Reinstall the rear drive.
27. Reinstall the rear cover, clutch replacement
cover, front cover and the right side cover.
[4]
[3]
1-157
lt2113045
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
24. Reinstall 4 up/down wire protective covers [2]
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TRAY UP/DOWN
Blank page
1-158
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
1. EXTERIOR
1.1
Removing and reinstalling of

the booklet tray (FN-9 only)
A. Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the
booklet tray [2].
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
1-159
fs2153001
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1.2

the top cover /1
A. Procedure
[1]
2. Open the finisher door [2] and remove 5 screws
[3]
[3]. And then remove the top cover /1 [4].

steps in reverse.
[4]
[2]
[3]
1.3
fs2153002

the top cover /2
Note:
When an optional PI has been installed, be
sure to remove it.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the top cover /1.
2. Open the finisher door [1].
[3]
[4]
3. After removing 2 screws [2], pull out the sub-tray

[3] and remove the top cover /2 [4].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
1-160
fs2153003
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

the side cover
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the side
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.4
[1]
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[2]
1.5
fs2153004

the finisher door
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door [1].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] from the lower hinge [2]
and remove the finisher door [1].
[3]
[1]
steps in reverse.
[2]
fs2153005
1-161
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1.6

the rear cover
A. Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the rear
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
1-162
fs2153006
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

the main tray
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.7
Caution:
After you have lowered the main tray, be sure
to unplug the power cord of the main body
from the power outlet.
A. Procedure
1. Push up the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit
sensor (PS702) with your finger, and lower the
[1]
main tray [2].

2. Turn off the main switch (SW2) of the main body
and unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
[2]
fs2153007
[2]
4. With the main tray [2] raised up, unhook the up/
down stay [3] and remove the main tray [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[3]
fs2153008
1-163
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1.8

the main paper exit opening
cover
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts:
Top cover /1, or an optional PI-installed machine
(PI)
Top cover /2
Side cover
Rear cover
Main tray
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main
paper exit opening cover [2].
[2]

steps in reverse.
[1]
fs2153009
1.9

the booklet paper exit opening cover (FN-9 only)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the booklet tray.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the book-
[2]
let paper exit opening cover [2].

steps in reverse.
[1]
fs2153010
1-164
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2.1
Replacing the paper

roller /A (sponge roller)
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. CONVEYANCE
exit
Caution:
After you have lowered the main tray, be sure
to unplug the power cord of the main body

Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller): Every
250,000 copies.
Note:
When replacing the sponge rollers, all of the 5
pairs (10 components) must be replaced.
B. Procedure
1. Push up the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit
sensor (PS702) with your finger, and lower the
[1]
main tray [2].

2. Turn off the main switch (SW2) of the main body
and unplug the power cord of the main body
[2]
1-165
fs2153011
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. With a driver inserted into the groove of the
[1]
sponge roller [1], prize it open to remove the

sponge roller.
fs2153012
4. With a new sponge roller and the shaft put

together at their respective concave sections [1],
install the sponge roller securely to the shaft by
pressing it down until a click sound is heard.
[1]

steps in reverse.
[1]
fs2153013
1-166
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
Replacing the intermediate

conveyance roller (sponge
roller)
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.2

Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller):
Every 250,000 copies.
Note:
When replacing the intermediate conveyance
rollers, all of the 2 pairs (4 components) must
be replaced.
B. Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and a bearing [2], and
then remove the intermediate conveyance roller
[3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
3. With a driver inserted into the groove of the

sponge roller [1], prize it open to remove the
sponge roller.
fs2153014
[1]
fs2153015
1-167
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. With a new sponge roller and the shaft put

together at their respective concave sections [1],
install the sponge roller securely to the shaft by
pressing it down until a click sound is heard.
[1]
steps in reverse.
[1]
Note:
When reinstalling, be sure to insert the pin at
the rear of the intermediate conveyance roller
fs2153016
securely into the receiving groove.
2.3

the paper exit opening unit
A. Procedure
Top cover /1, or an optional PI-installed machine
(PI)
Top cover /2
Side cover
Rear cover
Main tray
Main paper exit opening cover
2. Remove a screw [3] of the paper exit open/close
link [2] of the paper exit opening unit [1].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fs2153017
1-168
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

3. Remove 3 clamp screws [1], a ground screw [2],
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
the paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) connector [3] and the main tray paper exit sensor
[3]
(PS706) connector [4].
[1]
[4]
4. Remove E-rings [1] and bearings [2], two each,
provided at front and rear, and then remove the
[1]
fs2153018
[2]
paper exit opening unit [3].

steps in reverse.
[2]
[3]
1-169
[1]
fs2153019
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
3. MAIN TRAY
3.1
Replacing the tray up/down

motor
Caution:
When removing the tray up/down motor, be
sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from
falling.

Tray up/down motor (M703): Every 2,500,000
copies
B. Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. After removing a connector [1], remove 2 screws
[3] while supporting the main tray [2] with your
hand, and then remove the tray up/down motor
[2]
(M703) [4].
steps in reverse.
[3]
[4]
[1]
fs2153020
1-170
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

the up/down wire
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.2
Caution:
When removing the tray up/down motor, be
sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from
falling.
Note:
The wire replacement steps shown below
refer to those taken on the rear side. The
shape and the winding of wire on the front
side are symmetrically the same as those on
the rear side.
The wire brackets of the up/down wire is
stamped with "F" for the front side and "R" for
the rear side. When reinstalling, be careful not
to mix up the front with the rear.
A. Procedure
Side cover
Finisher door
Rear cover
Tray up/down motor (M703)
Main tray
2. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the up/
down gear cover [2] and the gear [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
1-171
fs2153021
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. After removing 2 screws [1], remove the wire

bracket [3] of the up/down wire [2] on the rear
side from the up/down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
fs2153022
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
[2]
[1]
fs2153023
5. Remove an E-ring [1], the gear [2] and the up/

down pulley /L [3], and then remove the up/down
wire [4].
[3]
Note:
[5]
When removing the up/down pulley /L, be

careful not to drop the pins [5]. Otherwise,
they may get lost.
[4]
[1]
[2]
fs2153024
1-172
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6. Fasten the wire bracket [1] tentatively to the up/

down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note:
Be sure to set the up/down wire [4] with the
shorter section [5] up and the longer section
[6]
[6] down.
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[5]
fs2153025
7. With a new up/down wire fastened to the wire

end [2] of the up/down pulley /L [1], wind the
wire a little less than 5 turns from inside toward
outside around the pulley without getting loosened and set the up/down pulley /L [1] to the
shaft so that it is in tune with the pin [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs2153026
8. After putting the up/down wire on the up/down

pulley /U [1], wind it 2 turns from inside toward
outside around the up/down pulley /L [2] without
getting loosened and fasten it to the wire end
[1]
[3].
[3]
[2]
1-173
fs2153027
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9. Set the pin [1] and the gear [2] to the shaft and
fasten it with the E-ring [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
fs2153028
10. Using a tension gauge or spring balance, pull

the belt tensioner [1] to the specified force "A"
and tighten it with 2 screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5 0.25 kg
[2]
[1]
fs2153029
11. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on

the front side. Press down the up/down stay [3]
[2]
to make it level, and tighten screws [5] of the

wire bracket [4] on the rear side and screws (4
screws in all).
[1]
Note:
Be sure to check if the up/down stay [3] is
level. If it is out of the level, an undesirable
load may be imposed on the tray up/down
motor (M703) or the gear, causing damage to
it.
[4]

steps in reverse.
1-174
[5]
[3]
fs2153030
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4.1
Replacing
the
assist roller
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. STACKER
stacking

Stacking assist roller: Every 400,000 copies
B. Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit.
3. Open the stacking assist section [1] and lift up
the stacking assist roller [2].
[3]
[2]
4. Remove the stop ring [3], and then remove the

stacking assist roller [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
4.2
fs2153031

the stacker unit cover
A. Procedure
[2]
stacker unit cover [2].

steps in reverse.
[1]
1-175
fs2153032
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4.3

the stacker unit
Caution:
We recommend that at least two people perform this service.
Be careful when you detach the FNS from the
main body. If you pull out the stacker unit, the
FNS may fall. This may cause injury.
A. Procedure
Booklet tray
Side cover
Finisher door
Rear cover
2. Detach the FNS from the main body.
4. Remove 3 connectors [1] (CN1, CN2, CN3) from
the relay board (RB) [2].
(For FS-115, two connectors (CN1, CN2) are
[2]
provided.)
5. Remove each cable from the wiring harness
guide.
[1]
1-176
fs2153033
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6. After removing an E-ring [1] and the shaft [2],

detach the connecting arm [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
fs2153034
7. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [1] and pull out

the stacker unit [2].
Note:
To prevent the FNS from falling down, be sure
[1]
to put a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[2]
[1]
[3]
1-177
fs2153035
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and raise the stacker unit

[2] to remove the guide rail [3].
[3]
[4]
Caution:
When removing the guide rail, be careful not
[5]
to hurt your hip by taking an appropriate pos-
[1]
ture.

steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
When reinstalling the stacker unit [2] to the
guide rail [3], be sure to check to see if the
hook [4] is set securely into the fitting hole [5].
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
fs2153036
1-178
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5.1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. STAPLER
the stapler unit cover
Caution:
Be careful when you detach the FNS from the
main body. If you pull out the stacker unit, the
FNS may fall. This may cause injury.
A. Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
[1]
fs2153037
3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [1] and pull out
[1]
the stacker unit [2].

Note:
To prevent the FNS from falling down, be sure
to put a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[1]
[2]
[3]
1-179
fs2153038
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the stapler unit cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
5.2
fs2153039
Replacing the clincher
Note:
Do not use hands to move clincher units to
horizontal direction.
Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping
may occur.
After reinstalling the clincher, be sure to conduct the "vertical adjustment of the FNS stapler." (See "ADJUSTMENT.")
Clincher: Every 200,000 staples
B. Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit and remove the stapler
unit cover.
3. Remove a ground screw [1], and then remove
[5]
the ground [2] and the clamp [3].

4. After removing 4 screws [4], remove the clincher
/F [5] and then remove the connector [6].
[6]
[3]
1-180
[2]
[4]
[1]
fs2153040
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

5. Remove 4 screws [2] of the clincher /R [1] and
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
the ground [3].
[2]
[3]
6. After removing 2 screws [1] and the ball bearing
fs2153041
[3]
spring mounting bracket [2], rotate the clincher /

R [3] to the position in which it can be easily
taken out, and then remove the connector [4].
Note:
Be careful not to lose the bearing spring [5]
and the ball.
[4]

steps in reverse.
[5]
[1]
[2]
1-181
fs2153042
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5.3
Replacing the stapler

Stapler: Every 200,000 staples
Note:
Do not use hands to move stapler units to
horizontal direction.
Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping
may occur.
After reinstalling the clincher, be sure to conduct the "vertical adjustment of the FNS stapler." (See "ADJUSTMENT.")
B. Procedure
3. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.
4. After removing 4 screws [2] of the stapler /F [1]
[2]
and a ground screw [3], take out the stapler /F

[1] and remove the connector [4].
[1]
[2]
[3]
1-182
[4]
fs2153043
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

5. After removing 2 screws [3] of the sensor cover
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[2] of the stapler /F [1] and 3 clamps [4], remove

a ground screw [5] and the connector [6].
Note:
When reinstalling the sensor cover [2], be
careful that the wiring harness does not inter-
[2]
[4]
fere with the stapler rotation HP sensor

(PS713) [7] or get caught by the gear.
[6]
[3] [5]
6. After removing 4 screws [1], take out the stapler
[7]
fs2153044
[1]
/R [2] and remove the connector [3].
[2]
Note:
When taking out the stapler /R [2], be careful
not to damage PS713 [4].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[4]
1-183
[3]
fs2153045
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
Blank page
1-184
PUNCH SECTION
PK-5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
1. PUNCH SECTION
Punch unit
Note:
The following screws should not be removed.
If you do, punching cannot be done as
designed.
Screws that should

not be removed
1.1
Replacing the Punch unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove cap on the top cover.
Punch scraps box
1-185
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
PUNCH SECTION
PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Remove the punch drive board cover by remov-
punch drive board cover
ing one screw.
Screw
3. Disconnect two connectors (CN65, 68) and one

relay connector (CN531) from the punch drive
board (PKDB).
Relay connector (CN531)

Connector (CN65)
Connector (CN68)
Punch drive board (PKDB)
1-186
PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
PUNCH SECTION
4. Remove three screws to remove the punch unit
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
punch unit cover
cover.
Screws
5. Disconnect two connectors (CN158, 505).

6. Remove the punch unit from FNS by removing
four screws.
steps in reverse
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1-187
Screws
Punch unit
Connector (CN505)
Connector (CN158)
Punch shift motor (M802)
Punch shift HP PS (PS803)
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PUNCH SECTION
1.2
PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
Cleaning the Punch Edges

and Punch Scraps Full PS
(PS802)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the punch unit.
2. Use a blower brush to remove paper dust and
punch scraps from the punch edges and punch
Punch scraps full PS (PS802)
scraps full PS (PS802).

steps in reverse
Punch edges
1-188
External Section
Cover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

Caution:
1. External Section
1.1
Removing / Re-installing the

External covers
A. Procedure
Screws
1. Remove cap on the top cover.
Cap
2. Remove four screws to detach the top cover.

Top cover
3. Remove one screw to detach the connector

cover.
Screws
Lower cover
4. Remove three screws to detach the lower cover.
Screw
1-189
Connecting cover
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
External Section
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. Remove two screws, disconnect the relay connector (CN232), and detach the operation panel
cover.
Relay connector (CN232)
Screw
Screw

steps in reverse.
Operation panel cover
1-190
Paper feed unit
2.1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Paper feed unit

Replacing the Paper feed
roller and Feed roller
A. Procedure
1. When replacing the paper feed roller and feed
Stop
ring
Bearing
Stop ring
roller for the upper tray, detach the top cover.

2. Remove the two stop rings, then shift the left
and right bearings outside, and remove the feed
roller unit.
Bearing
Paper feed roller unit
3. Remove actuator, three stop rings, three bearings of the feed roller unit, then slide the roller
Paint mark
shaft in the direction of the allow to remove each

roller.
Rubber
Feed roller
Feed drive belt

Stop ring
Bearing
Rubber
Stop
rings
Feed roller
Bearing
Actuator
1-191
Paper feed unit
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. When replacing the paper feed roller and feed

roller for the lower tray, open the upper tray and
Top cover
Release lever
perform the steps 2 and 3.

steps in reverse.
Note:
Ensure that the mounting direction of each
roller and rubber is correct.
2.2
Replacing the Double feed

prevent roller and Torque
limiter
A. Procedure
1. When replacing the double feed prevent roller
and the torque limiter for the upper tray, detach
the top cover.
2. Detach the paper feed roller unit.
Double-feed prevention roller
3. Release the hooks on both sides, remove the

double feed prevention roller assembly by lifting
up, then pull out the shaft, and remove the double-feed-prevention roller together with the feedreverse gear.
Hooks
4. Separate the double feed prevention roller and

the torque limiter from the double feed prevenStop rings
tion roller assembly.
Double feed prevention roller
5. When replacing the double feed prevention

roller and the torque limiter for the lower tray,
open the upper unit and perform the steps 2 and
Torque limiter
3.
Notch
steps in reverse.
Note:
Ensure that the mounting direction of each
roller and rubber is correct.
1-192
TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
TRIMMER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TMG-3 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
Trimming knives (upper and lower) are used
in this machine. Be extremely careful in handling these knives to avoid injuries.
1. TRIMMER
1.1
Replacing the trimmer knife

/U and trimmer knife /L

Trimmer knife /U: Every 4,000,000 copies (Every
Trimmer knife /L: Every 4,000,000 copies (Every
B. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and conveyance door [2].
2. Untighten 4 fixing screws [3] and remove the top
[4]
[3]
plate [4].
3. Untighten 1 nylon clamp screw fixing the power
cord and remove the power plug.
[1]
1-193
[2]
tu1093001
TRIMMER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Untighten 4 fixing screws [1] and 3 fixing screws
[2]
[2] and remove the rear cover [3].
[1]
5. Untighten 3 fixing screws [1] and remove the
[3]
[2]
roller cover [2].

6. Disconnect 1 relay connector [3] and remove the
[3]
tu1093002
[4]
[5]
wiring harness [5] from the cable clamp [4].
[6]
7. Untighten 2 front and rear fixing screws [6]

respectively and remove the entrance conveyance roller unit [7].
[6]
[1]
8. Remove 1 front and rear E-ring [1] and bearing

[2]
respectively
and
remove
the
[7]
tu1093003
[3]
trimmer
entrance driven roller [3].
[1]
1-194
[2]
tu1093004
TRIMMER
9. Remove 4 hexagon socket head bolts [1] and
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
remove the trimmer knife /U [3] holding the

replacing handle [2] at 2 positions.
[2]
Note:
When removing the trimmer knife /U [3], be
sure to hold the replacing handle [2]. Never
touch the knife blade.
Be careful not to drop the trimmer knife /U or
hit it against some object; its edge may be
nicked.
[3]
tu1093005
10. After pulling down the conveyance guide plate

[1], insert a screw (M4 x 16 or more) or the like
[2] into the stopper hole [3] to avoid the convey-
[5]
ance guide plate [1] from returning to the origi-
[4]
nal position.
Note:
Do not remove 2 screws [4] and 1 screw [5]
that should not be removed.
[2]
[1]
[3]
1-195
tu1093006
TRIMMER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
11. Remove 4 hexagon socket head bolts [1] and
[2]
remove the trimmer knife /L [2] holding the front
[4]
fixture [3] and inner corner [4].

Note:
Never touch the blade of the trimmer knife /L
[2].
Be careful not to drop the trimmer knife /L or
hit it against some hard object; its edge may
be nicked.
When installing, align the bottom of the trimmer knife /L [2] with the hexagon socket head
bolt [5] and insert into the guide pin [6].
[1]
[3]
[6]

steps in reverse.
[5]
1-196
tu1093007
II
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION
ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION

Composition
8. Is proper paper used for copy?

9. Are copy materials replaced with new ones at
This part "Adjustment" describes items to be

adjusted and their method of adjustment that are
required by this machine and gives detailed expla-
their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning blade,

etc.)
10. Is toner filled?
nations.
B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site serA. Checking before starting work
vice
When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary

to check in advance the following:
Due attention should be paid to the following when

repairing the machine.
1. Are the power source and voltage secured in

accordance with the specifications?
1. In this machine, when the reset switch (SW1) is
2. Is the power source properly grounded?

3. Is any equipment that consumes repeatedly a
lot of electricity connected to the same power
source? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as
elevator and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the
machine?
High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.
Levelness of the location on which the machine
is installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original
itself?
turned off, only one side of the AC line is shut

off. So, be sure to unplug the power cord from
the power outlet. Also, when operating the
machine with the power supplied, be careful of
the scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to
get caught by the gear.
2. The fixing section may be very hot. Be careful
not to get burnt when handling it.
3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be
careful not to bring a watch and instrument near
to the unit.
4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare
hands.
6. Is density selected properly?

7. Is the original glass stained?
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS

Adjustments and setting are required when there
occurs a claim for poor image quality. However,
these adjustments (including checking) and setting
2. A circle "{" in the table

,
................. :
Shows that the order of
are also required when a part is replaced with a new
priority has been speci-
one.
fied
[How to use the tables]
(including checking) and

setting.
{ (Empty circle)
Each item represents the following:

1. Mode
for
adjustments
Shows that adjustments

(including checking) and
Shows which mode is used for adjustments.

"25": 25 mode
setting can be
independently.
"36": 36 mode
"47": 47 mode
2-1
done
II ADJUSTMENT
1.1
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
Adjustment items
Mode
II ADJUSTMENT
Replacement parts
PM count
Parts counter
Drum cartridge (drum) /Y, M, C, K
This table shows the list of adjustment items

when replacing a part. Items are numbered in
" " by the priority if there is any.
PM counter resetting
PM cycle set
Count of special parts
1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K

Fixing cleaning unit
Developer /Y, M, C, K
Decurler roller
25
ISW
Board change mode
Process adjustment
Drum peculiarity adjustment
Magnification adjustment
Image adjustment
Timing adjustment
Blade setting mode

LD bias adjustment
Automatic gamma adjustment (0)
Automatic developer charge
L detection initial auto. adjustment
Initial drum rotation
Printer vertical mag. adjustment
Printer horizontal mag. adjustment
Belt line speed adjustment
Fixing line speed adjustment
Printer lead edge timing adj.
Writing unit skew initial adj.
Auto. color registration adj.
Color registration manual adjustment
36
2
3
Scanner gamma adjustment

Printer gamma adjustment
Image quality
adjustment
Printer gamma offset adj.

Printer gamma sensor adj.
Printer screen gradation adj.
Sharpness adjustment
Image judge adjustment
Dot detect adjustment

Color text adjustment
ACS adjustment
Other adjustment FNS stapler position adjustment
*1 After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first performed
the L detection adjustment.
*2 When replacing memory board (MB), be sure to replace the developer, 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K,
and fixing cleaning unit.
*3 When adjust the belt line speed adjustment, be sure to adjust the fixing line speed adjustment.
2-2
3
1
2
6
4
5
2
3
2*3
3
1
2
4
1
7
5
6
2
7
2
3*3 3*3
4 4
1
5
6
4
2
3
7
6
5
2-3
3
1
2
6
5
4
1
4
3
2
1
2
1
2
Memory board (MB) *2
1
2
1
1
1
2
3
4
3
2
When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, the memory board
(MB) that was installed on the damaged OACB should be used on the new OACB. Contact the service
section of the authorized distributor if it is considered that the MB is also damaged. Never perform the 47
mode - 92 (output).
II ADJUSTMENT
Stapler unit
FNS control board (FNSCB)
RADF control board (DFCB)
Registration roller
Operation board /1 (OB1)
Printer control board (PRCB)
Overall control board (OACB)
Original glass
Exposure lamp (L1)
Each scanner mirror
CCD unit
Dust-proof glass /Y, M, C, K
Write unit /Y, M, C
Write unit /K
Decurler roller
Fixing roller /U, L
Charging corona /Y, M, C, K
Image correction unit
1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K
Belt cleaning blade
Transfer belt
Developer *1
MODE CHANGE MENU
4. MODE CHANGE MENU

4.1
Setting method
From this screen, the following modes can be

selected without turning off/on the power.
"1 Basic screen"
II ADJUSTMENT
"2 36 mode"
"3 25 mode"
"4 Key operator mode"
"5 47 mode"
A. Procedure
1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main
switch (SW2).
2. Press the P button and wait until "Enter 4-digit
password to change mode" appears.
3. Input 9272 as the password and press the
START button. (The password is fixed and cannot be changed.) "Mode changing menu
screen" is displayed.
4. Press any desired key.
5. To return to the "Mode changing menu
screen," press the P button and wait until the
"Mode changing menu screen" appears.
6. After completion of adjustment, press the [Exit]
key to return to the basic screen.
2-4
4.2
MODE CHANGE MENU
Display transition of 36 modes
36 mode 1/2
x : Factory exclusive use. Service is not used.
High voltage adjustment mode menu

1
2
3
4
5
1st transfer manual adjustment

2nd transfer manual adjustment
HV adjustment (Separation-AC)
HV adjustment (Separation-DC)
Pre-transfer guide HV check
Process adjustment mode menu

1
2
3
4
5
High voltage adjustment

Drum peculiarity adjustment
Sensor output check
Exclusive paper setting
Recall standard data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Blade setting mode

Automatic drum potential adjustment x
Automatic gamma adjustment
LD bias adjustment
Automatic developer charge
L detect initial automatic adjustment
Initial drun rotation
Sensor output check mode menu

3-6 Modus / Adjustment mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Surface potential sensor output

2 MAX. density sensor output
3 Gamma sensor output
Process adjustment
Image adjustment
Image quality adjustment
Running test mode
Test pattern output mode
Test pattern density setting
Finisher adjustment
List output mode
Magnification adjustment mode menu

1
2
3
4
Printer drum clock adjustment

Printer horizontal adjustment
Scanner drum clock adjustment
EDH drum clock adjustment
Timing adjustment mode menu

Image adjustment mode menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
Timing adjustment
EDH adjustment
Centering adjustment
Non-image area erase check
Recall standerd data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Printer restart timing adjustment

Printer resist loop adjustment
Printer pre-resist adjustment
Printer lead edge timing adjustment
Scanner restart timing adjustment
EDH restart timing adjustment
EDH resist loop adjustment
EDH adjustment mode menu

1 EDH density adjustment
2 EDH original size adjustment
3 EDH Incline offset adjustment
Centering adjustment mode menu

1 Printer centring adjustment
2 Scanner centring adjustment
3 EDH centring adjustment
2-5
II ADJUSTMENT
Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
MODE CHANGE MENU
36 mode 2/2
Printer gamma adjustment mode menu
II ADJUSTMENT
Image quality adjustment mode menu
3-6 Modus / Adjustment mode

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Process adjustment
Image adjustment
Running test mode
Finisher adjustment
List output mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Scanner gamma adjustment

Printer gamma adjustment
Contrast adjustment
ACS adjustment
Density adjustment
Tone adjustment
Recall standard data
1 Printer gamma offset adjustment

2 Printer gamma sensor adjustment
3 Printer screen gradation adjustment
Image judge adjustment mode menu

1 Dot detect adjustment
2 Color text adjustment
3 Dot/Text area adjustment
Density adjustment mode menu

1 AE adjustment
2 Copy density adjustment
3 Background adjustment
Tone adjustment mode menu

Running test mode menu
1
2
3
4
5
Intermittent copy mode

Paperless running mode
Paperless mode
Paperless endless mode
Running mode
1 Red adjustment
2 Green adjustment
3 Blue adjustment
Finisher adjustment mode menu

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Stitch & Fold stopper adjustment

Fold stopper adjustment
Cover sheet tray size adjustment
Trimming stopper adjustment
Punch adjustment
Three Folding position adjustment
2 Positions staple pitch adjustm.
List output mode menu

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Machine management list 1

Adjustment data list
Page fill data list
Parameter list
Memory dump list
Font pattern
2-6
Punch adjustment mode menu

1 Punch vertical position adjustment
2 Punch horizontal position adjustment
3 Punch resist loop adjustment
4.3
MODE CHANGE MENU
Display transition of 25 modes

PM count mode menu
1 Count reset
2 Change setting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Software SW setting
Paper size setting
PM count
Data collection
Parts counter
Password setting
Telephone number setting
M/C serial number setting
Indication of ROM version
RD mode setting
ISW
Setting date input
Board change mode
Collecting data mode menu

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Total count of each setting

Copy count of each paper size
Print count of each paper size
RADF count
Page fill of each section
JAM date of time series
JAM count
Count of each copy mode
SC count
10 JAM count of each section

11 SC count of each section
Copy count mode menu

1 Count of special parts
2 Count of each parts
Password setting mode menu

1 Key operator password
2 E.K.C. master key cord
3 Weekly timer password
*1
M/C serial number setting menu

1
2
3
4
Main body
Option tray
RADF
Finisher
*1 Name of system
E.K.C : Except USA area
E.C.M : USA area only
2-7
II ADJUSTMENT
2-5 Modus /Memory setting mode
MODE CHANGE MENU
4.4
Display transition of Key Operation modes
Key Operation mode
System initial setting menu
II ADJUSTMENT
Key operator mode menu

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
System initial setting

Copier initial setting
User setting mode
E.K.C function setting *1
Lock / delete program memory
Paper type / Special size set
Panel contrast / Key sound adj.
Key operator data setting
Weekly timer
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Control panel adjustment

Tray auto select setting
Power save setting
Memory switch setting
Machine management list print
* Not use Minolta!
Finisher adjustment
Front & Back Density setting
Scanner transmission setting
Non-image area erase setting
AES adjustment
Execute adjust operation
Timing adjustment
Centring adjustment
Printer gamma sensor adj.
*1 Name of system
Centring adjustment mode menu

1 Printer centring adjustment
2 Scanner centring adjustment
3 RADF centring adjustment
1
2
3
4
Date & Time setting

Language select setting
IP address setting / Tandem
E-mail transmission setting
Weekly timer setting menu

1
2
3
4
5
Weekly timer ON/OFF setting

Timer setting
Timer action ON/OFF setting
Lunch hour off setting
Timer interrupt password set
> Next page

Management list print mode menu
1
2
3
4
Job memory list

User management list
E.K.C. management list
Font pattern list
Finisher adjustment mode menu

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Stitch & Fold stopper adjustment

Fold stopper adjustment
Trim stopper adjustment
Punch adjustment
Z-Fold position adjustment
2-Positions staple pitch adjustment
Finisher output limit
Magnification mode menu

1 Printer vertical mag. adj.
2 Printer horizontal mag. adj.
3 Scanner vertical mag. adj.
Timing adjustment mode menu

1
2
3
4
5
6
Printer lead edge timing adj.

Printer registration loop adj.
Printer pre-registration adj.
Printer erasure amount adj.
Scanner re-start timing adj.
RADF registration loop adj.
2-8
MODE CHANGE MENU
Key Operation mode

No.13 Memory Switch Setting
1 Auto reset timer

2 Auto reset key function
3 RADF-Original effect
4 Job memory auto recall -305 Finisher mode by Full-Auto
6 Initial by Key Counter insert
7 Erasure outside area of original
8 RADF frame erasure selection
9 Automatic tray switching
10 Platen APS
11 RADF APS
12 Platen AMS
13 RADF AMS
14 Select tray when APS cancel
15 Platen original size detect
16 RADF original size detect
17 Platen original size detect (SMALL)
18 Rotation
19 Staple mode reset function
20 Job offset operating
21 Continuation print
22 Key click sound
23 1 Shot indication time
24 Power save screen
25 Start Key latch function
26 Stop Key function
27 Auto select of booklet copy
28 E.K.C. Password
*1
29 Arrow key change [Image shift]
30 An interruption suspended way
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
E.K.C. password input timing *1

Sound (No paper, toner/ JAM)
Reserve copy function
Change page no. Pos. (booklet)
Trimmer (STD./ Non STD size)
Timer which prohibits print
Bookmark function
Delete of overlay image
Orig. direction/ Binding mode
Screen (Line Screen)
Screen (Dot Screen)
Side 2 drum clock adjust mode
Screen (Full Colour-Text/ Photo)
Screen (Full Colour-Photo)
Screen (Monochrome-Text/ Photo)
Screen (Monochrome-Photo)
Screen (Mono Colour-Text/ Photo)
Screen (Mono Colour-Photo)
Colour gamut
*1 Name of system
2-9
II ADJUSTMENT
No15 - Memory switch menu
CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION
5.CHECKING BY
THE P FUNCTION
The P function is a function that allows you to confirm the following various numeric values by using
the P button.
[1] Total counter
II ADJUSTMENT
[2] Full color counter

[3] Mono color counter
[4] Monochrome counter
[5] Copier counter
[6] Printer counter
5.1
Checking method of the

P function
A. Procedure
1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main
switch (SW2).
2. Press the P button.
3. "Counter list screen" appears.
4. Press the ! button in "Counter list screen," and
the PM counter is displayed.
5. To output the counter value list, press the
[Counter list output] key.
6. Pressing the [Exit] key, or the stop or clear button returns to the basic screen.
2-10
25 MODE
6. 25 MODE
List of adjustment items for
25 mode
Adjustment item menu
1. Software SW setting
2. Paper size setting
3. PM count
Remarks
See the "List of software
DIPSW".
LCT paper size setting
1. Count reset
II ADJUSTMENT
6.1
2. Change setting
4. Data collection
1. Total count of each paper setting

2. Copy count of each paper size
3. Print count of each paper size
4. RADF count
5. Page fill of each section
6. JAM data of time series
7. JAM count
8. Count of each copy mode
9. SC count
10. JAM count of each section
11. SC count of each section
5.Parts counter
1. Count of special parts

2. Count of each parts
1. Key operator password
4 digits
2. E.K.C. master key code
8 digits
3. Weekly timer password
4 digits
7.Telephone number setting
1. Service centre Telephone number

2. Service centre FAX number
16 digits
16 digits
8. M/C serial number setting
1. Main body
6. Password setting
2. Option tray
3. RADF
4. Finisher
9. Indication of ROM version
10. RD mode setting
11. ISW
12. Setting date input
13. Board change mode
2-11
25 MODE
6.2
Setting method
6.3
Setting software DIPSW
This machine is provided with the 25 mode as an
A. Setting method
adjustment method. This mode is used when the

memory board (MB) is rewritten or various settings
The software DIPSW is set on "Software SW setting

screen."
are made.
Note:
Please note that DIPSW bits are written into
A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Turn OFF the main switch (SW2) with the reset
the memory board (MB) each time a change is

made.
switch (SW1) left ON.

B. Meaning of the values displayed on the
2. While pressing the numeric keys 2 and 5 at the
screen
same time, turn on the SW2. the "25 mode

menu screen" appears.
At this point, the machine enters the 25 mode
with normal copy operations unavailable.
3. Press the item keys on the liquid crystal display (LCD). A setting screen corresponding to
each item appears.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050fs1026e
4. Confirm the input data on the setting screen of

each item.
5. Turn off the SW2 to release the 25 mode.
6. New data will be effective after restarting.
[1]
DIPSW number
[2]
Bit number (0 to 7)
[3]
Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF
[4]
8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.
C. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Software SW setting] key.
3. "Software SW setting screen"
Select a DIPSW number by using the arrow
key on the left.
4. Select a bit number of the DIPSW by using the
arrow key on the right.
5. Select the ON (1) or OFF (0) of the DIPSW by
using the [ON] or [OFF] key.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "25 mode menu screen".
For each function of the DIPSW, see "List of software DIPSW."
2-12
25 MODE
List of software DIPSW

Note:
Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
Bit
Functions
No.
DIPSW1
1
2 Print stop method after toner supply or waste toner full display
3
*1
*1
0
1
0
1
0
1
*1
*1
Prohibited
*2
*2
0
0
0
0
0
0
4 Prohibition of printing when the PM Not prohibited

count is reached
5 Print number setting until printing is
6 prohibited after PM is displayed
*2
*2
7
DIPSW2
DIPSW3
*2
*2
Disconnected
Connected
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
4 Control of the LT paper feed assist

fan
5
6 Switchover of the rotational speed
7 of the polygon motor
*3
*3
*3
*4
*3
*4
0
1
0
1
0
1
*4
*4
Unlatched
Not requested
Latched
Requested
0
0
0
0
0
0
Disabled
Enabled
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
0
0
1
0
0
1
4 Recovery from removal of the key

counter
Disabled
Enabled
5 APS when change magnification
Enabled
Disabled
6 Change of fixed magnifications setting in key operator mode
Enabled
Disabled
7 Large size paper counting method

(Other than PM counter)
Count as 1
Count as 2
0 Hard disk connection
1 SC latch (SC34/35/36)
2 Password request for 25, 36, 47
mode (password: 9272)
3
6 47 mode 15-01, 02 counter clear

7
DIPSW4
Default values
Japan Inch Metric
2-13
II ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW
25 MODE
DIPSW

Bit
Functions
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
A3, 11 x 17 or
0
0
0
0
0
0
No.
DIPSW5
Japan Inch Metric
II ADJUSTMENT
5 Change of the size of the large size B4, 8.5 x 14 or

paper
larger
DIPSW6
DIPSW7
DIPSW8
larger
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
Count as 1
Count as 2
6 Large size paper PM counting

method
7
DIPSW9
Default values
0 Operation when the key counter is

Same as
Immediate stop
removed (copier)
the stop button
jam
1 Operation when the key counter is

removed (IP)
Ignored
Same as
DIPSW9-0
2 Message switchover
3
*5
*5
*5
*5
0
0
0
0
0
0
4 Copy quantity limit selection
*6
*6
*6
*6
6
7
*6
*6
*6
*6
0
0
0
0
0
0
2-14

Bit
Functions
No.
DIPSW10
DIPSW11
Japan Inch Metric

0 Page memory reservation at power No reservation 94MB (177MB
on
when Expansion memory is
installed)
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
Disabled
Enabled
7 Jam code display

0
Disabled
Enabled
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 Adjustment of the image quality in

the key operator mode
Disabled
Enabled
3
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
*7 Screen
*7 Nonscreen
4 Filter for jagged edges on slanting

lines
DIPSW12
6 Black text screen with overlay function

7
DIPSW13
Default values
0 Size detection switchover 1

A5, A4R
A6R
5.5 x 8.5, 8.5x11R

Post card
0
1
1
0
0
0
8.5 x 14
F4
*8
*8
4
5 F4 size setting
*8
*9
*8
*9
0
0
1
0
0
0
*9
*9
2-15
II ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW
25 MODE
25 MODE
DIPSW

Bit
Functions
No.
DIPSW14
Japan Inch Metric

0 Size detection switchover 5 (main B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR
body)
8.5 x 11 / B5R
1
2
II ADJUSTMENT
Default values
3 Size detection switchover 5 (bypass)
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR

8.5 x 11 / B5R

(platen)
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR
5 Size detection switchover 5 (ADF) B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K/16K / 16KR

8.5 x 11 / B5R
6 Size detection switchover 5 (PI)
8.5 x 11/B5R
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR

8.5 x 11 / B5R
DIPSW15
7
0 Selection of the RD mode type
Telephone line
E-mail
0
0
0
0
0
0
3 FNS alarm stop method

4
*10
*10
*10
*10
0
0
0
0
0
0
5 RD mode connection
DIPSW16
Disconnected
Connected
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Copy reservation Copy reservation
1 Recognizing the copy reservation

function/coin vendor
function enabled function prohibited

Coin vendor disabled Coin vendor enabled
Parallel
Serial
2 Coin vendor type
communication communication
3 Counting of the key counter in the
printer mode (IP)
Not counted
Counted
4 Display of the total count start date

(P function)
Displayed
Not displayed
0
0
0
0
0
0
IP NIC
Copier NIC
0 Summer time setting
*11
*11
1
2
*11
*11
*11
*11
1
1
1
1
1
1
*11
*11
4 Density selection at scanning the

tabed paper
5
6
*12
*12
*12
*12
*12
*12
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
6
7 NIC selection for E-Mail RD-mode
DIPSW17
2-16

Bit
Functions
0 Tray 1 faulty part isolation

Normal
Normal
Unavailable
Unavailable
0
0
0
0
0
0
Normal
Unavailable
3 Tray 4 (LCT) faulty part isolation
Normal
Unavailable
4
5 Folding, stitch & folding, tri-fold,
trimmer faulty part isolation
Normal
Unavailable
0
0
0
0
0
0
No.
DIPSW18
DIPSW19
Japan Inch Metric
6 PI faulty part isolation
Normal
Unavailable
7 HDD faulty part isolation
Normal
Unavailable
0
1 Fixing temperature selection
*13
*13
0
1
0
1
1
1
*13
*13
*13
*13
Normal
*14
Unavailable
*14
0
0
0
0
0
0
5 PK faulty part isolation

6 Default resolution of the IP scanner
7
DIPSW20
DIPSW21
Default values
*14
*14
Disabled
Enabled
1 Image scanning area with shift

function
2 Selection of the stamped page
number
*15 Normal
* 15 Original priority
Based on
Based on
original
transfer paper
3 Keyboard layout
0 Group stapling mode
ABC layout
QWERTY layout
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
Disabled
Enabled
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1 LCT size setting in the key operator
mode
2 Display of the original count
Displayed
Not displayed
Disabled
Enabled
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
6 Selection of the index paper with
APS
7
2-17
II ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW
25 MODE
25 MODE
DIPSW

Bit
Functions
Disabled
*16
Enabled
*16
1
0
1
1
1
0
*16
*16
No.
DIPSW22
Japan Inch Metric

0 IP address setting
1 Number of punch holes
2
3 Image reference position for the
non-standard size original
Based on user Based on APS at
4 Function of the power save button
II ADJUSTMENT
5
6 Operation when FNS runs out of
staple
DIPSW23
ADF
Disabled
1 Output when EKC (ECM) user ID is Enabled

Disabled (regisunmatched (IP)
(counted as the tered in JOB list)
other user)
2 Precision of the color registration

automatic correction (periodical
correction)
*17 Normal
*17 Fine
3 Control of the color registration

automatic correction (periodical
correction)
*18 Enabled
*18 Disabled
4 Main scan correction of the color

registration automatic correction
(periodic correction)
*19 Enabled
*19 Disabled
5 IP gamma correction
*20 Enabled
*20 Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
*21 Disabled
*21 Enabled
0
0
0
0
0
0
DIPSW25
selection
Enabled
Staple supply Selecting

between staple
request
supply or staple
release
6 Job memory registration of the

special paper setting on the bypass tray
DIPSW24
Default values
0
1 Vs/Vp switch control
2 Image stabilization control timing
*22
*22
*22
*22
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3 Color registration correction control
*23
*23
4
5 Color registration fine correction
*23
Yes
*23
No
0
0
0
0
0
0
7 De-humid heater
ON
OFF
2-18

Bit
Functions
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2 Toner refresh mode (at job end)
*24 Disabled
*24 Enabled
3 Toner refresh mode (periodical)
*24 Disabled
*24 Enabled
4 Printer gamma offset adjustment
*25 Only high

light
*25 Whole area
Enabled
Disabled
*26 Y,M,C,K
*26 M,C
0
0
0
0
0
0
No.
DIPSW26
DIPSW27
DIPSW28
Japan Inch Metric
5 PK punch mode restriction

6
7 Toner refresh mode switchover
(Key operator mode)
DIPSW29
0
1
2
Not included
Included
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
Restricted
Not restricted
0
0
0
0
0
0
3 Include of proof copy to the set

copy quantity
DIPSW30
Default values
0
1 Restriction of the display of the 25
mode data correction
2
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
2-19
II ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW
25 MODE
25 MODE
DIPSW

Bit
Functions
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
No.
Japan Inch Metric
II ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW31
*1
Print stop method after toner supply or waste

toner full display
Mode
Stops after ejecting paper
in the machine
1-3
0
1-2
0
Stops at a break between

copy set
Stops at the end of the

current job
Does not stop
*2
Default values
Switchover of the rotational speed of the polygon motor

Mode
1/1 speed
2-7
0
2-6
0
1/1 speed
2/3 speed
1/2 speed
Mode
9-3
9-2
Please insert key counter

Please insert copy card
0
0
0
1
Please insert coin
Please insert key counter
Print number setting until printing is prohibited

after PM is displayed
Mode
*4
Message switchover
1-7
1-6
1-5
1,000 prints
2,000 prints
3,000 prints
4,000 prints
0
1
1
1
0
0
5,000 prints
9-7
9-6
9-5
9-4
1,000 prints
No limit
1,000 prints
1,000 prints
0
1
1
1
1
1
1 sheet
3 sheets
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
5 sheets
*3
*6
Copy quantity limit selection

Mode
Control of the LT paper feed assist fan
9 sheets
10 sheets
20 sheets
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
Mode
ON for coated paper only
2-5
0
2-4
0
30 sheets
ON for all types of paper
50 sheets
ON for all types of paper
OFF at all times
99 sheets
No limit
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
No limit
No limit
No limit
No limit
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
2-20

Black text screen with overlay function
When using the overlay of the applied function, the image creation method of black characters is switched between the error diffusion
and the screen.
Mode
12-6
0
Screen
Error diffusion
*8
Size detection switchover 4
*11
Summer time setting

Mode
0 minute
17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0

0
0
0
0
10 minutes
20 minutes
30 minutes
40 minutes
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
50 minutes
60 minutes
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
13-4
13-3
70 minutes
80 minutes
A5R
90 minutes
B6R
100 minutes
5.5 x 8.5R
1
1
0
1
110 minutes
120 minutes
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
130 minutes
140 minutes
150 minutes
Mode
*9
F4 size setting
Mode
13-6
13-5
8 x 13
8.25 x 13
8.125 x 13.25
8.5 x 13
1
1
0
1
*12
Density selection when scanning the tabed

paper
Mode
17-6
17-5
17-4
80
40 (most lighter)
This setting is used to determine when to stop
60
100
0
0
1
1
0
1
if a FNS full alarm is detected.

Functions detected are;
120
160
200
255 (most darker)
1
1
1
1
0
1
*10 FNS alarm stop method
Lower limit of the FNS tray, the number of the

FNS trays, FNS booklet tray, PK punch
scraps, TU scraps and TU stacker
15-4
15-3
Stops immediately after

detection
Mode
Stops at a break between

copy set after detection
Does not stop while in

printing
Does not stop while in
printing
2-21
II ADJUSTMENT
*7
25 MODE
25 MODE
*13
Fixing temperature selection

Temperature up:
*17
Decrease a insufficient
fixing or fixing winding
jam
Temperature down: Decrease paper exit curl-
II ADJUSTMENT
ing or waving
Mode
19-3
19-2
19-1
Upper roller, lower roller: 30C
Standard
Upper roller, lower roller:

+10C
Upper roller: +10C

Lower roller: +20C
Standard
*14
Mode
Normal
Fine
*18
Color registration auto correction control (periodical correction)

Down time while in the continuous printing is
reduced with the color registration correction
omitted that is periodically performed (color
registration correction at power ON is not
omitted).
Mode
23-3
Enabled
Disabled
*19
19-7
19-6
400dpi
600 dpi
200 dpi
0
1
1
0
300 dpi
Main scan correction of the color registration

auto correction (periodical correction)
The color registration corrections, in the main
scanning direction that are periodically performed can be omitted. This is used temporarily when there is a registration error along the
main scan as a result of a trouble around the
transfer belt unit, or when separating faulty
points.
Image scanning area with shift function

Normal: Compare the original size and the
transfer paper size and the smaller
one is to be the image area.
Original priority:
Original size is to be the image
area.
Mode
20-1
Normal
Original priority
*16
23-2
0
Default resolution of the IP scanner

Mode
*15
Precision of the color registration automatic

correction (periodical correction)
"Fine" is used when the precision of the color
registration correction that is periodically conducted is increased with the amount of error
reduced. However, it takes about 2 minutes
longer for correction.
22-2
22-1
2 holes (for Japan)
3 holes (for inch area)

4 holes (for metric area)
0
1
1
0
2-22
23-4
Enabled
Disabled
*20
IP gamma correction
In order to separate defective items when
there is poor images sent from IP. The gamma
correction can be omitted. The gamma correction table is stored in the IP.
Mode
Number of punch holes

Mode
Mode
23-5
Enabled
Disabled
25 MODE
*21 Vs/Vp switch control

This Vs/Vp switch control is used when there
is an image erasure around a solid image in
the half-tone section in early stage after the
change of developer.
Disabled
24-1
0
Enabled
Correction is performed by suspending print at specified print.

No correction made:
Correction is omitted temporarily to
reduce
the
Correction that is performed by suspending print at every specified

print is performed after the print job
Correction is omitted temporarily to

when
to reduce down time.
the
Mode
machine cannot be used with SC

due to the malfunction of the drum
potential sensor or gamma sensor.
No correction while in printing:
Correction that is performed by
suspending print at every specified
print is performed after the print job
to reduce down time.
Mode
when
No correction while in printing:
pending print at specified print.

No correction made:
time
time
due to malfunctions around the

color registration sensor.
Correction is performed by sus-
down
down
machine cannot be used with SC
*22 Image stabilization control timing

Correction made:
reduce
Color registration correction control

Correction made:
24-3
24-2
Correction made
Correction not made

No correction while in
printing
0
1
1
0
2-23
25-4
25-3
Correction made
Correction not made
No correction while in
printing
II ADJUSTMENT
Mode
*23
25 MODE
II ADJUSTMENT
*24
Toner refresh mode (at Job end)

Toner refresh mode (periodical)
When printing coverage is low (5% or less of
each color), rough image, white spot or toner
spillage tend to occur due to toner deterioration.
The effective measure against these are as
follows.
Toner refresh mode in key operator mode
It is performed by a user's decision when a
problem occurs.
Amount of toner equivalent of 8-sheet A3
solid is developed for all Y, M, C, K.
(It needs to change setting by DIPSW 287)
DIPSW 28-2
For the colors of which print coverage of
the previous job is 5% or less (convert into
A4), solid toner of the difference amount
from the 5% is developed to consume
toner.
PIPSW 28-3
Check the average print coverage for each
color at prescribed distance of developing
sleeve drive developes the toner amount
equivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid for the color
of which the average print coverage is 5%
or less (convert into A4).
Disabled
Mode
28-2
0
Enabled
*25
Printer gamma offset adjustment

Change the area in which the printer gamma
offset of the 36 mode can be adjusted.
0: High light area only
1:
Possible in whole area

Mode
High light area only
Possible in whole area
*26
Toner refresh mode switchover

Switch over the toner refresh mode function in
the key operator mode.
0: Amount of toner equivalent of 8 sheets A3
solid is developed for all Y, M, C and K to
consume toner.
1:
This setting is effective for rough image,

white spot and toner spillage.
This setting is not so effective for white
line (paper feeding direction).
Amount of toner equivalent of 10 sheets
A3 half-tone is developed for M and C to
consume toner.
This setting is effective for white line
(paper feeding direction).
This setting is effective for rough image,
white spot and toner spillage for
magenta and cyan only. (It has no
effect for yellow and black.)
Mode
Mode
Disabled
28-3
0
Enabled
2-24
28-4
28-7
Y,M,C,K
M,C
6.4
25 MODE
Paper size setting
Conduct this setting when changing the paper size
6. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu

screen."
of the LCT.
To invalidate the setting that you have
The paper size is available in the standard size,

non-standard size and wide paper.
changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return

to "25 mode menu screen."
A. Procedure
6.4.3 Wide paper setting
A. Procedure

Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.

3. "Paper size setting screen"

Press the [Standard size] key.

Press the [Wide paper] key.
4. Press the arrow key to select the paper size.

screen."
changed, press the [Cancel] key and return to
"25 mode menu screen."
4. Press the arrow keys and select the standard

size of the wide paper.
5. Press the [Enter size] key.
6. Press the main scan direction key and enter
the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
6.4.2 Non-standard size setting

7. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the
paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
A. Procedure
keys.
screen."

Press the [Non-standard size] key.

4. Press the main scan direction key and enter
the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
5. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the
paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
2-25
II ADJUSTMENT
6.4.1 Standard size setting
25 MODE
6.5
PM count setting
6.5.2 Change setting
Reset the PM count after implementation of the PM

and set and/or change the PM cycle.
The selection of the PM cycle is available in the
total count and the distance in operation of the
developing unit /K. In default, the total count is set.
Press the [3. PM count] key.

3. "PM count/cycle screen"
Press the [Page] or [Distance] key.
6.5.1 Count reset
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
4. Enter a cycle value through the numeric keys.
Only the upper three digits can be entered.
screen."
Press the [3. PM count] key.

3. "PM count/cycle screen"

Press the [Count reset] key.
4. "PM count reset confirmation screen"

Press the [YES] key when resetting the PM
count. The PM count is reset and the starting
date of the PM count is automatically entered.
When the [NO] key is pressed, the PM count is
not reset and return to "PM count/cycle
screen."
2-26
6.6
25 MODE
Data collection
B. Data collection confirmation method

(1) Procedure
It is possible to confirm various data held in the

machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data
by the list output and the mail remote notification
system.

Press the [4. Data collection] key.
A. Data that can be confirmed

1. Total count of each paper size
2. Copy count of each paper size
want to confirm.
3. Print count of each paper size
To select any succeeding key to the key 11,
4. RADF count
5. Page fill of each section
press the arrow key.

4. "Individual data confirmation screen"
6. JAM data of time series
Press the arrow key to scroll the screen.
7. JAM count
8. Count of each copy mode
Count of each copy mode (1)
Count of each copy mode (2)
9. SC count

10. JAM count of each section

Note:
11. SC count of each section
The [Count reset] key is shown in the individNote:

When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 6 to 11 can be
ual data confirmation screen of the [10. JAM

count of each section] and the [11. SC count
of each section].
confirmed.
When pressing the [COUNT RESET] key,

"Count reset confirmation screen" is shown,
and when pressing the [YES] key, the section
data is reset.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Individual
data confirmation screen" with the interval
data not reset.
Reset these data while in the PM implementation to confirm the jam or SC occurrence
count after it was visited last time.
2-27
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Data collection menu screen"

Press the key of a data collection item that you
25 MODE
C. Details of the data collection

(1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and
printer counts of each paper size
II ADJUSTMENT
NO
For
Remark
Japan
Inch
Metric
1
2
A2
A3
17 x 22
11 x 17
A2
A3
B4
8.5 x 14
B4 (8K)
A4
8.5 x 11
A4
5
6
B5
A5
5.5 x 8.5
B5 (16K)
A5
B6
F4
8.5 x 14
9
10
8.5 x 11
Special
A4
Special
Special
Maximum count: 99,999,999

1 count is made for paper of All types regardless
of the paper size.
All sheets of paper that do not come under the
size of No. 1 to No. 9 are counted as special.
However, SEL and LEF are counted as the same
size.
The non-standard and the wide paper are
counted as special.
2-28
Not used
25 MODE
(2) Data collection No. 4: RADF count

Item
No. of originals fed in ADF mode
No. of originals fed in RADF mode
No. of originals fed in RDH mode
4
5
No. of originals fed in RRDH mode

No. of originals fed in LDH mode
No. of originals fed in CFF mode
No. of 1 sided SDF original fed
8
9
No. of mix originals fed in ADF mode

No. of mix originals fed in RADF mode
10
No. of originals fed in 2 in 1 mode
11
No. of 1 sided z-folded original fed
12
13
No. of 2 sided z-folded original fed

No. of 2 sided SDF original fed
14
Remark
Not used
Not used
Not used

(3) Data collection No. 5: Page fill of each section
It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of
5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of
Y, M, C and K.
This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the
dot area of pixels and the transfer paper area, and
is different from the print ratio when actually printed.
(4) Data collection No. 6: JAM date of time
series
With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible
to confirm originating jam code, total count, date of
occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size
and magnification.
2-29
II ADJUSTMENT
NO
1
25 MODE
(5) Data collection No. 7: Jam count / No. 10.
NO
Jam code is shown on the

LCD display when
DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
33
J72-16
34
35
J72-17
J72-18
36
J72-19
37
J72-20
J72-21
J72-22
JAM count of each section
II ADJUSTMENT
NO

LCD display when
J10-01
J10-02
Section
By-pass
3
4
J10-03
J11-01
Tray 1
J12-01
Tray 2
38
39
J13-01
Tray 3
40
J72-23
7
8
J14-01
J17-01
LCT
41
J72-24
J17-02
42
43
J72-25
J72-26
10
J17-03
44
J72-28
11
12
J17-04
J17-05
45
J72-29
13
J17-06
46
47
J72-30
J72-32
14
J17-07
48
J72-33
15
16
J17-08
J17-09
49
J72-34
17
J31-02
50
51
J72-35
J72-38
18
J32-08
52
J72-39
19
20
J32-04
J32-01
53
J72-40
21
J32-05
54
55
J72-41
J72-42
22
J32-07
56
J72-43
23
24
J32-02
J32-03
57
J72-44
25
J92-01
58
59
J72-45
J72-46
26
J93-01
Paper feed
Reversed
paper exit
ADU
FNS
TU
PI
Not used
PK
Not used
60
J72-47
61
J72-48
FNS
62
63
J72-49
J72-50
PI
27
28
J94-02
J19-01
29
J19-02
Vertical
conveyance
LCT
64
J72-51
30
J51-01
Main body
65
J72-60
31
J71-01
FNS
32
J71-02
TU
66
67
J72-61
J72-62
68
J72-63
69
J72-64
70
71
J72-80
J72-81
72
J72-82
73
J72-83
74
J72-90
2-30
Section
Not used
PK
FNS

LCD display when
75
J61-01
76
77
J61-02
J61-03
78
J62-01
79
J62-02
80
81
J62-03
J62-04
82
J62-05
83
J62-06
84
85
J62-07
J17-10
86
Section
DF
II ADJUSTMENT
NO
25 MODE
LCT
87
88
89
Not used
90
2-31
25 MODE
II ADJUSTMENT
(6) Data collection No. 8-1: Count of each copy mode (1)
NO
1
Item
1-1 mode
1-2 mode
2-1 mode
4
5
2-2 mode
ADF 1-1 mode
ADF 1-2 mode
Mixed original mode
8
9
Tab original mode

Z-folded original mode
10
LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Reg.)
11
LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Reg.)
12
13
LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Rev.)

LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Rev.)
14
Enhance Mode: text/photo
15
Enhance Mode: Text
16
17
Enhance Mode: Photo

Enhance Mode: Map
18
Non STD size
19
1 oblique staple(Upper left)
20
21
1 oblique staple(Upper right)

2 parallel staples(Left binding)
22
2 parallel staples(Upper binding)
23
Left binding
24
25
Right binding
Upper binding
26
Three-Folding
27
Stapling & Folding
28
29
Folding
Main tray: Group
30
Main tray: Sort
31
Main tray: Non sort
32
33
Subtray: Group (FACE DOWN)

Subtray: Group (FACE UP)
34
Subtray: Sort (FACE DOWN)
35
Subtray: Sort (FACE UP)
36
37
Subtray: Non sort (FACE DOWN)

Subtray: Non sort (FACE UP)
38
Cover sheet
39
Trimmer
40
41
Real size copy

Preset magnification E4
42
43
44
45
Preset magnification R4
Count conditions
2-32

Item
46
47
48
49
User lens mode 1
50
User lens mode 2
51
52
User lens mode 3

Zoom
53
Vertical/Horizontal zoom
54
Maximum zoom
55
56
Minimum zoom
APS
57
AMS
58
AE (AES)
59
60
User density level 1 (Not used)

User density level 2 (Not used)
61
Interrupted copy
62
Auto image rotation cancellation
63
64
Sheet insertion
Chapter control
65
Combination
66
Booklet copy
67
68
OHP interleave (copy) (Not used)

OHP interleave (blank) (Not used)
69
Image insert
70
Book copy
71
72
Program job
Non-image area erase
73
Reverse image
74
Auto repeat
75
76
Manual repeat
STD size repeat
77
Frame erasure
78
Fold erasure
79
80
Auto layout
All-image area (Not used)
81
Image Shift
82
Reduction shift
83
84
Overlay
Water mark
85
Stamp
86
Date/Time
87
88
Page
Numbering
89
Set quantity 1
90
Set quantity 2-5
91
Set quantity 6-10
Count conditions
II ADJUSTMENT
NO
25 MODE
2-33
25 MODE
II ADJUSTMENT
NO
Item
Count conditions
92
Set quantity 11 or more
93
Time while power remote 1 is ON
94
95
96
97
Time during Low Power mode
98
Time during warm up time
Accumulation of warm-up time (in minutes)
99
Time during front door open
Accumulation of time during which the front door

is open (in minutes)
Accumulation of time during which the overall

control board is powered
Accumulation of time during which the remote
power 1 is on (in minutes)
Accumulation of time during which the remote
power 2 is on (in minutes)
Accumulation of time during which the built-in
controller operates (in minutes)
Accumulation of time in the low power mode (1
count for each minute)
100 Ope. Time in 1side straight exit
Accumulation of time from the start of print to the

end of print (in minutes)
Down time due to jam omitted
101 Ope. Time in 1side reverse exit

102 Operation time in 2 side print
103 Operation time in ADF mode
Accumulation of time during which ADF operates (in minutes)
104 Morning Correction count (Not used)

105 Time during APS sensor ON
Accumulation of time during which the APS sensor is on (in minutes)
106 N of main tray used jobs

107 N of subtray used jobs
108 N of stapling & folding used jobs
109 N of folding used jobs
110 N of ADF NF occurred
111 N of ADF special error1 occurred
Wrong detection of original size
Next original information error
Error in size for which mixed paper is not allowed
114 N of scanner scanned

115 N of electrode cleaned (Not used)
No. of scans in platen mode
116 N of memory overflow

117 N of fixing alarm occurred (Not used)
118 N of no toner stop occurred (Not used)
119 N of AGC retry (Not used)
120 N of sub scan beam correct error (Not used)
121 N of mis-centering correct error (Not used)
122 N of distortion adjust error (Not used)
123 N of ADF distortion data error (Not used)
124 Compression memory overflow
125 Page memory overflow (scan)
126 Page memory overflow (print)
127 FNS alarm (tray/trimming)
128 FNS alarm (staple)
129
130 N of ADF special error4 occurred (Not used)
131 Store for HDD (Sync. With Copying) (Not used)
2-34

Item
Count conditions
132
Store for HDD (SRVmode Scan HDD) (Not

used)
133
134
Store for PC (SRVmode Scan PC) (Not used)

Store for PC (SRVmode HDD PC) (Not used)
135
Recall from HDD (SRVmode HDD) (Not used)
136
Recall from PC (SRVmode PC) (Not used)
137
138
Image edit count by SRV

Wide paper count (A3W) or (11 x 17R)
139
Wide paper count (A4W) or (8.5 x 11W)
140
Wide paper count (A4WR) or (8.5 x 11RW)
141
142
Wide paper count (A5W) or (5.5 x 8.5W)

Wide paper count (Others)
143
Punch
144
Z-Folding (Not used)
145
ADF original-thick
146
147
MixPlex (1 side)
MixPlex (2 side)
148
ADF original-thin
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
2-35
II ADJUSTMENT
NO
25 MODE
25 MODE
(7) Data collection No. 8-2: Count of each copy mode (2)
NO
1
II ADJUSTMENT
Item
Count conditions
ACS
Full color
Monochrome
4
5
Mono color (Y)

Mono color (M)
Mono color (C)
Mono color (R)
8
9
Mono color (G)

Mono color (B)
10
DF thick paper
11
DF thin paper
12
13
Original type: Printed paper

Original type: Photo paper
14
Original type: Copied paper
15
Original type: Inkjet paper
16
17
Original type: Pencil

Original type: Newspaper
18
Screen : Line screen/Smooth tone
19
Screen : Line screen/High resolution
20
21
Screen : Dot screen/Smooth tone

Screen : Dot screen/High resolution
22
Screen : High compression
23
Gloss mode
24
25
Density shift
Background adjustment
26
Red adjust
27
Green adjust
28
29
Blue adjust
Hue adjustment
30
Saturation adjustment
31
Brightness adjustment
32
33
Color balance adjustment

34
Contrast adjustment
35
36
37
Paper Type: Normal paper

Paper Type: Recycle paper
38
Paper Type: Color paper
39
Paper Type: High quality paper
40
41
Paper Type: Coated paper

Paper Type: Tab paper
42
Paper Type: Color specific paper
43
Paper Type: Exclusive paper A
44
45
Paper Type: Exclusive paper B

Paper Type: Exclusive paper C
2-36

NO
25 MODE
Item
Count conditions
Paper Type: Exclusive paper D
47
48
Paper Weight: 1
Paper Weight: 2
49
Paper Weight: 3
50
Paper Weight: 4
51
52
Paper Weight: 5
Paper Weight: 6
53
Multi page enlargement
54
Main Tray: Face up
55
56
N of no toner stop occurred (Y)

N of no toner stop occurred (M)
57
N of no toner stop occurred (C)
58
N of no toner stop occurred (K)
59
60
N of toner recovery box is full

N of color regist. auto. adj.
Counts 1 per every correction operation
61
N of auto stability control
Counts 1 per every correction operation
62
63
64
65
OFF mode time
Sum of the OFF mode time (unit: minute)
66
ON time of heater (Main body)
Sum of the time the heater is on (unit: minute)
67
ON time of heater (tray 4)
Sum of the time the LCT heater is on (unit:

minute)
68
Polygon motor operation time
69
Develop motor ope. time (color)
70
Develop motor ope. time (black)
71
ON time of PCL (color)
Sum of the time the polygon motor is on (unit:

minute)
Sum of the time the developing motor (color)
operates (unit: minute)
Sum of the time the developing motor (black)
operates (unit: minute)
Sum of the time the PCL (color) is on (unit:
minute)
72
ON time of PCL (black)
Sum of the time the PCL (black) is on (unit:

minute)
73
Operation time in Scanner motor
Sum of the time the scanner motor operates

(unit: minute)
74
Time while power (ADF)
Sum of the time the 24V is applied to the ADF

(unit: minute)
II ADJUSTMENT
46
75
76
77
78
79
80
2-37
25 MODE
(8) Data collection No. 9: SC occurrence count/
II ADJUSTMENT
No. 11: Sectional SC occurrence count
NO
SC code
44
SC29-06
SC29-07
SC29-08
NO
SC code
SC10-10
Communication abnormality
45
46
SC13-01
Paper feed motor abnormality
47
SC29-09
3
4
SC13-02
SC18-01
48
SC29-10
SC18-02
49
50
SC29-11
SC29-12
SC18-03
51
SC29-13
7
8
SC18-04
SC18-50
52
SC29-14
SC18-51
53
54
SC29-15
SC29-16
10
SC18-60
55
SC29-17
SC18-61
SC18-70
56
SC29-18
57
58
SC29-19
SC29-20
59
SC29-21
60
SC29-22
61
62
SC29-23
SC30-01
11
12
13
SC18-71
14
SC20-10
Section
Paper feed tray abnormality
LT abnormality
Section
Process abnormality
15
16
SC20-11
SC20-12
17
SC21-01
18
SC21-02
63
SC30-02
19
20
SC21-03
SC21-04
64
SC30-10
SC23-01
SC32-01
SC32-02
Fan abnormality
21
65
66
22
SC23-02
67
SC32-03
23
24
SC23-03
SC23-04
68
SC32-04
25
SC23-05
69
70
SC32-05
SC32-06
26
SC23-06
71
SC33-01
27
28
SC23-07
SC23-08
72
SC33-02
29
SC23-09
73
74
SC33-03
SC33-04
30
SC23-10
75
SC34-01
31
32
SC23-11
SC27-01
Toner supply abnormality

L-detection abnormality
76
SC34-02
33
SC27-02
L-detection abnormality
77
78
SC34-03
SC34-04
34
SC27-03
79
SC34-05
35
36
SC27-04
SC28-01
80
SC34-06
37
SC28-02
81
82
SC34-07
SC34-08
38
SC28-03
83
SC35-01
39
40
SC28-04
SC29-01
84
SC35-02
41
SC29-02
85
86
SC35-03
SC35-04
42
SC29-03
87
SC35-05
SC29-04
88
SC35-06
43
PCL abnormality
Developing motor abnormality
Drum motor
abnormality
Transfer belt
section abnormality
High voltage abnormality
2-38
Motor
abnormality
High fixing temperature abnormality
Low fixing temperature abnormality
NO
SC code
89
SC36-02
90
91
SC36-04
SC36-05
92
25 MODE
Section
NO
SC code
Section
115
SC45-01
Color registration abnormality
116
117
SC45-03
SC45-07
SC36-06
118
SC45-08
93
SC36-07
119
SC45-09
94
95
SC36-08
SC36-09
120
121
SC45-10
SC45-11
96
SC36-10
122
SC45-12
97
SC36-11
123
SC45-20
98
99
SC36-12
SC38-02
124
125
SC46-01
SC46-02
100
SC38-03
126
SC46-03
101
SC39-01
127
SC46-05
102
103
SC41-01
SC41-02
128
129
SC46-06
SC46-07
104
SC41-03
130
SC46-08
105
SC41-04
131
SC46-09
106
107
SC41-05
SC41-06
132
133
SC46-11
SC46-12
108
SC41-07
134
SC46-13
109
SC41-08
135
SC46-14
110
111
SC41-09
SC41-10
136
137
SC46-15
SC46-16
138
SC46-17
139
SC46-18
140
141
SC46-19
SC46-21
142
SC46-23
143
SC46-24
144
145
SC46-25
SC46-26
146
SC46-31
147
SC46-32
148
149
SC46-35
SC46-40
150
SC46-41
151
SC46-42
152
153
SC46-43
SC46-58
154
SC46-59
155
SC46-62
156
157
SC46-63
SC46-64
158
SC46-66
112
SC41-11
113
SC42-01
114
SC42-02
Fixing sensor abnormality
Scanner abnormality
Write
abnormality
Scanner abnormality
Write
abnormality
Fan abnormality
2-39
Image
processing abnormality
II ADJUSTMENT
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
NO
SC code
159
SC46-80
160
161
SC46-81
SC46-82
162
Section
NO
SC code
197
SC77-02
198
199
SC77-03
SC77-04
SC46-83
200
SC77-05
163
SC46-90
201
SC77-06
164
165
SC46-91
SC46-98
202
203
SC77-07
SC77-08
166
SC46-99
204
SC77-11
167
SC49-00
205
SC77-12
168
169
SC49-01
SC49-02
206
207
SC77-13
SC77-14
170
SC50-01
208
SC77-21
171
SC50-02
209
SC77-22
172
173
SC50-03
SC50-04
210
211
SC77-25
SC77-26
174
SC50-05
212
SC77-31
175
SC50-10
213
SC77-32
176
177
SC50-11
SC52-01
214
215
SC77-33
SC77-34
178
SC52-02
216
SC77-35
179
SC52-03
217
SC77-36
180
181
SC56-02
SC56-11
218
219
SC37-37
SC77-41
182
SC56-12
220
SC77-42
183
SC56-13
221
SC77-43
184
185
SC60-01
SC61-01
222
223
SC77-44
SC77-45
186
SC61-02
224
SC77-46
187
SC61-03
225
SC77-47
PK abnormality
188
189
SC61-04
SC61-05
226
227
SC77-52
SC77-53
Not used
190
SC61-06
228
SC77-54
PK abnormality
191
SC61-07
229
SC77-55
Not used
192
193
SC61-08
SC61-09
230
231
SC77-56
SC77-57
194
SC61-10
232
SC77-81
195
SC70-01
233
SC77-91
196
SC77-01
234
235
SC77-92
SC77-98
236
SC77-99
237
SC80-01
238
239
SC80-02
SC80-03
Image
processing abnormality
Fan abnormality
Operation board abnormality
DF abnormality
2-40
240
SC80-11
241
SC80-21
242
SC80-30
Section
FNS abnormality
TU abnormality
PI abnormality
PK abnormality
Not used
FNS abnormality
ISW abnormality

SC code
243
SC80-31
244
245
SC80-32
SC80-40
246
SC89-01
247
SC89-02
248
249
SC89-03
SC89-04
250
251
Section
Main body abnormality
II ADJUSTMENT
NO
25 MODE
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
2-41
25 MODE
6.7
Parts counter
6.7.1 Count of special parts

When a periodically replaced part is replaced, reset
replacement part: display of copy count used, resetting of count, setting of limit value, and new registra-
the counter of the part that has been replaced.

Display the name, part number and the copy count
tion of replacement parts.
of a replacement part that has been registered, and
The copy count by parts that need to be replaced
reset the count.
includes the following:

Count of special parts
Count of each parts
A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
The following are conducted with respect to each

Press the [5. Parts counter] key.
3. "Parts counter menu screen"
Press the [1. Count of special parts] key.
4. "Parts counter (fixed) screen"
Press the arrow key to select a part that you
want to reset.
5. Press the [Count reset] key.
6. "Parts count reset screen"
Press the [YES] key when resetting the part
count. The part count is reset.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Parts counter
menu screen" with the part count not reset.
2-42
25 MODE
B. Count of special parts list

Parts name
Toner collection box
Ozone filter /1 (Right side)
Deodorant filter (Rear side)
4
5
Dust-proof filter /1 (Right side)

Dust-proof filter /2 (Rear side)
Charging dust proof filter
Drum cartridge /Y
8
9
Drum /Y
Drum cleaning blade /Y
10
Lubricant applying unit /Y
11
12
13
Drum cartridge /M
Drum /M
14
Drum cleaning blade /M
15
Lubricant applying unit /M
16
17
Drum cartridge /C
18
Drum /C
19
Drum cleaning blade /C
20
21
Lubricant applying unit /C
22
Drum cartridge /K
23
Drum /K
24
25
Drum cleaning blade /K

Lubricant applying unit /K
26
27
Charging corona /Y
28
29
Charging wire assy /Y

Charging grid plate /Y
30
Charging corona /M
31
Charging wire assy /M
32
33
Charging grid plate /M

Charging corona /C
34
Charging wire assy /C
35
Charging grid plate /C
36
37
Charging corona /K
Charging wire assy /K
38
Charging grid plate /K
39
Transfer belt unit
40
41
Transfer belt
1st transfer roller /Y
42
1st transfer roller /M
43
1st transfer roller /C
Count conditions
*1
*2
II ADJUSTMENT
NO
1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
2-43
25 MODE
II ADJUSTMENT
NO
Parts name
44
1st transfer roller /K
45
46
2nd transfer roller /U

Transfer belt separation claw
47
Transfer belt cleaning unit
48
Belt cleaning brush unit
49
50
Toner collection sheet /1

Belt cleaning blade
51
52
Separation discharging unit
53
54

Fixing roller /U
55
Fixing roller /L
56
Developer /Y (Page)
57
58
Developer /Y (Page)
Developer /C (Page)
Count conditions
*1
*2
59
Developer /K (Page)
*1
60
Developing unit /Y
*2
61
62
Developing unit /M
Developing unit /C
63
Developing unit /K
*1
64
Developer /Y (Distance)
Displays developing sleeve travel distance (in meters)
65
66
Developer /M (Distance)
Developer /C (Distance)
67
Developer /K (Distance)
68
69
FNS tray up/down motor
1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit

1 count for each 1 paper exit in staple mode
70
FNS stapler /F
71
FNS stapler /R
72
FNS shift motor
73
FNS exit opening motor
74
FNS folding knife motor
75
By-pass gate solenoid
1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2staple and the stitch-and-fold modes
1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2staple and the stitch-and-fold modes
1 count for each paper exit at even number of copies in the
sort mode
1 count for starting the job of "large size" (A4R/8.5 x 11R or
larger) in the staple mode, and 1 count for each paper exit
1 count for starting each of the stitch-and-fold and folding jobs
1 count for each copy exit in each of the stitch-and-fold and
folding and the three-folding modes
1 count for each A4 / B5 / 8.5 x 11 / 16K copy exit in the staple
mode
76
Tri-folding gate SD
1 count for each copy exit in the three-folding mode
77
Pl conveyance clutch /U
1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand
78
79
Pl feed roller /A /U
Pl feed roller /B /U
80
Pl reverse roller /U
81
Pl torque limiter /U
1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand
2-44

Parts name
82
Pl conveyance clutch /L
83
84
Pl feed roller /A /L
Pl feed roller /B /L
85
Pl reverse roller /L
86
Pl torque limiter /L
87
88
Trimmer blade
PK punching unit (2 hole)
89
90
91
92
ADF paper feed roller
93
ADF feed roller
94
95
96
ADF feed prevention roller

ADF exit solenoid
97
ADF Dfeed clutch
98
ADF reversal solenoid
Count conditions
1 count for each paper feed in PI lower stand
1 count for each cutter operation

1 count for each punch operation
Original passage count in all modes
Original passage count in all modes

1 count for each original passage in the double side copy
mode and the mixing original mode
Single side copy mode: 1 count for each original
Double side copy mode: 3 counts for each original
1 count for each original passage in the double side copy
mode and the mixing original mode
99
100
Exposure ON time
Accumulation of on-time (in : minute
101
102
Sub power switch

Door SW
1 count each time the main switch turns off the power
1 count each time the front door is opened
103
Toner supply door switch
1 count each time the toner supply door is opened
104
Main power SW
1 count each time the reset switch turns off the power
105
106
Pl regist clutch
Punch motor
1 count each time PI feeds a sheet

1 count for each punch operation
107
108
Paper exit roller /A
1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit
109
110
Intermediate conveyance roller

Stacking assist roller
1 count for each sheet in each of the FNS flat stapling, stitchand-fold, folding and three-folding modes
111
112
Fixing torque limiter
*1
113
Registration cleaning sheet
1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode
2 counts in the double side copy mode
114
115
Ball bearing /U
Heat insulating sleeve /U
*1
116
Intermediate convery. clutch /1
117
118
119

Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-1)
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1
120
121
122
Feed/Dfeed rubber (By-pass)
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the bypass tray
2-45
II ADJUSTMENT
NO
25 MODE
25 MODE
NO

Parts name
123 Registration roller
Count conditions
124 Separation claw solenoid

125 Fixing upper lamp /1
126 Fixing upper lamp /2
*1
127 Fixing lower lamp
II ADJUSTMENT
128 Fixing temp. sensor /3

129 Fixing temp. sensor /4
130 Paper feed roller (Tray-1)
131 Paper feed roller (Tray-2)
132 Paper feed roller ((Tray-3)

133 Paper feed roller (By-pass)
134 ADU conveyance clutch /1
1 count for each paper exit in the double side copy mode (no
count is made in the single side copy mode)
135 ADU conveyance clutch /2

136 ADU pre-registration clutch
137 Ball bearing /L
138 Heat insulating sleeve /L
*1
139 Fixing drive gear

140 Decurler roller
141 LCT paper feed roller

142 LCT feed/Dfeed roller
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the LCT
143 LCT feed clutch

144 LCT pre-registration clutch
145 Paper feed clutch (Tray-1)
146 Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-1)

151 Paper feed clutch (By-pass)
152 Transfer earth plate unit
153 Center fixing temp. sensor/U
*1
154 Center fixing temp. sensor/L

*1
Count in all color modes

25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit
in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in
the double side copy mode
= 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in
the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the
double side copy mode
2-46
*2
Count only in full color or single color mode

25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit
in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in
the double side copy mode
= 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in
the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the
double side copy mode
25 MODE
6.7.2 Count of each parts
B. Resetting of each replacement part

(1) Procedure
This is used when you want to control the part

counter.
Set the part name, part number and the limit value,
and display and reset the copy count.
count is taken for each passage of paper, regard-
less of the paper size.

Press the [2. Count of each parts] key.
Reference:
When the copy count is in excess of a limit
4. "Count of each part screen"
value, an asterisk [*] is shown to the left of No.
Press the arrow key to select a number you

want to set or change.
A. Setting of each replacement part and display of the copy count
5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key.
(1) Procedure
6. "Parts count reset screen"

Press the [YES] key when resetting a part
count. This resets the part counter.

Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Count of
each part" with the part count not reset.

Press the [2. Count of each parts] key.
4. "Copy count of each part screen"
Press the arrow key to select a number you
want to set or change.
5. Press one of the [Parts name setting], [P/N
setting] and [Limit setting] key.
6. Press an item you want to set or change out of
the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and
[Limit setting] key, and enter it with the alphanumeric keys.
[Part name setting]: Enter a part name (8 digits
in alphanumeric)
[P/N setting]: Enter a part number (9 digits in
alphanumeric)
[Limit setting]: Limit value (8 digits in numeric)
7. Press the [OK] key to update the data.
changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
2-47
II ADJUSTMENT
Up to 30 data from No. 01 to No. 30 can be set. A
25 MODE
II ADJUSTMENT
6.8
Password setting
6.9
Telephone number setting
Set the following passwords.
Set the customer support center telephone and
Key operator password (4 digits): Password used

to enter the key operator mode.
EKC master key code (8 digits): Password
required when entering various EKC setting
modes.
Weekly timer password (4 digits): Password
required when entering various weekly timer setting modes.
Note:
FAX numbers that are used in an emergency for a
A password can be set only when the setting

for use of the weekly timer is set to "Use" in
the key operator mode.
service call and shown on the basic screen for help.

A. Procedure
Press the [7. Telephone number setting] key.
3. "Customer support TEL/FAX setting screen"
Press either of the [Service centre Telephone
number (16 digits)] and [Service centre FAX
A. Procedure
number (16)] keys that you want to set.
4. Enter a TEL or FAX number through the

numeric keys.

Press the [6. Password setting] key.

3. "Password setting mode screen"
Press the key of an item you want to set.

Key operator password (4 digits)
EKC master key code (8 digits)
Weekly timer password (4 digits)
Note:
4. Enter a new password through the numeric

keys.
Note:
Setting "0000" for the key operator password
and the weekly timer password allows you to
use each mode with no password.
2-48
When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure

to use hyphens to fill up the blanks.
25 MODE
6.10 M/C serial number setting
6.11 Indication of ROM version
Display and set the serial numbers of the main body
Display the ROM version of the main body and
and options.
options.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
Press the [8. M/C serial number setting] key.
Press the [9. Indication of ROM version] key.
3. "Serial number setting mode screen"
3. "Indication of ROM version screen"
Press the key of an item you want to set and

enter a serial number through the alphanu-
Each ROM version is displayed.

meric keys.
5. To invalidate the setting that you have
6.12 ISW
See chapter "Service tools."
Note:
The serial number of the main body cannot be
changed.
2-49
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.13 Setting date input
6.14 Board change mode
Set the starting date of the total counter that is dis-
When changing any of the following four types of
played on the LCD in the P function.
boards, be sure to set the serial number of the main

body in this setting.
OPERATION (operation board /1)
OVERALL CB (overall control board)
NVRAM (memory board)
PRINTER (printer control board)
A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
Note:
The number of boards that can be replaced at
Press the [12.Setting date input] key.
the same time is restricted only to two boards.
3. "Setting date input screen"

Enter an installation date through the numeric
keys.
A. Procedure
5. To invalidate the setting that you have

Press the [13. Board change mode] key.
3. "Board change mode screen"

Select a key of the board that you have
replaced a part.
4. "Serial number input screen"
Enter the serial number of the main body
through the alphanumeric keys.
2-50
36 MODE
7. 36 MODE
7.1
Setting method
7.2
This machine is provided with the 36 mode to make

various adjustment in this mode.
Process adjustment
Make various adjustments around the process.

A. Procedure
A. Procedure
the main switch (SW2).
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.

2. Turn ON the SW2 while pressing the numeric
buttons 3 and 6 at the same time. The "36
mode menu screen" is shown.
At this point, the machine enters the 36 mode
3. "Process adjustment mode menu screen"

For the process adjustment, there are the following items provided:
[1. High voltage adjustment]
with the normal copy operation unavailable.

3. Press the item key on the liquid crystal display
(LCD) to show a setting screen of each item.
[2. Drum peculiarity adjustment]

[3. Sensor output adjustment]
[4. Exclusive paper setting]
[5. Recall standard data]
4. Confirm the details of input in the setting

screen of each item.
4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
5. Turn OFF the SW2 to release the 36 mode.

from each of the adjustment screen to the
"Process adjustment menu screen."
6. New data will be effective after restarting.
2-51
II ADJUSTMENT
1. With the reset switch (SW1) left ON, turn OFF
36 MODE
7.2.1 High voltage adjustment
(1) Blade setting mode

Perform this adjustment when changing the belt
For the high voltage adjustment, the following items

are provided. However, be sure not to conduct a
high voltage adjustment in the field.
[1. 1st transfer manual adj.]
cleaning blade or the transfer belt. In this mode,

apply toner onto the transfer belt then clean with the
belt cleaning blade. This prevents the damages of
the transfer belt and the belt cleaning blade.
[2. 2nd transfer manual adj.]

[3. HV adjustment (Separation AC)]
a.
II ADJUSTMENT
[4. HV adjustment (Separation DC)]

[5. Pre-transfer guide HV check]
Procedure

7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment

Conduct the blade setting, charging potential correction, gamma, developer charge, L-detection
adjustment and the initial drum rotation.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"

Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
Press [1. Blade setting mode] key.
A. Procedure
5. "Blade setting mode screen"
Press the [Start] key. This process completes
in about 15 seconds and complete message is

shown on the screen.


to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu
screen."

For the drum peculiarity adjustment, the following items are provided:
[1. Blade setting mode]
[2. Automatic drum potential adj.]
[3. Automatic gamma adjustment]
[4. LD bias adjustment]
[5. Automatic developer charge]
[6. L-detect initial auto. adj.]
[7. Initial drum rotation]
from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen.
2-52
36 MODE
(2) Automatic drum potential adjustment
(3) Automatic gamma adjustment
Measure the charging potential of each drum of Y,
The gamma adjustment is performed automatically.
M, C and K to adjust automatically the developing
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
bias value and the charging voltage.

This adjustment is not necessary because of the
mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1.
automatic gamma adjustment contain this adjust-
a.
Procedure
ment.
Procedure




Press the [3. Automatic gamma adjustment]

key.

Press [2. Automatic drum potential adjustment]
key.
5. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0 screen"

There are 8 kinds of the gamma adjustment (0
to 7). However, conduct "Gamma auto adjust-
5. "Automatic drum potential adjustment screen"
ment 0" in the field.

in about 20 seconds and the charging potential
"Automatic gamma adjustment 0": Perform the

Dmax density adjustment, dot diameter adjust-
is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/2
ment, automatic drum potential adjustment,
speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M,
and the gamma adjustment. The developing
C and K) on the screen, with an exit message

shown.
bias value is shown for each line speed (1/1

speed, 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each
color (Y, M, C and K) with a complete mes-

screen."
sage.
in about 2.5 minutes and the developing bias
value is displayed for each line speed (1/1
speed, 1/ 2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each
color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen with a complete message.
screen."
2-53
II ADJUSTMENT
a.
36 MODE
(4) LD bias adjustment

Perform this adjustment when replacing the write
unit.
are provided. Press the arrow key to select the
Note:
Do not perform this adjustment except when
replacing the write unit.
II ADJUSTMENT
a.
6. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1) screen"

For the LD bias adjustment, the following items
Procedure
1. Read the numeric value on the bar code

labeled [1] on the replacing write unit.
color of the write unit you just replaced.
"LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1)"

"LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/1)"
"LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/1)"
"LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/1)"
7. Enter the numeric value on the bar code

labeled on the replacing write unit through the
numeric keys and press the [SET] key.
Note:
Be sure to enter the same numeric value in
LS 1/1, LS 1/2, and LS 1/3.
[1]
8050fs1025
screen."
Press the [4. LD bias adjustment] key.
2-54
36 MODE
(5) Automatic developer charge

In this mode, after discharging developer from the
developing unit manually, a new developer is automatically charged.
3. Set the developer charging plate /L [2] to the

shoulder screws [1] provided above the developing unit of a color the developer of which is
changed.
Note:
Do not open the upper cover of the developing unit. Otherwise, dust gets in the unit caus-
[2]
a.
Procedure
[1]
1. Open the toner supply section.

developer charging plate [3] provided inside
the toner supply section [2]. Remove 2 screws
[4] and then remove the developer charging
funnel /L [5].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
8050fs1002
[1]
8050fs1003
2-55
II ADJUSTMENT
ing image failure.
36 MODE
4. Set the developer charging funnel /L [2] to the

developer charging plate [1].

Note:
Be sure to attach the tip of the developer
charging funnel /L [2] securely to the toner
supply opening [3].

Press the [5. Automatic developer charge] key.
[1]
II ADJUSTMENT
10. "Automatic developer charge Y screen"

Press the arrow key to select the color of
developer you want to charge.
For the automatic developer charge, the follow
ing items are provided:

Automatic developer charge Y
Automatic developer charge M
Automatic developer charge C
Automatic developer charge K
11. Press the [Start] key to introduce a new developer into the developer charging funnel /U.
12. Make sure that the developer has been
[3]
[2]
8050fs1004
charged successfully before pressing the

[CANCEL] key.
5. Set the developer charging funnel /U [2] packaged together with developer to the developer
13. When charging another developer, repeat

steps 3 to 11.
charging funnel /L [1].

Note:
The developer charge funnel /U [2] is packaged together with each developer. So, be
sure to avoid its reuse.

screen."
15. Return the installed parts back to their original
positions.
Note:
After completion of this adjustment, be sure
to perform the L-detect initial auto. adjustment. If printing is started without performing the L-detect initial auto. adjustment, a
proper image density cannot be obtained,
thus resulting in the change of developer
again.
[1]
[2]
8050fs1005
2-56
36 MODE
(6) L-detect initial automatic adjustment
(7) Initial drum rotation
Be sure to conduct this adjustment after a new
When remove the drum cartridge, be sure to con-
developer is charged.
duct this operation to securely set the drum coupling.
Note:
Do not print without conducting the L-detect
a.
Procedure
initial auto. adjustment. Otherwise, a proper

image density cannot be obtained, thus
resulting in the change of developer again.

a.
Procedure


Press the [7. Initial drum rotation] key.

5. "Initial drum rotation screen"

in about 10 seconds and complete message is

Press the [6. L-detect initial auto. adjustment]
shown on the screen.
key.
5. "L-detect initial auto. adj. ALL screen"

Press the arrow key to select the color of a
developer that has been newly charged, and
then press the [Start] key.
For the L-detect initial auto. adj., the following
items are provided:
L-detect initial auto. adj. All: Conduct all colors
of Y, M,C and K.
L-detect initial auto. adj. YMC: Conduct Y, M
and C only.
L-detect initial auto. adj. K: Conduct K only.
L-detect initial auto. adj. Y: Conduct Y only.
L-detect initial auto. adj. M: Conduct M only.
L-detect initial auto. adj. C: Conduct C only.
6. A message "Completed" is displayed.
screen."
2-57
screen."
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.2.3 Sensor output check

For the sensor output check, the following items are
5. For setting, press the key of an item you want

to set. Set the following 12 types of setting for
each exclusive paper A to D.
provided; however, do not conduct them in the field:

[1. Surface potential sensor output]
[2. Max. density sensor output]
[3. Gamma sensor output]
II ADJUSTMENT
7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting

This setting is used when the user cannot obtain the
satisfactory results of transfer, separation or fixing
with the standard setting due to a special paper
being used.
This setting is applicable when [Exclusive paper A
to D] is selected in the key operator mode [Paper
2nd transfer offset Side 1

2nd transfer offset Side 2
2nd separation AC offset Side 1
2nd separation AC offset Side 2
2nd separation DC offset Side 1
2nd separation DC offset Side 2
Fixing (U) roller temp (idle)
Fixing (U) roller temp (print)
Fixing (L) roller temp (idle)
Fixing (L) roller temp (print)
Fixing (U and L) roller temp. difference
Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width
<261mm
Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width
>=261mm
Line speed
type/ Special paper size set].

In default, the following paper data is entered for
each destination area.
2
For Japan: 80 g/m color specified paper

For inch area: 105 g/m2 color specified paper
For metric area: 90 g/m2 color specified paper
Note:
When setting data, be sure to follow the
instructions given by Minolta Technology
Support Center.
A. Procedure
Press the [4. Exclusive paper setting] key.
4. "User paper setting menu screen"
For the user paper setting menu, the following
items are provided which correspond to the
setting key of the same name in the key operator mode.
[1. Exclusive paper A setting]
[2. Exclusive paper B setting]
[3. Exclusive paper C setting]
[4. Exclusive paper D setting]
2-58

to the "User paper setting menu screen."
36 MODE
7.2.5 Recall standard data

Reset the adjusted set values of process adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data)
Note:
Data for automatic drum potential, automatic
gamma, L-detect initial auto. and exclusive
paper setting adjustment cannot be reset to
II ADJUSTMENT
the standard data.

A. Procedure
Press the [5. Recall standard data] key.
4. "Recall standard data: Process adjustment
screen"
Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard data. Pressing the [NO] key or the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Process
adjustment menu screen" without recalling the
standard data.
2-59
36 MODE
II ADJUSTMENT
7.3
Image adjustment
7.3.1 Magnification adjustment
Conduct various image adjustments.
Adjust various magnifications.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure

Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.

3. "Image adjustment menu screen"

Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
For the image adjustment, the following items

are provided:
[1. Magnification adjustment]
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"

For the magnification adjustment, the following
items are provided:
[2. Timing adjustment]

[3. RADF adjustment]
[1. Printer vertical mag.adj.]
[4. Centring adjustment]

[5. Non-image area erase check]
[2. Printer horizontal mag.adj.]

[3. Scanner vertical mag.adj.]
[4. Belt line speed adjustment]
[5. Fixing line speed adjustment]


"Image adjustment menu screen."

"Magnification adjustment menu screen."
2-60
36 MODE
(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment

Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer system.
This adjustment changes the line speed of the registration roller, drum, transfer belt and the fixing.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the

START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale.
Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)
Within 1mm against 205.7 mm
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
ment, the following two methods are available.
205.7 1
Be sure to take care when an adjustment is

made.
8050fs1006
Used when the vertical magnification has

been changed due to the wear of the regis-
8. When the value is not within the standard,
tration roller or the heat shrinkage of

paper.
press the C button while pressing the P button.
(2) Belt line speed adjustment

been changed due to causes other than
the above.
In default, the printer vertical magnification
adjustment on side 2 is not reflected to the
image. When adjusting the vertical magnification on side 2, use the memory switch in the
key operator mode to turn ON side 2 drum
clock adjustment mode. However, since the
line speed is switched for each image creation
process on side 1 and side 2, the print speed
is reduced to about 1/4.
a.
9. "Printer
vertical
magnification
adjustment
screen"
For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT]
key to select an item you want to adjust.
"Printer vertical mag. adjustment": Side 1 and
side 2 are adjusted at the same time.
Setting range: -300 to +300, 1 step = 0.01%
"Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustment
Procedure
"By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2

adjustment
"Back tray 4 offset": LCT side 2 adjustment

10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric

keys and press the [SET] key.

11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value
can be obtained.
Press the [1. Printer vertical mag. adj.] key.

to the "Magnification adjustment menu
5. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment screen"

Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
screen."
2-61
II ADJUSTMENT
Note:
For the printer vertical magnification adjust-
36 MODE
(2) Printer horizontal magnification adjustment

Adjust the horizontal magnification of the printer
system.
This adjustment changes the horizontal magnification in image processing prior to the laser exposure.
II ADJUSTMENT
a.
9. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment

screen"
For the printer horizontal magnification adjustment, the following items are provided. Press
the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS
ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want
to adjust.
Procedure
"Printer horizontal magnification adjustment":

Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the same
time.



Press the [2. Printer horizontal magnification
adjustment] key.
5. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment
"By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2

adjustment
"Tray 4 offset (ADU)": LCT side 2 adjustment
screen"



can be obtained.
7. Measure the horizontal magnification with a

scale.

Within 1 mm against 190 mm
190
8050fs1007

2-62
to
the
screen."
"Magnification
adjustment
menu
36 MODE
(3) Scanner vertical magnification adjustment

Adjust the vertical magnification of the scanner system.
This adjustment changes the scan speed.
8. When the value is not within to the standard,

9. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric
a.
Procedure
can be obtained.
to
screen."

Press the [3. Scanner vertical mag. adj.] key.
5. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen"
START button with a test chart set to the original glass.
7. Measure the vertical magnification with a
scale.
Within 1 mm against 200 mm
200
the
8050fs1008
2-63
"Magnification
adjustment
menu
II ADJUSTMENT

36 MODE

Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer system.
This adjustment charges line speed of the transfer
belt.

7. Measure the vertical magnification with a
scale.
Within 1 mm against 205.7 mm
Note:
For the printer vertical magnification adjust-
II ADJUSTMENT
ment, the following two methods are available.

Be sure to take care when an adjustment is
made.
205.7 1

been changed due to the wear of the regis-
8050fs1006
tration roller or the heat shrinkage of

paper.
been changed due to causes other than
the above.
a.
8. If the specification is not satisfied, press the C

button while pressing the P button.
9. "Belt line speed adjustment screen"
Procedure

can be obtained.


to the "Magnification
screen."

Press the [4. Belt line speed adjustment] key.
5. "Belt line speed adjustment screen"
2-64
adjustment
menu
36 MODE
When replacing the fixing roller/U, /L and transfer

belt, use this adjustment method to adjust the fixing
roller line speed.
When the fixing line speed is faster than the transfer
belt, this results in an increased vertical magnification or transfer jittering. And when the fixing line
speed is slower than the transfer belt, this results in
the trailing edge of the image will be soiled.
are packed with the "paper for fixing speed

adjustment") with the cyan density of the outputted paper, and check to see if the cyan density of the output paper is within the limit of the
fixing density standard patches.
8. When it is not within the limit, press the C button while pressing the P button.
Note:
When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper
for fixing speed adjustment" (P/N 65AA-991*).
Otherwise, the fixing line speed cannot be
accurately adjusted.
a.
7. Compare the fixing adjustment density patches

(upper and lower limit samples of density that
9. "Set the cyan density screen"

Setting range: 0 to 255
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the density ges inside
Procedure
the limit.
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.

12. "Push [Sample] and print 8 sheets screen"

Press the [8 SAMPLES] key.

13. With 8 sheets of the fixing adjustment paper
Press the [5. Fixing line speed adjustment] key.
Press the [DENSITY] key.
set to the by-pass tray, press the START button

to output a test pattern.
Note:
6. With the fixing adjustment paper set to the bypass tray, press the START button to output a
test pattern.
Based on a cyan half-tone, a test pattern is
output.
Note:
When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper
for fixing speed adjustment." Otherwise, it
cannot be accurately adjusted.
2-65
Be sure to conduct this operation with the

copy count set to 1.
14. With the image formation line speed variable
automatically at intervals of about 25 seconds,
8 sheets of test patterns based on cyan halftone are output.
15. With a pen, write serial numbers from 1 to 8 on
the output sheets in order of the paper exit
(bottom to top).
II ADJUSTMENT
(5) Fixing line speed adjustment
36 MODE
16. Comparing the output image on the first sheet

with the remaining 7 output sheets, find out an
7.3.2 Timing adjustment

Adjust various timings.
output sheet in which the distance between the

magenta line at the lead edge and the first
black line at the trail edge (10 lines at intervals
of 1 mm) gets 1 mm stretched.
A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT

Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
For the timing adjustment, the following items
are provided:
8050fs1009
[1. Printer lead edge timing adj.]

[2. Printer registration loop adj.]
The image does not stretch gradually for
[3. Printer pre-registration adj.]

[4. Printer erasure amount adj.]
each output sheet. It suddenly stretches at a
[5. Scanner re-start timing adj.]
certain sheet. Therefore, be sure to measure

each sheet in order of output.
[6. RADF registration loop adj.]
Note:
17. Press the C button while pressing the P button.

[7. Writing unit skew initial adj.]

[8. Auto. color registration adj.]
[9. Color registration manual adj.]
Enter the number of the output sheet that

stretches 1 mm through the numeric keys and

"Timing adjustment menu screen."
press the [SET] key.

to
the
"Magnification
adjustment
menu
screen."
2-66
36 MODE
Adjust the lead edge timing.

This adjustment changes the paper restart timing
from the registration roller.
mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Note:
Be sure the printer vertical magnification has
been adjusted.
Note:
Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the
paper feed direction
Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the
Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more
7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
a.
Procedure
8. Set the copy setting according to the item
adjusted and press the START button to output

a test pattern (No. 16).

9. Measure the lead edge timing with a scale.

Standard value: 20 mm 0.5 mm
20

4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] key.
5. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1) screen"
For the printer lead edge timing adjustment,
the following items are provided. Press the
8050fs1010
[NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS

ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want
to adjust.
"Lead edge timing (Tray 1)"
"Lead edge timing (Bypass)"
"Lead edge timing (ADU)"
"Tray large size normal paper offset"
"Tray large size thick paper offset"
"Tray small size normal paper offset"
"Tray small size thick paper offset"
"Bypass large size normal paper offset"
"Bypass large size thick paper offset"
"Bypass small size normal paper offset"
"Bypass small size thick paper offset"
"Large size normal paper offset (ADU)"
"Large size thick paper offset (ADU)"
"Small size normal paper offset (ADU)"
"Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"

11. "Printer lead edge timing screen"
Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.1 mm
12. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is
obtained.
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
2-67
II ADJUSTMENT
(1) Printer lead edge timing adjustment
36 MODE
(2) Printer registration loop adjustment

Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration
roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or

paper jamming in the registration section.

8. Set the copy according to the item that has

been adjusted and press the START button to
a.
output a test pattern (No. 16).
Procedure
9. If the printer registration loop amount is not

appropriate, press the C button while pressing
II ADJUSTMENT

the P button.

10. "Printer registration loop adj. screen"

Press the [2. Printer registration loop adj.] key.
5. "Printer registration loop adjustment screen
(Tray 1)"
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to
adjust.

obtained.
For the printer registration loop adjustment, the

"Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 L)"

"Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 S)"
"Printer registration loop adjustment
(Bypass L)"
"Printer registration loop adjustment
(Bypass S)"
"Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU L)"
"Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU S)"
"Printer registration loop adjustment (Thick)"
Note:
Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the
Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the
Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more
2-68
36 MODE
(3) Printer pre-registration adjustment

Adjust the paper loop amount in each tray and the
ADU pre-registration roller section to remove paper
skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-registration section.

obtained.

(4) Printer erasure amount adjustment
Procedure
Conduct an erasure amount adjustment.


a.
Procedure


Press the [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] key.

5. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen (Tray 1)"
For the printer pre-registration adjustment, the

adjust.
"Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 1)"

"Printer pre-registration adj. (ADU)"

Press the [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] key.
5. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen"

7. Check the printer erasure amount.

Standard value: 3mm or less


9. When the printer pre-registration amount is not
the P button.
9. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen"

10. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen"
obtained.

2-69
II ADJUSTMENT
a.
36 MODE
(5) Scanner re-start timing adjustment
(6) RADF registration loop adjustment
Adjust re-start timing of original scanning.
Adjust the original loop amount in the RADF regis-
In this adjustment, the starting position for reading
tration roller section to remove paper skew and
while in the original scanning mode is adjusted.

wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section.

Note:
II ADJUSTMENT
Make sure that the printer timing adjustment

has been completed.
a.
Procedure

a.
Procedure
Press the [6. RADF registration loop adj.] key.
5. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen"

Press the [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] key.

6. Select the A3 paper and press the START but-
5. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen"
ton with a test chart set to the original glass.

7. If the RADF registration loop amount is not
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
the P button.
8. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen"
7. Check the scanner re-start timing.

Standard value: 3mm or less

Setting range: -7 to +7, 1 step = 0.5mm

9. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen"
obtained.


obtained.
2-70
36 MODE
(7) Writing unit skew initial adjustment
registration auto correction in the user mode.
Store a skew correction position data along the
So, be sure to perform this adjustment when a
main scan of a new write unit (Y, M and C only) in
SC45-20 occurs.
the memory board (MB).

The data is updated automatically by the auto. color
a.
Procedure
registration adjustment.
Note:
36 mode for this adjustment.

3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
a.
Procedure
Press the [8. Auto. color registration adj.] key.

5. "Color registration adj. screen"

Press the [Start] key.
6. The color registration adjustment starts and a
message "Complete" is shown in about 2 minutes.
When the error message appears, perform an
Press the [7. Writing unit skew initial adj.] key.
error correction referring to the below.

5. "Writing unit skew int. adj. screen"
6. Adjustment starts for all the write units Y, M
and C at the same time, and a message "Complete" is shown in about a minute.
(8) Auto. color registration adjustment

Make this adjustment when there is a color registra-
Error 1: It does not converge within the standard value.

The patch density may be too light.
Check around the drum unit and perform the gamma automatic adjustment
(0). Then perform this adjustment.
Error 2: The difference of the color registration
is too much.
Error 3: The other error
SC other than the color registration
automatic adjustment may occur.
Restart the main body in the normal
mode to check for SC code.
tion error. The main scan, sub-scan, horizontal
7. "Color registration adj. screen"

When pressing the [LIST] key, the main scan,
magnification and the skew of color registration
sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the
error are automatically adjusted.

skew of Y, M and C compared based on K after
adjustment are shown.

Note:
This auto. color registration adjustment has a
larger correction area than that of the color
2-71
II ADJUSTMENT
When any of the write units Y, M and C is

replaced, be sure to start the main body in the
36 MODE
(9) Color registration manual adjustment (partial horizontal adjustment)

With respect to the main scan, entire horizontal
magnification, partial horizontal magnification, subscan, inclination and the scan inclination, the registration error amount of Y, M and C compared based
on K is shown on the operation panel. The partial
II ADJUSTMENT
horizontal magnification that cannot be corrected

automatically is manually adjusted.
Place the test pattern [1] outputted securely

against the original positioning plate /L [2] and
the original positioning plate /R [3] to set it to
the original glass, and close the DF or platen
cover.
Note:
When setting the test pattern to the original
Note:
Be sure that the printer vertical and horizontal
magnifications have been complete.
Make sure that the auto. color registration
adjustment has been completed.
a.

START button to output a test pattern.
glass, be sure to take check of the setting

direction and position.
Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C,
K) in the [Test pattern density setting] of 36
mode is set to 255. If not, it results in an
error.
Procedure
[3]
[2]

Press the [9. Color registration manual adj.]
key.
5. "Color registration manual adj. screen"
[1]
8050fs1011

8. "Color registration manual adj. screen"
Press the [SCAN] key to scan the test pattern.
9. The amount of error of the "MainScan" (main
scan), "Mag(ALL)" (entire horizontal magnification), "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnification),
"SubScan"
(sub-scan),
"Incline"
(inclination) and the "ScanBend" (scan incline)

of Y, M and C are compared based on K and
result are shown at "Rest" section on the operation panel (unit is pixel).
2-72
36 MODE
10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the

items.
11. When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan",

"Mag(ALL)" or "Mag(PART)," open the toner
When any item is not within the standard, an
supply section and loosen 2 screws [1] pro-
error code is displayed for each cause together
vided near the developing unit of a color from
with an NG. Make an error correction referring

to the below:
which an "NG" is displayed. Then, slide the

adjustment plate [2] up and down to adjust the
When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan",
partial horizontal magnification. Moving the
"Mag(ALL)", "SubScan" or "Incline," perform
adjustment plate [2] upward reduces the partial
the auto. color registration adjustment again.

Error 1: A chart pattern cannot be detected.
Improper positioning of the chart.
Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is
upside down.
A different type of chart.
Error 4: Adjustment is impossible.
Software bugged.
Error 5: Not within the standard value.
Re-adjust it.
Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality.
Check the installation of memory
board.
Error 7: Memory other than those specified is
accessed.
Software bugged.
Error 8: Memory related error.
Software bugged.
Error 9: Program error.
Software bugged.
Error 10: The chart is skew.
Error 11: Image header information read error.
Software bugged.
Error 12: An argument set error.
Software bugged.
Error 13: A measurement error.
Improper positioning of the chart, or a
defective chart.
horizontal magnification data (minus) and moving the plate downward increases it (plus).
Adjustment target
Move the adjustment plate [2] by referring to the
"Rest" of "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnification) (unit: pixel) displayed at the operation
panel. The scale of the adjustment plate [2]
changes about 0.5 pixel per notch.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1012

to the "Timing adjustment menu screen."
13. Conduct the color registration adjustment
referring to (8) Auto. color registration adjustment.
14. Repeat steps 4 to 13 until "OK" is displayed.
2-73
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.3.3 RADF adjustment

Conduct the original size adjustment, original stop
5. "RADF original size adjustment (A4) or (8.5 x

11) screen"
position adjustment and the sensor adjustment of
With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11
the RADF.
(for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,

press the [Start] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
6. After confirmation of a message "Complete,"

press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.
7. "RADF original size adjustment (A5R) or (5.5 x

8.5R) screen"
With the A5R (for metric machine) or 5.5 x

8.5R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,

Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key.
4. "RADF adjustment menu screen"
For the RADF adjustment, the following items
press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.
are provided:
9. "RADF original size adjustment (A4R) or (8.5 x
[1. RADF original size adjustment]

[2. RADF orig. stop position adj.]
11R) screen"
With the A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R
[3. RADF sensor adjustment]
(for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,


"RADF adjustment menu screen."

press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
11. Make sure that the RADF original size is properly detected.
(1) RADF original size adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when the RADF original
12. Press the C button while pressing P button.
size is not properly detected.
a.
to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."
Procedure

Press the [1. RADF original size adjustment]
key.
2-74
36 MODE
(2) RADF original stop position adjustment

Conduct the original stop position leading edge timing (leading edge timing) adjustment of the RADF.
Note:
Make sure that the printer lead edge timing

can be obtained.
to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
adjustment and the scanner re-start timing

adjustment have been completed.
a.
Conduct this adjustment when malfunction occurs

in the reflective type sensors.
Procedure

a.

Procedure

Press the [2. RADF orig. stop position] key.
5. "Front plain paper/thick paper screen"

For the RADF orig. stop position adj., the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
adjust.
[Normal & Thick paper (Front side)]
[Thin paper (Front side)]
[Normal & Thick paper (Back side)]
[Thin paper (Back side)]

7. With the original setting set to the copy mode
according to an item you want to adjust, set the
test chart to the RADF. And select the A3
paper and press the START button.
8. Check the RADF leading edge timing.
Standard value: 3 mm or less
2-75
Press the [3. RADF sensor adjustment] key.

5. "RADF sensor adjustment screen"
Close the RADF and press the [Start] key.
The sensitivity of the RADF sensors are automatically adjusted.
to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
II ADJUSTMENT
(3) RADF sensor adjustment
36 MODE
7.3.4 Centring adjustment

Adjust the mis-centering of images vertical to the
paper feed direction.
4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen"

Press the [1. Printer centring adjustment] key.
5. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1) screen"
For the printer centering adjustment, the fol-
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
lowing items are provided. Press the [NEXT
adjust.

Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
For the centering adjustment, the following
items are provided:
[1. Printer centring adjustment]
[2. Scanner centring adjustment]
[3. RADF centring adjustment]
"Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
(1) Printer centring adjustment

This adjustment changes the laser writing start timing.
"Printer centring adj. (Tray 1)"

"Printer centring adj. (Bypass)"
"Printer centring adj. (ADU)"
"Large size offset (Tray 1)"
"Small size offset (Tray 1)"
"8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 1)"
"Large size offset (Bypass)"
"Small size offset (Bypass)"
"8.5 x 5.5 offset (Bypass)"
"Large size normal paper offset (ADU)"
"Large size thick paper offset (ADU)"
"Small size normal paper offset (ADU)"
"Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"
"8.5 x 5.5 normal paper offset (ADU)"
"8.5 x 5.5 thick paper offset (ADU)"
Note:
Large size: 300mm or more in length in the
Note:
Be sure that the printer horizontal magnification has been completed.
a.

Small size: 300mm or less in length in the
Thick Paper: 106g/m2 or more
Procedure

7. Select the paper size and the type of paper
according to an item you want to adjust, and
press the START button to output a test pattern

(No. 16).

2-76
36 MODE
8. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed

direction and check the amount of error of the

lines on both sides.

Standard value: Within 2mm




can be obtained.
to the "Centring adjustment mode menu

obtained.
screen."

(2) Scanner centring adjustment
screen."
Adjust the centring when scanning the platen original.

This adjustment changes the reading timing of the
CCD.
Note:
Make sure that the printer centering adjustment has been completed.
a.
Procedure

Press the [2. Scanner centring adjustment]
key.
5. "Scanner (platen) centring adjustment screen"
2-77
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
(3) RADF centring adjustment

Adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF original.
nal glass.
This adjustment changes the reading timing of the

CCD.

Note:
Make sure that the printer centering and scan-
II ADJUSTMENT

ner centring adjustment has been completed.

a.

Procedure


obtained.

screen."
4. "Centring adjustment menu screen"

Press the [3. RADF centring adjustment] key.
5. "RADF centring adjustment (Front) screen"
For the RADF centering adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
adjust.
"RADF centring adjustment (Front)"
"RADF centring adjustment (Back)"
2-78
36 MODE
7.3.5 Non-image area erase check
B. Error message and Handling
When installing the copier or moving its installation
If the error is detected while perform the "non-image
location, check to see if the "non-image area erase"

function of the copy application functions works sat-
area erase check" mode, following error message

will be displayed on the operation panel.
Preparations made in advance:
(1) Error message 1
Open fully the RADF or platen cover.

There should not be anything on the original
glass.
Clean the original glass.
Adjust for Moderate Brightness.

The Non-image area erase function may not oper-
A.
of Service manual.
Procedure
ate correctly with dark (density) originals.

Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns
Handling 1
When the "non-image area erase" function is not

used very frequently, or when copy originals that

have a dark background are not copied very fre-
quently in the "non-image area erase," the copier
Press the [5. Non-image area erase check]

key.
4. "Non-image area erase check screen"
can be used in the current installation location.

However, when copy originals that have a dark
background are frequently copied, install the copier
in a location or in a direction where less external
light get in (darker) than the present installation
5. Make sure that a message "Normal adjustment

selected ..." is shown on the operation panel.
When a message "Does not function satisfactorily ..." is shown, refer to "B. Error message
and Handling," to conduct the non-image area
erase check again.
location, and check the "non-image area erase

check mode" again.
(2) Error message 2
Adjust for Extreme Brightness.
In many case, the non-image area erase function
will not operate correctly.

to the "Image adjustment menu screen."
Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns

of Service manual.
Handling 2
When the "non-image area erase" function is not
used very frequently, the copier can be used in the
current installation location. However, the outsideoriginal erasure function is frequently used, install
the copier in a location or in a direction where less
external light get in (darker) than the present installation location, and check the "non-image area
erase check mode" again. At this time, when there
is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light
installed directly above the copier, reconsider the
installation location or direction, or take some measures to shield the light source and check the "nonimage area erase check mode" again.
2-79
II ADJUSTMENT
isfactorily.
36 MODE

Reset the adjustment values of image adjustment to
the standard data. (factory default data)
Note:
Data for the printer vertical magnification,
II ADJUSTMENT
RADF registration loop, auto. color registration, color registration manual, RADF original
size, RADF original stop position and RADF
sensor adjustment cannot be reset to standard data.
A. Procedure
4. "Recall standard data (image adjustment data)
screen"
Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard data. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Image
adjustment menu screen" without recalling the
standard data.
2-80
7.4
36 MODE
7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment
Conduct various image quality adjustments.
Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner.
A. Procedure
When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usually conduct the printer gamma correction.
When changing the CCD unit, exposure lamp (L1),
original glass or each scanner mirror, conduct this

adjustment.
Note:
Scanner gamma has been adjusted for each
3. "Image quality mode menu screen"

For the image quality adjustment, the following
items are provided:
machine. Please be noted that the scanner

gamma data is rewritten to the mean value if
[1. Scanner gamma adjustment]
the [Adj. data reset] key in the "Scanner
[2. Printer gamma adjustment]
gamma adjustment screen" is pressed.
[3. Sharpness adjustment]

[4. Contrast adjustment]
A. Procedure
[5. Image judge adjustment]

1. After replacing a part, place a test chart on the
[6. ACS adjustment]
original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and
[7. Density adjustment]

[8. Tone adjustment]
press the START button.
2. Check for the foggy background or color balance.

"Image quality mode menu screen."
3. If there is abnormality, enter the 36 mode.

Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
Press the [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] key.
6. "Scanner gamma adjustment screen"
Press the [Adj. data reset] key.
Press the [YES] key when rewriting the scanner gamma mean value. Press the [NO] to
return to the "Scanner gamma adjustment
screen" without rewriting.
to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
2-81
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment
(1) Printer gamma offset adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduc-
When the color reproduction is in poor condition,
tion varies with copy modes to correct the gradation
conduct this adjustment to correct gradation.
in a high light density section and adjust the density

in the background.
A. Procedure
Note:
For the printer gamma offset adjustment,
adjustment methods of 0 to 5 are available for

each screen type. It is possible to divide the
II ADJUSTMENT

gradation in 256 into 6 parts of 0 to 5 and

adjust the entire ranges from "0: Low density

Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key.
section" to "5: High density section."

In default, adjustment is limited only to "0 (low
density section)." When setting DIPSW 28-4 to
4. For the printer gamma adjustment, the following items are provided:
1, adjustment can be made on the entire
[1. Printer gamma offset adj.]

[2. Printer gamma sensor adj.]
ranges of 0 to 5.
a.
[3. Printer screen gradation adj.]
Procedure
from each of adjustment screen to the "Printer
gamma adjustment menu screen."

4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] key.
2-82
36 MODE
5. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0) screen"

For the printer gamma offset adjustment, the
10. "Printer gamma offset adjustment screen"

Press the key of a color (C or K) you want to
adjust, enter a numeric value through the

numeric keys and press the [SET] key.
MENT] key to select an item you want to

adjust.
Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker)
"Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0 to 5)"

"Printer gamma offset adj. (LS150) (0 to 5)"
"Printer gamma offset adj. (DS200) (0 to 5)"
"Printer gamma offset adj. (DS150) (0 to 5)"
"Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-8) (0 to 5)"
"Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-2) (0 to 5)"
The following shows the copy mode to which
each adjustment is reflected.
Note:
There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3]
provided for each line speed. Be sure to use
the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered
by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into
keys [1/2] and [1/3].
obtained.
(LS200): Line screen/High resolution

(LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone
12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1]
(DS200): Dot screen/High resolution

(DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone
created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray
(ED-8): Text section to be used together with

the screens above.
balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is

the same.
(ED-2): High compression

Y
M
C
K
7. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray

and press the START button to print a test pat-
[1]
tern.
[6]
8. Check the test pattern that has been outputted.
Make sure that the high light density starting
section of C and K is uniform, and even
between the gray reference lines [1].
[1]
Y
M
C
K
8050fs1015
9. When they are not even, press the C button

while pressing the P button.
2-83
[5] [4] [2]
[3]
8050fs1016
II ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
36 MODE
13. When the gray balance is not the same, press

the key of a color (Y or M) you want to adjust,
enter a numeric value through the numeric
When a poor color reproduction results even after

the automatic gamma adjustment, conduct this
adjustment to correct gradation.
The printer gamma correction that is carried out
automatically and periodically uses a gamma sen-
Note:
II ADJUSTMENT
(2) Printer gamma sensor adjustment
sor to read patterns on the transfer belt. So, there is
There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3]

provided for each line speed. Be sure to use
a possibility of the gamma sensor not being accurately adjusted due to the change in characteristic
the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered
of the gamma sensor. This adjustment use the
by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into
scanner to correct the gamma sensor for accurate
keys [1/2] and [1/3].
printer gamma adjustment.

How to match the gray balance

Take notice of the gray patches [4] made up of
49 colors of C, M and Y. In the 49 patches, M
gets darker as going right to left. And Y gets
darker as going down from up. However, C is
fixed. The patch [5] at the center is the same
color as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positioned
at the four corners of the patch [5] is the same
color as the gray [3]. Out of the 49 patches,
select a gray of the same gray balance as the
gray [6].
e.g.) When a patch on the lower right side is
more suitable than the patch [5] at the center:
Adjust M and Y in the positive direction.
When a patch on the upper left side is more
suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust
M and Y in the negative direction.
15. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray
and press the START button to print a test pattern.
16. Repeat steps 13 to 15 until you can get a satisfactory result.
to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu
screen."
2-84

a.
Procedure

Press the [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] key.
36 MODE
5. "Printer gamma sensor adj. (LS200) screen"

For the printer gamma sensor adjustment, the
8. "Please load output paper ... screen"

After completion of the test pattern output, the
display returns automatically to the adjustment
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-
scren.
MENT] key to select an item you want to

adjust.
The outputted test pattern [1] pressed securely

against the original positioning plate /L [3] and
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS200)"

"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS150)"
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS200)"
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS150)"
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment
(CONTONE)"
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (ED)"
The following shows the copy mode to which
each adjustment is reflected:
(LS200): Line screen/High resolution
(LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone
(DS200): Dot screen/High resolution
(DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone
(CONTONE): Text section to be used together
the original positioning plate /R [4], set it to the
with the screens above.
original glass.
Note:
Put the green triangular mark [2] on the left
side.
[3]
[4]
[2]
(ED): High compression

Note:
A screen in which the screen selection is
turned off by the key operator mode-memory
[1]
switch is not displayed.

8050fs1017
9. With 10 sheets of copy paper (white) placed on
7. With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11

(for inch machine) paper set in the by-pass
tray, press the START button to output a test
the test chart, close the RADF or platen cover.

Note:
Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise,
pattern.
the printer gradation cannot be corrected

properly.
10. Press the [Start] key.
Note:
Start cannot be made when paper is not set
in the by-pass tray.
11. When the chart is scanned with no problem
found, the gamma sensor is adjusted, the
printer gamma correction is made and a message "Complete" is displayed.
2-85
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
12. If any trouble should be found, an error code is

displayed for each cause. Repair the error

screen."
II ADJUSTMENT
referring to the below.

Error 1: Improper positioning of the chart.
Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is
upside down.
A different type of chart.
Error 4: Adjustment is impossible.
Software bugged.
Error 5: Not within the standard value.
Re-adjust it.
Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality.
Check the installation of memory
board.
Error 7: Memory other than those specified is
accessed.
Software bugged.
Error 8: Memory related error.
Software bugged.
Error 9: Program errorSoftware bugged.
Error 10: The chart is skew.
Error 11: Image header information read error.
Software bugged.
Error 12: RGB data abnormality.
Chart is wrong, or software is bugged.
Error 13: Argument set error.
Software bugged.
Error 31: Sensor value abnormality - Re-adjust
it.
Error 51: Regression calculation abnormality Re-adjust it.
Error 52: Array number overflow - Software
bugged.
Error 53: Regression order abnormality - Software bugged.
Error 54: Selected screen information abnormality - Software bugged.
Error 55: Color information abnormality - Software bugged.
(3) Printer screen gradation adjustment

Adjust a tone jump (in which gradation is not continuous).
a.
Procedure

3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen"
Press the [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] key.
5. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y) screen"
For the printer screen gradation adjustment,
the following items are provided.
"Printer screen gradation adj. (Y)"
"Printer screen gradation adj. (M)"
"Printer screen gradation adj. (C)"
"Printer screen gradation adj. (K)"
7. Set the A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray
and press the START button to output a test
pattern.
8. Five sheets of test pattern are automatically
outputted. Check them to see if there is a tone
jump found in them.
13. "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen"

Press the [Adj. data reset] key if you want to
return to the factory default data.
Press the [YES] key to reset the adjusted
printer gamma sensor data and return to the
factory default data.
Press the [NO] key to return to the "Printer
gamma sensor adj. screen" without data reset.
2-86
9. When a tone jump is found in them, press the

C button while pressing the P button.
10. "Printer screen gradation adj."
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a color in
which a tone jump has occurred.
36 MODE
7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment
Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is car-
Setting range: -3 to +1
ried out when moire reproduced.
12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the tone jump disap-
Use this adjustment for changing the center value

for the sharpness adjustment in the user mode.
pears.
screen."
A. Procedure
Press the [3. Sharpness adjustment] key.
4. "Sharpness adjustment menu screen"
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/
more moire)
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable.
2-87
II ADJUSTMENT
11. Enter one less numeric value than the current

and press the [SET] key.
36 MODE
7.4.4 Contrast adjustment
7.4.5 Image judge adjustment
Adjust the contrast.
Adjust the threshold value of the original image
judgement.
for the contrast adjustment in the user mode.

A. Procedure
A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT



Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.

Press the [4. Contrast adjustment] key.
4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen"

For the image judge adjustment, the following
4. "Contrast adjustment menu screen"
items are provided:
[1. Dot detect adjustment]

[2. Color text adjustment]

[3. Dot/Text area adjustment]

"Image judge adjustment mode menu screen."
Setting range: -5 (contrast increased) to +5

(contrast reduced)
(1) Dot detect adjustment

Adjust the dot discrimination threshold value of the

original image.
a.
Procedure

4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Dot detect adjustment] key.
5. "Dot detect adjustment R screen"
2-88
36 MODE

(2) Color text adjustment

Adjust the color text discrimination threshold value
of the original image.
for the color text adjustment in the user mode.
7. A dot detection pattern is outputted.

This output pattern shows how the original
a.
Procedure


9. "Dot detect adjustment R screen"
For the dot detection adjustment, the following

4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen"
items are provided:

[Dot detect adjustment R]
Press the [2. Color text adjustment] key.
[Dot detect adjustment G]
5. "Color text screen"

[Dot detect adjustment B]

10. Select a color you want to adjust as necessary,
keys, and press the [SET] key.
Setting range: -5 (dot area reduced) to +5 (dot
area increased)

7. A color text detection pattern is outputted.
image is discriminated as an image.

to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu
screen."
Black section: Discriminated as a black text.

Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.
9. "Color text screen"
Setting range: -5 (color text area reduced) to +5
(color text area increased)
to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
2-89
II ADJUSTMENT

Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot.
White section: Discriminated as a picture.
36 MODE
(3) Dot/Text area adjustment
7.4.6 ACS adjustment
Adjust the dot discrimination and text discrimination

Conduct this adjustment when the ACS (Auto color
threshold values of the original image.

for the letter adjustment in the user mode.
selection) does not function properly.

A. Procedure
a.
Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT


3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen"

Press the [6. ACS adjustment] key.

4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen"
4. "Set the chart and push [SCAN] screen"

With an original in which the ACS does not
function properly set to the original glass,
Press the [3. Dot/Text adjustment] key.
press the [SCAN] key.

5. "Dot/Text adjustment screen"
5. In the "JUDGE," the result of the ACS is shown

as "COLOR" or "MONOCHROME."
6. Select the A3 paper and press the START but6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
ton with a test chart set to the original glass.

7. A dot and text detection pattern is outputted.
Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot.

White section: Discriminated as a picture.

9. "Dot/Text area adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (dot area and text area
increased) to +5 (dot area increased and text
area reduced)
to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
2-90
Setting range: -5 (MONOCHROME) to +5

(COLOR)
36 MODE
7.4.7 Density adjustment
6. A numeric value is shown in the "RESULT."
Adjust the AE (AES) density, copy density and the

background density.
7. When the adjustment result is other than 0,

keys and press the [SET] key (e.g.: if the
A. Procedure
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the adjustment result

becomes 0.
to the "Density adjustment mode menu
Press the [7. Density adjustment] key.
screen."
4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen"
For the density adjustment, the following items
are provided:
[1. AE (AES) adjustment]
(2) Copy density adjustment
[2. Copy density adjustment]

[3. Background adjustment]
Adjust the copy density.

for the density shift function in the user mode.

a.
Procedure
"Density adjustment mode menu screen."

(1) AE (AES) adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when you want to change
the center value selected by the AE (Auto density
selection) in the user mode.

Press the [2. Copy density adjustment] key.
a.
Procedure
5. "Copy density adjustment screen"
For the copy density adjustment, the following
items are provided. Press the arrow key to

select an item you want to adjust.

Press the [1. AE (AES) adjustment] key.
5. With a chart in which you want to change the
AE density set to the original glass, press the
[SCAN] key.
2-91
"Text/Photo (Full color)"

"Photo (Full color)"
"Text (Full color)"
"Map (Full color)"
"Text/Photo (Mono color)"
"Photo (Mono color)"
"Text (Mono color)"
"Map (Mono color)"
"Text/Photo (Monochrome)"
"Photo (Monochrome)"
"Text (Monochrome)"
"Map (Monochrome)"
II ADJUSTMENT
adjustment result is 2, input -2).

Setting range: -5 to +5
36 MODE

a.

7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then
select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test
Procedure

chart set to the original glass, press the START
button.
II ADJUSTMENT



Press the [3. Background adjustment] key.

5. "Background adjustment screen"
For the background adjustment, the following
items are provided. Press the arrow key to

select an item you want to adjust.

screen."
(3) Background adjustment

Adjust the copy background density.
The background adjustment in the user mode only
supports the batch adjustment. It is not possible to
adjust the background for each color mode or original mode.
"Text/Photo (Full color)"

"Photo (Full color)"
"Text (Full color)"
"Map (Full color)"
"Text/Photo (Mono color)"
"Photo (Mono color)"
"Text (Mono color)"
"Map (Mono color)"
"Text/Photo (Monochrome)"
"Photo (Monochrome)"
"Text (Monochrome)"
"Map (Monochrome)"

7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then
select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test
chart set to the original glass, press the START
button.
screen."
2-92
36 MODE
7.4.8 Tone adjustment

Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue.


for the tone adjustment in the user mode.
A. Procedure


Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.
to
the
"Image
quality
adjustment
menu
screen."
4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen"

For the tone adjustment, the following items
are provided:
[1. Red adjustment]
[2. Green adjustment]
(2) Green adjustment

Adjust the density of green.
a.
[3. Blue adjustment]
Procedure

"Image quality mode menu screen."

(1) Red adjustment

Adjust the density of red.
Press the [2. Green adjustment] key.
This adjustment is not reflected to the IP.

a.
Procedure

nal glass.




Press the [1. Red adjustment] key.
2-93
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
(3) Blue adjustment
Adjust the density of blue.

Reset the adjustment values of image quality
a.
adjustment to the standard data. (factory default
Procedure
data)
Note:
Data for the scanner gamma adjustment and
II ADJUSTMENT
the printer gamma sensor adjustment cannot

be reset to standard data.

A. Procedure
Press the [3. Blue adjustment] key.



nal glass.
4. "Recall standard data: Image quality adj.

screen"

Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard date. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVI-
OUS SCREEN] key returns to the [Image

quality mode menu screen] without recalling
the standard data.

2-94
7.5
36 MODE
Running test mode
7.5.1 Setting method
Conduct a test while in the continuous copy opera-
A. Procedure
tion.
Select [4. Running test mode] in the 36 mode menu
screen to show the running mode menu screen.
For this adjustment, the following items can be
selected:
A. Intermittent copy mode

Press the [4. Running test mode] key.
Press the mode key of one of the modes 1 to 5.
After completion of the copy operation for the set

copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready
state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the
same operation.
4. "Basic screen"
5. After confirmation of the copy operation, press
the STOP button and turn OFF the main switch
B. Paperless running mode

Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation
is made nearly at the same timing as the normal
copy operation. In the same manner as the intermittent copy mode, after completion of the copy operation for the set copy count, the copier changes into
the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before
resuming the same operation.
C. Paperless mode
Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation
is made nearly at the same timing as the normal
copy operation.
D. Paperless endless mode
The copier operates with the copy count infinitely
set automatically. In the same manner as the paperless mode, without detecting paper or jam, the copy
operation is made nearly at the same timing as the
normal copy operation.
E. Running mode
The copy operation is made in the paperless endless mode plus the scanner each-time scan and the
auto paper feed tray switching.
2-95
(SW2).
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Running test mode menu screen"
36 MODE
7.6
Output various test patterns to separate abnormalities. Select [5. Test pattern output mode] in the 36
mode screen to show "Test pattern output mode
screen."
II ADJUSTMENT
Note:
As for modes specifically not given in the
SHB, be sure not to output test patterns.
A. Procedure
Press the [5. Test pattern output mode] key.
3. "Test pattern output mode screen"
After entering an output pattern number
through the numeric keys, press the [SET] key.
5. "Basic screen"
Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the
START button to output a test pattern.
6. When outputting another test pattern, repeat
steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with
the P button being pressed at the same time.
7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to
the "36 mode menu screen."
2-96
36 MODE
[Check Items]
When the density is set to 70 (halftone)
When there are image stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit and transfer belt unit.
When the density is set to 0 (white)
When there is image foggy back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact.
When the density is set at 255 (Y, M, C, K)
When the density is light, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended check point]: Write unit
* For information about setting the density, see "7.7 Test pattern density setting."
Test Pattern
When the density is set to 70
8050fs1019
2-97
II ADJUSTMENT
No.1 Overall halftone
36 MODE
No.11 Beam check
II ADJUSTMENT
[Check Items 1]
For development and analysis of the write unit
[Check Items 2]
Check the solid black pattern [1] to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and subscanning directions.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, transfer belt unit, and 2nd transfer unit
[Check Items 3]
Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern [2] at the leading/trailing edge of the
test pattern in the feed direction.
[Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit
Test Pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1020
[1] Solid black pattern
[2] Gradation pattern
2-98
36 MODE
No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern
Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, skew, and leading
edge timing, etc. of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible
on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test Pattern
[1]
30mm
20mm
237mm
205.7mm
28
0m
190mm
[1]
190mm
0m
28
190mm
[1] Edge of paper
2-99
8050fs1021
II ADJUSTMENT
[Check Items]
36 MODE
II ADJUSTMENT
7.7
7.8
Finisher adjustment
Set the density of the test pattern.
Adjusting the FNS, PI, PK, TU.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure

Press the [6. Test pattern density setting] key.
2. "36 menu screen"

Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
3. "Test pattern density setting-Y screen"
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PRE-
[1. Stitch & Fold stopper adj.]
VIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select one of

the colors: "Y, M, C and K" that you want to
[2. Fold stopper adjustment]

[3. Cover sheet tray size adj.]
adjust.
[4. Trimming stopper adjustment]

[5. Punch adjustment]

[6. Three-Fold position adj.]

[7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.]
Setting range: 0 (lighter) to 255 (darker)

6. "Basic screen"
from each of the adjustment screen to the "Fin-
Select the paper size and press the START

button to output a test pattern.
7. When outputting another test pattern, repeat
steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with
the P button being pressed at the same time.
8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to
the "36 mode menu screen."
2-100
isher adjustment mode menu screen."
36 MODE
7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FN-9
7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only)
only)
Adjusting the fold position when stitch and fold or
Adjusting the stapling position when stitch and fold
folding mode.
mode.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure

Press the [1. Stitch and Fold stopper adj.] key.
Press the [2. Fold stopper adjustment] key.

4. "Fold stopper adjustment (A3) screen"
4. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. (A3) screen"

5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF,

and press the START button.

6. Check the paper center and folding position.
6. Check the paper center and stapling position.
Standard value: 1mm
Standard value: 1mm


8. "Fold stopper adjustment screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
8. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. screen"

OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired

paper size.
paper size.



obtained.
to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu
screen."
2-101
obtained.
screen."
II ADJUSTMENT

36 MODE
7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (Cover
7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only)
Inserter D only)
Adjusting the trimming amount.
This adjustment should be performed when the
II ADJUSTMENT
cover sheet tray size cannot be detected properly

and when centring adjustment for cover sheet tray
A. Procedure
is performed.
A. Procedure


Press the [4. Trimming stopper adjustment]

key.
4. "Trimming stopper adjustment (A3) screen"

Press the [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] key.
4. Set a A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R
(for inch machine) paper on the cover sheet
tray (upper/lower) [1] and press the [Start] key.
A complete message appears on the screen.
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF

6. Check the trimming amount.
Standard value: 2.5 to 4.5 mm
Note:
Setting a trimming amount of 2.5mm or
[1]
less may cause a trimming error.

8. "Trimming stopper adjustment screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
paper size.
8050fs1022

to the "Finisher adjustment menu screen."

obtained.
to the "Finisher adjustment menu mode
screen."
2-102
36 MODE
(1) Punch kit vertical position adjustment (PK-5
7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-5 only)
only)
This adjusts the punch vertical positions, punch hor-
Adjusting the punch vertical position.
izontal positions, and punch registration loop

amount.
a.
Procedure
A. Procedure

Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key.

3. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen"

Punch adjustment includes the following items:

Press the [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] key.
[1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.]

[2. Punch kit horizontal pos. adj.]
[5. Punch registration loop adj.]
5. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. (A3) screen"


each adjustment screen to the "Finisher

7. Check the punch vertical position.
adjustment mode menu screen."

8. When the value is not appropriate, press the C
button while pressing down the P button.
9. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. screen"
paper size.
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the value is appropriate.
to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
2-103
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
(2) Punch kit horizontal position adjustment

(PK-5 only)
(3) Punch registration loop adjustment

Adjusting the registration loop amount for the
Adjusting the punch horizontal position.
reversed paper exit, the ADU paper exit (straight

exit) and cover sheet upper/lower.
a.
Procedure
a.
Procedure

II ADJUSTMENT


Press the [2. Punch kit Horizontal pos. adj.]

Press the [5. Punch registration loop adj.] key.
key.
5. Press [1. Punch registration loop adj. (main
5. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen"
body)] key. or [2. Punch registration loop adj.

(PI)] key.

6. "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen"

7. Check the position of punch holes.
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select the item to
Specification (Length between the edge of

paper and the center of punch hole): 10.5mm
(2 holes/4 holes/swedish 4 holes), 9.5mm (3
holes/inch 2 holes)
9. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen"
paper size.
be adjusted.
The screen changes as follows; reverse
ADU or upper tray lower tray.
8. Press the START button to make a copy.
9. Check the punch registration loop amount.
10. When the value is not appropriate, press the C

11. "Punch registration loop adj. screen"

11. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the value is obtained.

to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."

12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the value is appropriate.
to the "Punch registration loop adj. menu
screen."
2-104
36 MODE
7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FN-9 only)

Adjusting the folding positions during the three-
8. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"

folded copy.
paper size.
a.
Procedure

obtained.
Note:
See "9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS" to adjust
Press the [6. Three-fold position adj.] key.
the folded positions "b" and "c."
4. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"


6. Check the three-folded position "a."
c
a
8050fs1023
Folded
positions
Standard value
Specification
A4R
8.5 x 11R
95 mm
89.4 mm
2 mm
101 mm
95 mm
2 mm
101 mm
95 mm
2 mm

2-105

screen."
II ADJUSTMENT
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment
7.9
List output mode
Adjusting the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
Output a variety of data.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure


Press the [8. List output mode] key.
3. "List output mode menu screen"
Press the [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] key.
List output mode items are as follows:

[1. Machine management list 1]
[2. Adjustment data list]
4. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen"

[3. Page fill data list]

[4. Machine management list 2]

[5. Parameter list]
[6. Memory dump list]
[7. Font pattern]
6. Check the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
Note:
Setting DPSW 30-1 to 1, [4. Machine management list 2] and later appear.
4. Press the key of an item you want to output.
5. Select A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper and press the

START button.
8050fs1024
7. When changing the dimension A, press the C


to the "36 mode menu screen."
8. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen"

Enter a value with numeric keys and press the
[SET] key.
Setting range: 120 to 160, 1 step: 1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the dimension A is
appropriate.
screen."
2-106
47 MODE
8. 47 MODE
47 mode/multi mode setting
method
A. 47 Mode
5. Input check result will appear in the input

check result display area.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to perform the other signal
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/

output check function) to check and adjust the various signals and loads.
See "8.5 Input check list".
Follow the following procedure.
(1) Starting 47 mode

a. Turn off the main switch (SW2).
c.
*1
(3) Output check method
B. Operation method for 47 mode
b.
input check.
a.
Procedure
Turn on the SW2 while holding down 4 and 7

of the numeric keys.
The 47 mode is activated if the moment "I/O

check mode" is displayed in the message

Enter the output check code with the numeric
display area at the center of the screen.
keys. *2
"47 mode menu screen"
3. Press the P button when using the multi mode.

4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.* 2
5. Press the [Start] key to perform the output
check.
6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output
[2]
[1] [3]
check.
[4]
[1]
Input/Output check code
[2]
[3]
Multi code
Input check
[4]
Output check
8050fs1001
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check other signal output check.

*2
(4) Exiting from the 47 mode

Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
(2) Input check method

Follow the following procedure.
a.
See "8.6 Output check list".
Procedure

Enter the input check code with the numeric
keys. *1
3. Press the P button when using the multi mode.
4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys. *1
2-107
II ADJUSTMENT
8.1
47 MODE
II ADJUSTMENT
8.2
Adjustment data display
8.3
Hard disk check
Lists the adjustment values of the machine (factory-
Perform this operation if you want to check the HDD
set values and current values).
total capacity, the HDD remaining capacity, and the
No adjustment value can be changed in this mode.
error code related to HDD.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
Press "94" with the numeric keys. Check that
Press "99" with the numeric keys. Check that
"94-00" appears in the message display area.
"99-00" appears in the message display area.
3. Press the P button.
4. Press the [STOP] key at the lower right corner
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric

keys. Check that "99-xx" (xx represents the
of the screen.
input number) appears in the message display

5. Turn off the main switch (SW2) to exit from the
47 mode.
area.
01: HDD total capacity check
02: HDD remaining capacity check
Note:
03: HDD bad sectors check and recovery
Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.

At checking the total capacity: the total capacity is displayed
At checking the remaining capacity: the
remaining capacity is displayed
At checking and recovering the bad sectors:
During the operation-"NOW" appears
The operation succeeded-"OK" appears
The operation failed-"NG" appears
Press the [Start] key to perform the HDD bad
sectors check and recovery again when "NG"
appears.
6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output
check.
7. Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
Note:
The operation can not be canceled during the
HDD bad sectors check and recovery (the
[STOP] button or the [Change Mode] key are
disabled).
The hard disk is vulnerable to vibrations and
physical shocks. Be sure to remove the hard
disk when you move the main body.
2-108
Input check list
Classification Symbol Code
Multi
Name
code
High voltage, TEMP/
analog signal HUM
TEMP/
00
TDB
TLD Y
01
TLD M
001
Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside

humidity)
Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside

temperature)
3
4
Temp detection board

Remaining toner detection sensor /Y
Remaining toner detection sensor /M
HUM
Remaining toner detection sensor /C
TLD K
PS53
7
8
Remaining toner detection sensor /K

Waste toner door sensor
PS52
Waste toner full sensor
High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y)
1
2
High voltage unit /1 (charging /M)

High voltage unit /1 (charging /C)
High voltage unit /1 (charging /K)
5
6

HV2
02
03
04
PS11
05
Box
No box
FULL
EMPTY
Abnormal
Normal
Abnormal
Normal
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y)

High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) One or more

High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) color is
abnormal
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K)
Normal
Abnormal
Normal
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y)
9
10
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M)

High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C)
11
12
0
1
High voltage unit/2 (separation)

Abnormal
Normal
Gamma sensor
Gamma sensor
0
1
Drum potential sensor /Y

Drum potential sensor /M
DRPS C
Drum potential sensor /C
DRPS K
Drum potential sensor /K
06
0 to 255
Toner
No toner
6
DRPS Y
DRPS M
1
2
5
6
HV2
000
0 to 255
TLD C
HV1
Display and signal source
2-109
0 to 255
II ADJUSTMENT
8.4
47 MODE
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
High voltage,
analog signal

001
000
High voltage unit /2 (guide plate)
Abnormal
Normal
High voltage unit/2 (2nd transfer)
Abnormal
Normal
4
0
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y)
Abnormal
Normal
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M)
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C)
3
0
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K)

No paper sensor /1
Paper
No paper
PS37
No paper sensor /2
PS43
No paper sensor /3
PS47
PS108
3
4
No paper sensor /BP

No paper sensor (C-208)
Paper
No paper
HV2
07
4
5
6
7
HV2
08
0
1
2
II ADJUSTMENT
3
HV1
Paper feed,
conveyance
PS31
PS32
09
11
Remaining paper sensor /1
PS38
12
PS44
PS102 to
2
3

Remaining paper sensor /1 to /4 (C-208)
Paper size /S1
PS34
PS39
1
2
Paper size /L1

Paper size /S2
PS40
Paper size /L2
PS45
Paper size /S3
PS46
PS48
5
6
Paper size /L3

Paper size /SBP
PS49
Paper size /LBP
0 to 7
105
PS33
VR1
13
Paper sizeVR /1
VR2
VR3
1
2
Paper sizeVR /2
Paper sizeVR /3
VR4
Paper sizeVR /BP
PS30
14
No paper
0 to 255
Tray upper limit sensor /1
PS36
PS42
1
2

PS25
Tray upper limit sensor /BP
PS109
Upper limit sensor (C-208)
Upper:1, lower:2,
middle:0
0
1
Tray set detection /1

Yes
16
Paper
17
2-110
Upper limit Not at upper

limit
No

Multi
Name
code
Paper feed,
conveyance
PS29
PS35
19
0
1
Pre-registration sensor /1
PS41
PS26
By-pass conveyance sensor
PS106
PS107
4
0
Feed sensor (C-208)

Paper feed sensor (C-208)
PS23
ADU pre-registration sensor
PS20
ADU conveyance sensor
PS27
PS28
3
4
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1

20

001
000
Paper
No paper
Paper
No paper
PS22
Registration sensor
PS50
PS13
7
8
Vertical conveyance sensor

Paper exit sensor
PS19
Reverse paper exit sensor
PS21
10
ADU paper reverse sensor
PS12
11
Paper exit full sensor
PS36
PS41
PS25
3
4
PS101,
PS109
Lower limit sensor (C-208)

Upper limit sensor (C-208)
Upper limit:1, lower

limit:2, middle:0
2nd transfer HP sensor
Home
position
Other than
home position
Open
Close
PS30
23
PS24
24
PS18
25
0
1
Paper
No paper
Full
Other than
full
Upper limit Other than
upper limit
2
0
Front door open/close sensor
PS51
Vertical conveyance door open/close sensor
PS54
PS14
2
3
Toner supply door open/close sensor

Toner supply unit open/close sensor
Fixing unit set detection
Installed
Not installed
PS100
Top cover open/close sensor1 (C-208)
Open
Close
PS115
SW100
6
7
Front door open/close sensor (C-208)

Tray down switch (C-208)
ON
OFF
Paper feed motor
Abnormal
Normal
M41
28
2-111
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
Light
PS1
30
PS3
Scanner HP sensor
APS detection sensor /S
PS4
APS detection sensor /L
PS2
APS timing sensor
Polygon motor /Y
(abnormal rotation detection)
Polygon motor /M
Polygon motor /C
Polygon motor /K
Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K
M3
II ADJUSTMENT
32
M4
M5
M6
M3, M4,
M5, M6

001
000
Home
position
Paper
Other than
home position
No paper
OPEN
CLOSE
Abnormal
Normal
One or more
colors are
abnormal
Normal
Abnormal
Normal
One or more
colors are
abnormal
Abnormal
Normal
M3
Polygon motor /Y
(abnormal temperature detection)
M4
Polygon motor /M
M5
Polygon motor /C
M6
Polygon motor /K
M3, M4,
M5, M6
Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K

Index sensor /Y
INDX SB
Index sensor /M
M
INDX SB
Index sensor /C
INDX SB
Index sensor /K
B
INDX SB
Index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K
Y, M, C,
One or more
colors are
abnormal
Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C
PS5
Laser correction HP sensor /Y
PS6
Laser correction HP sensor /M
Edge
Edge
detected undetected
from one or
more color
Edge
Edge
detected undetected
PS7
Laser correction HP sensor /C
INDX SB
33
Normal
K
PS5,
PS6,
35
PS7
2-112
Normal

Multi
Name
code
Light
PS5,
PS6,
35
001
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS5,
PS6,
PS7
PS7
000
Edge
Edge
detected undetected
from one or
more color
Edge
Edge
detected undetected
Edge
Edge
detected undetected
from one or
more color
Edge
Edge
detected undetected
PS5
PS6
10
11
3
4
Color registration sensor /F

Color registration sensor /R
0 to 255
0 to 255
PS7
Main body
PS8
PS9
36
LDB Y
37
Laser drive board /Y
LDB M
Laser drive board /M
LDB C
LDB K
3
4
Laser drive board /C

Laser drive board /K
Scanner HP sensor
Encoder sensor /Y1, /Y2
PS1
38
PS60,
41
PS61
1
2
PS62,
PS63
PS64,
5
6
PS65
Home
position
Other than
home position
Abnormal
Normal
Home
position
Other than
home position
Encoder sensor /M1, /M2
Encoder sensor /C1, /C2
8
PS66,
PS67
9
10
Encoder sensor /K1, /K2
11
PS69,
12
PS68
13
14
PS15
15
Encoder sensor /belt 1, /belt 2
1st transfer HP sensor
16
17
18
2-113
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
Main body
M2
M42
42
M10
0
2
Scanner cooling fan

DCPS cooling fan
Fixing cooling fan /1
M48
Charger intake fan
M47
M43,
5
6
Drum unit fan

Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan
/1, /2
M46
M24
IP cooling fan
M28,
Paper exit fan /F, /M, /R
Drum cooling fan /1, /2
10
Transfer belt cooling fan
11
0
ICP cooling fan

DC power supply unit /1 (12VDC)
II ADJUSTMENT
M44,

001
000
Abnormal
Normal
Abnormal
Normal
M45,
M27,
M26
M12,
M13
M11
M25
DCPS1
43
DCPS2
3
4

C (T)
Total counter
Yes
No
C (K)
Checking to see if the key counterequipped machine is provided with a key

counter or not.
Yes
No
TH1
Fixing temperature sensor /1
TH3
TH2
1
2

TH4
TH1
TH1
TH2
5
6

TH1 correction temperature
9
0

Fixing motor
M29
45
47
0 to 255
Abnormal
Normal
Home
position
Other than
home position
Abnormal
Normal
1
2
PS16
3
4
Fixing pressure release sensor
5
M29
Fixing motor
10
11
2-114

47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
Main body
PS15
48
0
1
1st transfer HP sensor

001
000
Home
position
Other than
home position
2
3
49
50
Printer control board (drum motor control)

Developing motor /Y
Displays abnormal code

Abnormal
Normal
1
2
M21
3
4
M22
II ADJUSTMENT
Intrinsic
functions
PRCB
M20
Developing motor /M
5
Developing motor /C
7
8
M23
Developing motor /K
10
11
12
TDS Y
Toner density sensor /Y
TDS M
13
Toner density sensor /M
TDS C
14
Toner density sensor /C
15
4
Toner density sensor /K

Pre-charging lamp /Y
PCL M
Pre-charging lamp /M
PCL C
Pre-charging lamp /C
PCL K
TDS Y
7
0
Pre-charging lamp /K
TDS K
PCL Y
51
54
0 to 255
Abnormal
Normal
0 to 255
1
2
TDS M
3
4
5
TDS C
7
8
TDS K
10
11
0
FN-120, FN-9
C-208
AFR-20
0
1

TDS Y
TDS M
57
58
TDS C
TDS K
2-115
Connected
Unconnected
0 to 255
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
II ADJUSTMENT
Intrinsic
functions
AFR-20
PS17
59
PS304
60
001
000
Fixing paper exit sensor
Paper
No paper
Paper
No paper
Open
Close
Paper
No paper
No paper sensor
PS301
Registration sensor
PS302
Timing sensor
PS305
PS306
4
5
Reverse sensor
Paper exit sensor
PS303
Paper feed cover sensor
PS308
Paper feed tray sensor
PS307
RS1
8
9
Paper exit cover sensor

AFR-20 open/close sensor
Sub-tray paper exit sensor
76
FN-120,
PS701
FN-9
PS702
Tray upper limit sensor

upper limit
PS703
Tray lower limit sensor
PS704
FNS entrance sensor
Lower limit Other than

lower limit
No paper
Paper
PS705
Stacker entrance sensor
PS706
Main tray paper exit sensor
PS707
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
PS708
Alignment HP sensor /U
PS709
Paper exit belt HP sensor
Other than
home position
Home
position
Home
position
Other than
home position
PS713
Stapler rotation HP sensor
PS711
10
Stapler movement HP sensor
PS712
11
Paper exit opening HP sensor
PS714
12
Clincher rotation HP sensor
PS715
13
Counter reset sensor
PS718
14
Shift HP sensor
PS720
SW702
15
16
Stacker no paper sensor

Staple switch /R
PS730
17
SW701
18
Paper
No paper
Other than Standby

standby
position
position
Home
Other than
position home position
Other than
Close
close posiposition
tion
Home
Other than
position home position
Paper
No paper
Other than
home position
Home
position
Paper
No staple
No paper
Staple
Stapler HP sensor /R
Other than
home position
Home
position
Cartridge switch /R
No cartridge Cartridge
2-116

Multi
Name
code
FN-120,
FN-9
M710
76
19
Clincher motor /R

001
000
Other than
start
Start
Other than
home position
Home
position
20
PS732
21
Clincher HP sensor /R
PS719
22
Sub-tray full sensor
Full
Other than
full
MS701
23
FNS interlock switch
SW704
24
Staple switch /F
Front door
opened
No staple
Front door
closed
Staple
PS731
25
Stapler HP sensor /F
Other than
home position
Home
position
No cartridge Cartridge
SW703
26
Cartridge switch /F
M715
27
Clincher motor /F
Other than
start
Start
28
PS733
29
Clincher HP sensor /F
Other than
home position
Home
position
M707
30
Paper exit roller motor lock detection
Other than
control
speed
Control
speed
31
FNS connection detection
Connected
PS722
32
Folding knife HP sensor
PS723
33
Stopper HP sensor
Unconnected
Other than
home position
PS724
34
Alignment HP sensor /L
PS725
35
Folding exit sensor
PS726
PS729
36
37
Folding passage sensor

Folding full sensor
38
M720
39
Folding conveyance motor
40
41
Home
position
Other than
home position
Home
position
Paper
No paper
Full
Other than
full
Other than
control
speed
Control
speed
42
43
2-117
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
II ADJUSTMENT
Cover
Inserter D
FN-120,
FN-9
Cover
Inserter D
M203
76

001
000
44
PI conveyance motor
45
DIPSW0
46
47
48
49
50
51
PS201
PS206
52
53
PI passage sensor /U
PI passage sensor /L
Paper
No paper
54
55
56
57
58
59
Folding connection detection
Unconnected
Connected
PS716
60
61
Gate HP sensor
62
63
PS202
PS203
64
65
No sheet sensor /U
Sheet set sensor /U
No paper
Paper
PS205
66
Tray lower limit sensor /U

lower limit
PS204
67
Tray upper limit sensor /U

upper limit
68
69
Sheet feeder manual start/clear switch

Sheet feeder manual punch button switch
Switch OFF Switch ON
70
Sheet feeder manual function selection button switch
MS201
71
PI interlock switch
Open
Close
PS207
72
No sheet sensor /L
No paper
Paper
PS208
PS210
73
74
Sheet set sensor /L

Tray lower limit sensor /L
PS209
75
Tray upper limit sensor /L
76
PS212
77
78
Sheet size sensor /L
2-118
Other than
Control
control
speed
speed
Other than Single opersingle operation
ation

lower limit
upper limit

Multi
Name
code
Cover
Inserter D
PK-5
76

001
000
Connected
Unconnected
79
PI connection detection
80
81
82
PS801
83
Punch HP sensor
84
Other than
home position
Home
position
85
PS802
86
Punch scraps full sensor
PS804
87
Punch scraps box set sensor
88
PK rocking End face detection 1
89
90
91
92

PS803
93
PK rocking Punch movement home position
Home
position
Other than
home position
94
PK connection detection
Unconnected
Connected
95
2-119
Other than
full
Full
Set
Other than
set
Paper
No paper
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
II ADJUSTMENT
TMG-3
PS101
PS102
77
0
1
Cutting entrance detection

Cutting conveyance detection
PS103
Cutting end stopper HP detection
PS104
Cutting clear HP detection
PS105
Cutting press HP detectin
PS106
Cutting knife upper limit HP detection

001
000
Paper
No paper
Home
position
Other than
home position
Other than
home position
Home
position
Home
position
Other than
home position
No paper
PS108
Cutting booklet discharge
PS110
Holder board of upper limit detection
Other than Upper limit

upper limit
Paper
PS111
Holder board of lower limit detection

lower limit
PS112
Pusher HP
PS114
10
Cutting stacker cover detection 24 V
MS2
11
Cutting front door detection 24 V
12
Cutting conveyance M lock signal under

operation
13
Open
Other than
home position
Close
Locked
Unlocked
14
15
PS107
16
Cutting end scraps box set detection
Not set
Other than
set
PS109
17
Cutting end scraps box full detection
Other than
full
Full
PS113
18
19
Cutting stucker full detection

TU connection detection
No paper
Unconnected
Paper
Connected
20
21
22
23
2-120
Home
position
8.5
47 MODE
Output check list
Do not output items with "x" in the "Cannot be

set or change in the field" column. These
Note:
items are only for the developping/manufuct-
Do not output items which cannot be set or

changed in the field and codes which are not
ing process.
Outputs of them may damage the machine.
described in the output check list."

Multi
Name
code
High voltage,
analog signal
L1
00
Exposure lamp
M53,
MC14
01
Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle

clutch /Y
Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle

clutch /Y
Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /Y

clutch /M

clutch /M
Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /M
clutch /C
M53,
MC15
5
M53,
MC16
M53,
MC17
HV1
02
Cannot be set or
changed in the field
II ADJUSTMENT

clutch /C
Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /C

clutch /K
10

clutch /K
11
Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /K
2
3

x
x
High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y: for current

measurement)
High voltage unit /1 (charging /M: for current

measurement)
High voltage unit /1 (charging /C: for current

measurement)
High voltage unit /1 (charging /K: for current

measurement)
2-121
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
High voltage,
analog signal
HV2
03
Cannot be set or
0
1
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y)

High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M)
x
x
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K)
4
5
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y, /M, /C, /K)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y: for current

measurement)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M: for current
measurement)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C: for current
measurement)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current
measurement at color mode)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current
measurement at color mode)
II ADJUSTMENT
9
L1
10
11
12
HV2
x
x
x
High voltage unit /2 (separation, measurement)
2
6
Gamma sensor
Gamma sensor (for individual check)
DRPS Y
DRPS M
DRPS C
DRPS K
2
3

High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output)
High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output)
High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output: for

individual check)
High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output: for

individual check)
0
1
High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1)

High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2)
x
x
High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1: for

current measurement)

current measurement)

cleaning consideration)*
High voltage unit /2 (guide plate)
0
1
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y)

High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M)
x
x
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C)
x
x
PS11
HV2
04
06
07
08
HV1
09
15
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K)
1
2
Counter reset
Job memory clear
98
RD mode setup
2-122

Multi
Name
code
Paper feed,
conveyance
SD7
SD8
0
1
Pick up solenoid /1
Pick up solenoid /2
SD9
Pick up solenoid /3
SD5
Pick up solenoid /BP
SD100
MC7
5
0
Paper feed solenoid (C-208)

Paper feed clutch /1
MC9
MC11
MC6
MC101
4
5
Paper feed clutch /BP

Paper feed clutch (C-208)
MC8
20
21
Pre-registration clutch /1
MC10
MC12
MC102
2
5
Pre-registration clutch (C-208)
M40
22
23
Tray up drive motor /1
M39
M38
M35
2
3

Tray up drive motor /BP (down)
Tray up drive motor /BP (up)
UP/DOWN motor (C-208: down)
6
0
1
UP/DOWN motor (C-208: up)

2nd transfer pressure/release motor (continuous
rotation)
2nd transfer pressure/release motor (pressure)
2nd transfer pressure/release motor (release)
Registration motor (1/3 speed)
1
2
Registration motor (1/2 speed)

Registration motor (1/1speed)
Registration motor (paper feed line speed)
Registration motor (hard timer on: 1/1 speed)
0
1
Loop roller motor (1/3 speed)

Loop roller motor (1/2 speed)
Loop roller motor (1/1speed)
Loop roller motor (paper feed line speed)
0
1
Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/3 speed)

Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:3 times

speed)
4
5
Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/3 speed)

Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:3 times

speed)
Paper feed motor
Paper feed motor (C-208)
M100
M34
M30
M31
24
25
26
M31
M33
M41
M101
27
28
Cannot be set or
2-123
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
Paper feed,
conveyance
MC13
MC4
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1

MC5
SD1
Transfer belt separating claw
M136,
M137
Paper feed assist fan /F, /R (C-208)
SD6
ADU lock solenoid
Polygon motor /Y (1/1 rotation)
M4
M5
1
2
Polygon motor /M (1/1 rotation)

Polygon motor /C (1/1 rotation)
32
M6
Polygon motor /K (1/1 rotation)
M3, M4,
Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (1/1 rotation)
M5, M6
M3
Polygon motor /Y (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M4
Polygon motor /M (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M5
Polygon motor /C (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
M6
M3, M4,
8
9
Polygon motor /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting)

Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting)
Laser drive board /Y
LDB M
LDB C
1
2
Laser drive board /M

Laser drive board /C
LDB K
Laser drive board /K
LDB Y,
Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K
M5, M6
LDB Y
33
M, C, K
34
PS8
36
3
4
37
38
0
0
LD alarm level detection all colors

Scanner motor (back and forth drive 1: continuous)
PS9
M1
Shading correction
Main body
0
1
M3
II ADJUSTMENT
29
ACDB
M14
40
41
Scanner motor (HP search)
6
7
Scanner motor(moves to the back scan position)

Scanner motor (back scan AGS operation+scan
operation: one operation)
AC drive board (RL1 (main relay)ON)
Cannot be set or
AC drive board (HTR1, 2 (HTR1, 2(heater/1, /

2)OFF)
Drum motor /Y (1/3 speed)
2-124

47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
M15
1
2
Drum motor /Y (1/2 speed)

Drum motor /Y (1/1speed)
Drum motor /M (1/3 speed)

Drum motor /M (1/2 speed)
5
6
Drum motor /M (1/1speed)

Drum motor /C (1/3 speed)
Drum motor /C (1/2 speed)
Drum motor /C (1/1speed)
M17
9
10
Drum motor /K (1/3 speed)

Drum motor /K (1/2 speed)
11
Drum motor /K (1/1speed)
M18
12
Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed)
13
14
Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed)

Transfer belt motor (1/1speed)
15
Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed: for nip measurement)
16
17
Scanner cooling fan
M25
M42
1
2
IPB cooling fan

DCPS cooling fan
M10,
Fixing cooling fan /1, /3, /2
M18
M2
41
42
M36,
M37
M48
Charger intake fan
M47
Drum unit fan
M43,
Writing intake fan /1, /2,

Writing exhaust fan /1, /2
M24
IP cooling fan
M26,
M27,
Exhaust fan/R, /M, /F
M12
Drum cooling fan /1
M13
M11
10
11
Drum cooling fan /2

Transfer belt cooling fan
Total counter
Black counter
Key counter
DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC breaking)
Fixing upper lamp/1, /2,

Fixing lower lamp
M44,
M45,
M46
M28
T (C)
43
T (BK)
T (K)
DCPS2
44
L2, L3,
45
L4
1
2
2-125
II ADJUSTMENT
4
M16
Main body
Cannot be set or
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
Cannot be set or
L2
3
4
Fixing upper lamp /1
L3
L4
Fixing lower lamp
L2, L3,
L4
7
8
Fixing upper lamp/1, /2,

Fixing lower lamp
II ADJUSTMENT
10
M29
M29
47
47
0
1
2
Fixing motor (1/1speed)
Fixing motor (reverse rotation: release operation

on, full-time rotation)
Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the

pressure position)
Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the

release position)
Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/3

speed)
10

speed)
speed)
Fixing motor, Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, fixing
lower lamp (fixing roller pressure+all heater
lamps on)
Web motor
11
M29, L2,
13
L3, L4
M54
M19
M18
15
48
49
1st transfer pressure/release motor (full-time

rotation)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at the

release position)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at

black and white pressure position)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at

color mode pressure position)
Transfer belt motor (for checking photosensitive

material control 1: 1/1 speed)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 2: 1/2 speed)
Developing motor /Y (1/1speed)
Developing motor /Y (1/2 speed)
Developing motor /Y (1/3 speed)
Developing motor /M (1/1speed)
5
Intrinsic
functions
M20
M21
50
Fixing motor (1/3 speed)

Fixing motor (1/2 speed)
2-126

Multi
Name
code
Developing motor /M (1/2 speed)
Developing motor /M (1/3 speed)
Developing motor /C (1/1speed)
Developing motor /C (1/2 speed)
8
9
Developing motor /C (1/3 speed)

Developing motor /K (1/1speed)
10
Developing motor /K (1/2 speed)
11
Developing motor /K (1/3 speed)
0
1
Pre-charging lamp /M
PCL Y
(turns on the control signal)
PCL M
PLC C
PCL K
Pre-charging lamp //M

L detection reference for all colors
M23
PCL Y
PLC M
51
PCL C
PCL K
51
52
L detection reference for colors (Y, M, C)
L detection reference for K
3
4
L detection reference for Y

L detection reference for M
x
x
x
M49
54
M50
M51
L detection reference for C
Toner supply motor /Y (high speed)
1
2
Toner supply motor /Y (low speed)

Toner supply motor /Y (setting value)
Toner supply motor /M (high speed)
Toner supply motor /M (low speed)
5
6
Toner supply motor /M (setting value)

Toner supply motor /C (high speed)
Toner supply motor /C (low speed)
Toner supply motor /C (setting value)
9
10
Toner supply motor /K (high speed)

Toner supply motor /K (low speed)
11
Toner supply motor /K (setting value)
MC14
12
Toner bottle clutch /Y
MC15
MC16
13
14
Toner bottle clutch /M

Toner bottle clutch /C
MC17
15
Toner bottle clutch /K
55
Color registration shutter solenoid
56
1
0
Gamma sensor shutter solenoid

Indicator lamp (PAT1 on)
M52
Intrinsic
functions
4
5
M22
Cannot be set or
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
SD2
SD3
2-127
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
II ADJUSTMENT
AFR-20

57
FN-120, FN-9 connection check
C-208 connection check
TDS Y
58
2
0
AFR-20 connection check

TDS M
TDS C
3
1

Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec)
Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/

sec)

sec)
sec)
Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 300mm/
sec)
sec)
TDS K
M301
60
6
M302
7
8
9

sec)
10
Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/

sec)
11

sec)
12

sec)
13
Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec)
14
15

16
Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec)
17
SD302
18
19

Reverse solenoid
SD301
20
Paper exit solenoid
21
Registration clutch
1
2
FNS conveyance motor

Shift motor (HP search)
Shift motor (moves to the shift position)
Shift motor ( rotation)
M303
MC301
FN-120, FN-9
2
3
M701
M702
75
Cannot be set or
2-128

Multi
Name
code
FN-120, FN-9
M703
75
TMG-3
Tray up/down motor (HP search)

Tray up/down motor (down)
Tray up/down motor (up)
M705
Alignment motor /U (HP search)
M707
9
10
Paper exit roller motor (HP search)

Paper exit roller motor (reverse rotation)
M708
11
Paper exit opening motor (HP search)
M708
12
Paper exit opening motor (moves to opening)
M709
13
14
Stapler motor /R (initianl operation)

Stapler motor /R (stapling)
M714
15
Stapler motor /F (initianl operation)
16
Stapler motor /F (stapling)
M711
17
18
Stapler movement motor (HP search)

Stapler movement motor (movement by size)
M713
19
Stacker entrance motor
M718
20
Stopper motor (HP search)
M716
M719
21
23
Alignment motor /L
Folding knife motor
M720
24
SD704
31
Paper exit opening solenoid
SD705
M705
32
33

Alignment motor /U (open)
34
Alignment motor /U (close)
35
Alignment motor /U (rocking)
36
37
Alignment motor /L (open)

Alignment motor /L (close)
38
Alignment motor /L (rocking)
M718
39
Stopper motor (moves to the A4R position)
M101
M102
55
56
Conveyance motor
Cutter motor (normal rotation)
57
Cutter motor (reverse rotation)
M103
58
Stopper motor (HP search)
M104
59
60
Stopper release motor (HP search)

Stopper release motor (release)
61
Stopper release motor (set)
62
Press motor (HP search)
63
64
Press motor (press)

Conveyance clutch /L
65
Tray up/down motor /L (down)
66
Tray up/down motor /L (up)
67
78
Sheet feed solenoid /L

Punch motor
M105
Cover Inserter MC202
D
M202
PK-5
5
6
M716
SD202
M801
75
Cannot be set or
2-129
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
Multi
Name
code
M802
Cover Inserter MC201
D
M201
79
83
Punch shift motor (HP search)

Conveyance clutch /U
84
Tray up/down motor (down)
85
Tray up/down motor (up)
SD201
M203
86
87
Sheet feed solenoid /U

PI conveyance motor
M712
88
Gate drive motor (HP search)
89
Gate drive motor (stacker direction switching)
90
91
Gate drive motor (straight direction switching)

Sub-tray paper exit motor
II ADJUSTMENT
FN-120, FN-9
M721
M704
ADU
92
Clincher rotation motor (HP search)
93
Clincher rotation motor (skew shift)
M706
94
95
Stapler rotation motor (HP search)

Stapler rotation motor (skew shift)
SD706
96
Three-folding gate solenoid
99
FNS paperless running mode
Reverse/exit solenoid
ADU conveyance clutch /1
MC1
MC3
ADU pre-registration clutch
ADU reverse motor (forward rotation:

1/3 speed)

1/2 speed)
1/1 speed)
ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: paper feed
line speed)
3 times speed)
SD4
MC2
M32
80
81
84
2
3
4
Others
ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:

1/3 speed)

1/2 speed)

1/1 speed)
ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: paper feed

line speed)
M32
84
ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:3 times

speed)
94
Adjustment data display
1
2
Illuminate all LEDs on the operation board

Message display
E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display
Cannot be set or
97
98
E-RDH (DRAM) check
99
HDD bad sectors check and recovery
2-130
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Caution:
unplugged from the power outlet
Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment

II ADJUSTMENT
9.1
Perform the paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment when the no feed jam occurs at the by-pass
feed.
A. Procedure
2. Install the piled plate [3] on the paper feed roller/
BP [2] with 2 screws [1].
[1]
[3]
[2]
3. Replace the ADU.

4. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 if the no feed jam continues
to occur at the paper feed.
Note:
The weight plate is a supply part. It should be
purchased separately.
Up to 4 plates can be used at a time.
Perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount
adjustment (by-pass)" when the weight plate
8050fs1050
is added.
2-131
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.2
Paper feed height (upper

limit) adjustment (by-pass)
Perform the paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the
fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled
paper.
II ADJUSTMENT
Note:
This adjustment affects the pick-up movement
amount. When the adjustment is complete,
perform "9.3 Pick-up
adjustment (by-pass)".
movement
amount
A. Procedure
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed
[1]
solenoid cover [2].
[2]
2-132
[1]
8050fs1051
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the

tray upper limit sensor/BP (PS25) [2].
Note:
Take note of the original scale.
(1) If it is not within the standard value:
upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface

to be within the standard value.
When raising the height of the up/down plate:
lower the sensor mounting bracket.
When lowering height of the up/down plate:
lower the sensor mounting bracket.
(2) If any problem occurs:
When the edge of the fed paper is folded: raise
the position of the sensor mounting bracket.
When paper with a concave curl is fed: raise the
position of the sensor mounting bracket.
When paper with a convex curl is fed: lower the
position of the sensor mounting bracket.
1. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover.
2. Replace the ADU.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of
PS25 again if the problem continues to occur.
2-133
[2]
[1]
8050fs1052
II ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the vertical position of the sensor mounting

bracket to make the height of the entrance guide
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.3
Pick-up movement amount

adjustment (by-pass)
Perform the pick-up movement amount adjustment

when a no feed jam occurs frequently.
A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT

[1]
solenoid cover [2].
[2]
[1]
8050fs1053
3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the

pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5) [2].
Note:
Take note of the original scale.
4. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover.
5. Replace the ADU.
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of SD5
again if the no feed jam continues to occur.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1054
2-134
9.4
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Paper feed tray /1 to /3 miscentering adjustment
Perform this adjustment when the mis-centering

occurs even after "Printer-centering adjustment" in
the 36 mode, has been performed.
2. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the up/down plate [1].
[1]
3. Move the guide plate and adjust the center posi-
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
[2]
tion.
4. Tighten 3 screws [2].
5. Print the test pattern (No.16).
[3]
8050fs1055
6. Fold the output in half vertically and check

whether the mis-centering [3] of the center of
[2]
image [2] against the center of paper [1] is
[3]
within the standard value.

Standard value: 3 mm or less
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the mis-centering
[1]
amount is within the standard value.

8050fs1056
2-135
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.5
Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet

feed pressure adjustment
Perform the sheet feed pressure adjustment when

the no feed jam or the double feed jam occurs at the
paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by
the paper type and the operating environment (the
II ADJUSTMENT
no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment). Excess adjustment may
reverse the symptom.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray [1].
[3]
unit cover [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
8050fs1057
2-136
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
3. Unplug the connector [1].

4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down
shaft screw [3].
5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] toward the rear side
and lift it up. Then, unplug the connector [5] and
[3]
remove the paper feed unit [4].
II ADJUSTMENT
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1058
6. Change the hook position of the spring [1] at the

bottom of the paper feed unit.
Weak[2]: Double feed jam is corrected.
Strong [3]: No feed jam is corrected.
7. Replace the paper feed unit and the paper feed
[1]
tray.
[2]
2-137
[3]
8050fs1059
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.6
FNS adjustment of the bypass conveyance guide plate

magnet
A. Procedure
2. Check whether the stopper piece [4] of the by-
II ADJUSTMENT
pass conveyance guide plate is in contact with

the by-pass conveyance guide plate/L [5] when
the magnet [2] for the by-pass conveyance
[1]
[5]
[3]
[2]
guide plate [1] is attached to the front panel [3].

If not, perform the following adjustment.
[4]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
8050fs1075
3. Loosen the magnet screw [1].

4. Push the by-pass conveyance guide plate [2]
[2]
toward the arrow until the stopper piece [4]
[6]
[5]
comes into contact with the conveyance guide

plate/L [4].
5. Attach the magnet [5] to the front panel [6].
Then, tighten the magnet screw [1].
[1]
6. Close the finisher door.
[4]
[3]
8050fs1076
2-138
9.7
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
FNS adjustment of the bypass gate
A. Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [2]. Then, pull out
the stacker unit further.
II ADJUSTMENT
[2]
Note:
To avoid FNS from falling, make sure to place
a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1077
4. Open the by-pass conveyance guide plate [1].
[2]
5. Visually check whether the clearance between

the by-pass gate [2] and the by-pass conveyance plate [3] is within the standard value when
the by-pass gate solenoid (SD705) is off.
[1]
Standard value: A = 3.2 0.5 mm

mm
3.2
[3]
0.5
A=
[2]
8050fs1078
2-139
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

7. Unplug all connectors [2] from the FNS control
[2]
board (FNSCB) [1] and remove the wiring har-
[3]
[4]
ness from the clamp [3].

8. Remove 5 screws [4]. Then, remove the FNSCB
[1] with the bracket [5].
II ADJUSTMENT
[5]
[1]
8050fs1079
9. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the by-pass gate solenoid (SD705) [1] and adjust the position of SD
[4]
705 [1] based on the mark [5] to make the clearance between the by-pass gate [3] and the by-
A=
3.2
mm
pass conveyance plate [4] to be within the stan-
[3]
dard value when SD705 [1] is off.

0.5
[2]
steps in reverse.
[5]
[1]
2-140
8050fs1080
9.8
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
FNS adjustment of the shift

position
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
Top cover or optional PI (if installed)
Top cover/2
2. Turn on the main body, and then drive the shift
motor (M702) in the 47 mode (code 75-2/75-3).
[3]
[5]
II ADJUSTMENT
3. Check whether the edge of the actuator [5] for

the slide gear is placed in the notched hole [3] at
the slide stay [2] for the shift unit [1] for both the
HP search (home position) and the shift posi-
[4]
tion.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1081
4. Loosen the bracket screw [2] for the shift HP

sensor (PS718) and adjust the position of the
bracket [4] based on the mark [3].
5. Tighten the bracket screw [2] when the adjustment is complete.
[1]
[4]
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
8050fs1082
2-141
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.9
FNS adjustment of the paper

exit opening solenoid
A. Procedure
2.
Top cover/1 or optional PI (if installed)

Top cover/2
Rear cover
Turn on the main body, and then turn on the
II ADJUSTMENT
paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) in the 47

mode (code 75-31).
3. Check whether the clearance between the
plunger [2] on the solenoid and the stopper [3]
[1]
on the bracket is within the standard value when

SD704 [1] is on.
A=6.5 0.5mm
[2]
8050fs1083
4. Remove 2 solenoid bracket screws [1] and

remove the solenoid [2] with the bracket [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
2-142
8050fs1084
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
5. Loosen 2 solenoid screws [1], adjust the posi-
[2]
tion of the solenoid [2], and then tighten the

screws.
[1]
8050fs1085
6. Replace the solenoid bracket [1] and tighten the
the stopper (rubber) [4] on the paper exit guide

stay [3].
[5]
[1]
solenoid bracket screws [5] at the position

where the paper exit guide [2] is in contact with
[4]
[3]
Note:
[2]
There should be the gap of 1 mm or more

between the paper exit guide [2] and the paper
exit guide stay [3].
[3]
steps in reverse.
1mm
[2]
8050fs1086
2-143
II ADJUSTMENT
A=6.5 0.5mm
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm

A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
2. Check whether the upper face of the paper exit
II ADJUSTMENT
belt arm [4] is located at the center of 2 marks

[5] when the edge of the actuator [2] for the belt
[3]
detection gear [1] is placed in the notched hole

[3] at the rear panel.
If not, perform the adjustment.
3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
[2]
Note:
To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to
[1]
place a support under the stacker unit.
[4]
[5]
8050fs1087
2-144
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
4. Remove a screw [2] for the belt detection gear

[1]. Place the paper eject belt arm at the speci-
[1]
fied position. Then, fix the detection gear [1] at

the specified position.
steps in reverse.
8050fs1088
2-145
II ADJUSTMENT
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/U

A. Procedure
1. Turn on the main body. Once the finisher completes its initial operation, turn off the main body.
II ADJUSTMENT
unit.
Note:
4. Check whether the actuator [2] for the alignment
HP sensor/U (PS708) [1] is aligned with the
[1]
[2]
home position.
8050fs1089
5. Check whether the clearance A for the alignment plate/U [1] is within the standard value.
Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in)
A=340.6
mm
[1]
PS708
8050fs1090
2-146
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
6. Loosen 2 screws [1]. Align the rear side of the

alignment plate/U [2] with the long line at the
[4]
[1]
[2]
center of the marking lines [3]. Then, adjust the

front side of the alignment plate/U [4] to be
within the standard value based on the rear
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050fs1091
2-147
II ADJUSTMENT
side.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L

(only for FN-9)
A. Procedure
1. Check whether "Adjustment of the position of
FNS alignment plate/U" has been completed.
II ADJUSTMENT
2. Turn on the main body. In the 47 mode, use one

of the following codes to drive a motor and turn
off the main body.
Code 75-8: alignment motor/U (M705) home
position search
Code 75-21: alignment motor/L (M716) home
position search
Code 75-39: stopper motor (M718) moves to the
A4R or larger position
unit.
Note:
To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure
to place a support under the stacker unit.
5. Remove the stapler unit cover.
6. Check whether the actuator for the alignment
HP sensor/U (PS708) is aligned with the home
position.
7. Check whether the actuator [3] for the alignment
HP sensor/L (PS724) for the alignment plate/L
[1] is aligned with the home position.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1092
2-148
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
8. Place a sheet larger than A4R in the stacker
[3]
section and check the position of the alignment

plate/U (rear) [1] and alignment plate/L (rear) [2]
[1]
by placing a sheet [3]. Check whether the space

A between the alignment plate/L (rear) [2] and
the alignment plate/L (front) [4] is within the
standard value.
[4]
[2]
A=340.6
mm
8050fs1093
9. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of
[2]
the alignment plate/L [2] to be within the standard value.
[1]
[2]
[1]
2-149
[1]
8050fs1094
II ADJUSTMENT
Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in)

OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling)

Note:
Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal
direction manually (it may cause the teeth to
skip between the belt and gear).
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it
is performed within the standard value.
Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at
rear) [1]: A = 8.5 3mm
Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at
front) [2]: B = 8.5 3mm
Standard value for the flat stapling [3]: C= B=8.5
3mm
(In the flat stapling, the paper edge and the line [4]
connecting 2 staples must become parallel)
[1]
[2]
A=8.5 3mm

B=8.5 3mm
unit.
[3]
C=8.5 3mm

Note:
[4]
2-150
8050fs1095
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
5. Loosen the adjustment screws [3] for the

clincher/F [1] and the clincher/R [2] and adjust
the position of the flat-stapling stopper [5] based
[5]
on the mark [4].

6. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it
II ADJUSTMENT
is performed within the standard value.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[4]
[3]
8050fs1096
2-151
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical

direction
A. Procedure
Note:
1. Perform a stapling operation to check for the
If
[1]
clinch failure.
Buckled staple-needles [1]
Floating stapling [2] (standard value: L = 1mm or
less)
Height of belt staple-needle [3] (standard value:
L = 0.7mm or less)
there is a failure, perform the following adjust-
ment.
[2]
Note:
Adjust the clincher or stapler if it is replaced
[3]
L=1mm
II ADJUSTMENT
direction manually (it may cause the teeth to

skip between the belt and gear).
L=0.7mm
8050fs1097
or removed.
unit.
Note:
To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure
to place a support under the stacker unit.
5. Remove the cartridge [1], open the cover [2],
and then remove the staple sheet [3] by sliding
it.
[1]
[3]
[2]
2-152
8050fs1098
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
6. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler position-
[1]
ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into
the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then
close the cover [5].
7. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler.
[5]
[3]
[4]
8050fs1099
8. Loosen 4 screws [3] for the clincher/F [1] and

the clincher/R [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
8050fs1100
2-153
II ADJUSTMENT
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2

guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2]
[2]
into the holes [5] on the clincher [4].

Note:
[1]
The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be
II ADJUSTMENT
hooked on the clincher.
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1101
2-154
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler downward.

Adjust the position of the clincher [4] for the
plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted
into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Rotate the
gear [1] downward further. Then, place the plate
[2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the
jig into the clincher unit [4].
11. Tighten 4 screws for each clincher.
12. Remove the jig by rotating the gear for the sta-
Note:
Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the
clincher when removing the stapler position-
[3]
[2]
[4]
ing jig.
13. Remove the cartridge and plate. Then, replace
the staple sheet removed at the step 5. Replace
the cartridge.
14. Check the operation of the stapler.
[1]
2-155
8050fs1102
II ADJUSTMENT
[1]
pler upward.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling)

(only for FN-9)
A. Procedure
Note:
II ADJUSTMENT
direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip

between the belt and gear).
1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether
[1]
the paper edge and the line [2] connecting 2 staples [1] becomes parallel [3] and the discrepancy L is within the standard value.
[2]
Standard value: discrepancy L = 1 mm or less

If the discrepancy is not within the standard
value, perform the following adjustment.
2. Check whether "adjustment of the position of
[3]
FNS alignment plate/U" and "adjustment of the

position of alignment plate/L" has been complete.
8050fs1103

unit.
Note:
6. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the alignment plate/L
[1].
[1]
[2]
2-156
8050fs1104
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
7. Adjust the position based on the mark [3] to

make the upper edge [1] and lower edge [2] of
paper to be horizontal.
8. Tighten the 3 screws, then perform a stapling
operation to check whether the stitch-and-fold
position is within the standard value.
II ADJUSTMENT
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
2-157
8050fs1105
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle

of the folding stopper (only
for FN-9)
Note:
direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip
II ADJUSTMENT
between the belt and gear).

Never loosen the screw [1] that must not be
removed.
[1]
8050fs1106
A. Procedure
1. Perform a folding operation with A3 paper to
check whether the discrepancy at the folding
edge is within the standard value.
Standard value: A = 1mm or less
If the discrepancy is not within the standard
value, perform the following adjustment.

unit.
Note:
8050fs1107

2-158
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
5. Loosen 5 screws [2] for the folding stopper [1]

and adjust the angle based on the mark [3].
Note:
Never loosen the screw [4] that must not be
removed.
the standard value.
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050fs1108
2-159
II ADJUSTMENT
6. Tighten the 5 screws [2], then perform the folding to check whether the discrepancy is within
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FN-9)

A. Procedure
1. Perform the followings to change the pressure of
the folding roller.
II ADJUSTMENT

unit.
4. Remove the stacker unit cover.
5. Change the positions of each 2 pressure
springs [3] at front [1] and rear [2].
A
B
Note:
[3]
The 4 pressure springs [3] must be hooked on
the hook holes with same symbol.
C
B
A
[1]
C
B
A
[3]
2-160
C
B
A
[2]
8050fs1109
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.18 FNS adjustment of the threeholding position (only for

FN-9)
A. Procedure
1. Check whether "adjustment of the angle of the
folding stopper" has been completed.
position
a
Standard value
A4R
95 mm
8.5 x 11R
89.4 mm
Specification
II ADJUSTMENT
Folding
2 mm
101 mm
95 mm
2 mm
101 mm
95 mm
2 mm
c
a
2. Perform a three-folding operation to check

whether the three-folding position is within the
specification.
8050fs1110
If it is not within the specification, perform the

following adjustment.
3. Turn on the main body, adjust the first folding
position (standard value a) in "Finisher adjustment" "Three-holding position adjustment" in
the 36 mode. Then, perform the three-folding for
confirmation.
4. Once the first folding line is adjusted within the
specification, open the finisher door and pull out
the stacker unit.
5. Open the three-folding guide plate [1], loosen 2
three-folding stopper screws [2], and then adjust
the position of the three-folding stopper [4]
based on the mark [3].
6. Tighten the 2 screws [2], then perform the threefolding to check whether the three-folding posi-
[3]
tion is within the standard value.
[2]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1111
2-161
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position

A. Procedure
Note:
This adjustment is performed only if the position between the drive belt and the gear is dis-
II ADJUSTMENT
placed during another adjustment by mistake.

unit.
Note:
4.
5.
Rear cover
Stapler unit cover
Insert the stacker unit.
Loosen 2 screws (M3) [2] for the staple slide
pulley/B [1] from the rear side with the hexagonal wrench [3].
6. Move the stapler and clincher simultaneously

toward center until they contacts with the bearing.
Note:
Make sure to move them simultaneously. The
flat-stapling stopper may be damaged at the
metal frame of the stapler if they are moved
individually.
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050fs1112
2-162
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
7. Remove the cartridge [1] for the stapler/R, open

the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet
[3] by sliding it.
[1]
[2]
8. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler positioning jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into
8050fs1113
[1]
the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then

close the cover [5].
9. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler/R.
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4]
8050fs1114
2-163
II ADJUSTMENT
[3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2
[2]
guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2]

into the holes [5] on the clincher [4].
Note:
[1]
II ADJUSTMENT
The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be

hooked on the clincher.
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1115
11. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler/R downward.

Adjust the horizontal position of the clincher [4]
[3]
for the plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be

inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly.
Then, adjust the horizontal position of the stapler/R and the clincher/R. Then, rotate the gear
[2]
[4]
[1] downward further. Place the plate [2] onto

the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into
the clincher unit [4].
Note:
Do not loosen the screws for the clincher at
this time.
The stapler/R and the clincher/R must be
finely adjusted if the position is not matched.
2-164
[1]
8050fs1116
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
12. Insert the stacker with the jig attached (with the
plate and the jig joined). Then, tighten 2 screws
for the staple slide pulley/B from the rear side.
13. Pull out the stacker unit. Then, remove the jig by
rotating the gear for the stapler upward.
Note:
ing jig.
14. Remove the cartridge for the stapler/R and
plate. Replace the staple sheet removed at the
step 7 and replace the cartridge. Then check following 3 stapling operations.
1-staple (at rear)
1-staple (at front)
2-staple
15. Replace the rear cover and the stapler cover.
2-165
II ADJUSTMENT
Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the

clincher when removing the stapler position-
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet

cutting parallelism
A. Procedure
1. Measure the length between the folding face [1]
A
and trimming surface [2] and calculate the parallelism. Then, check whether it is within the stan-
II ADJUSTMENT
dard value.
Standard value: parallelism = A-B = 1 mm or
less
[1]
[2]
2. Open the front door [1].
8050fs1117
[2]
3. Push up the pressure release lever [2].

4. Loosen the screw [3]. Then adjust the conveyance guide plate [5] based on the mark [4].
[1]
5. Tighten the screw [3].
[5]
[4]
2-166
[3]
8050fs1118
9.21 LCT
tray
adjustment
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
mis-centering
Perform this adjustment when the positioning correction cannot be done (the mis-centering amount
exceeds the automatic adjustment range of 5mm)
even if "Printer centring adjustment (tray 4)" in the
36 mode, has been performed.
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
1. Print the test pattern No.16 to check the miscentering amount.
2. Lift up the up/down plate [1].
[4]
[3]
[3]
[5]
4. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the top of LCT. Then,

slide the guide plate/front [4] and the guide
plate/rear [5] in the same direction at the same
amount.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1064
2-167
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
5. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the center positioning

bracket [1] at the bottom of LCT. Then, slide the
guide plate in the same direction at the same
amount with step 4
6. Tighten the 2 screws [2].
7. Replace the LCT and print the test pattern
No.16 again.
II ADJUSTMENT
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the mis-centering

amount becomes within the automatic adjustment range.
[2]
[1]
2-168
8050fs1065
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.22 LCT skew adjustment

Perform the LCT skew adjustment when the paper
skew is different with paper supplied from the other
tray in such case as LCT is placed on the inclined
surface. However, it has just a little effect because
all paper is corrected at the second paper feed section.
II ADJUSTMENT
A. When all printouts are skewed:

1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous
copy mode to check the skew amount.
2. Open the front door of the LCT.
3. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the positioning bracket
[1] at the bottom of the LCT.
4. Adjust the position of the positioning bracket [2].
[1]
[2]
8050fs1066
2-169
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
B. When some printouts are skewed:

1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous
copy mode to check the skew amount.
3. Loosen 6 screws [2] at the top of LCT to loosen
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4]
the guide plate/front [3], the guide plate/rear [4],

and the guide plate/right side [5].
II ADJUSTMENT
4. Tighten the 6 screws at the position where each

guide plate is in contact with paper.
[1]
Reference:
The size indicator on the guide plate is
approximately 2mm wider than the actual
standard size paper. It may cause the skew for
some paper. The skew amount is reduced if
paper is fixed with each guide plate in tight.
[2]
[5]
8050fs1067
2-170
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment

Perform the LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment when the no feed jam occurs at the paper
feed.
purchased separately.
A. Procedure
[5]
2. Remove the spring [2].
[4]
3. Install the weight plate [4] on the paper feed
[2]
roller [3] with 2 screws [5].

4. Replace the spring [2].
5. Close the top cover.
6. Perform the continuous copy to check the paper
feed.
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 if the no feed jam continues
[3]
to occur at the paper feed.
[1]
8050fs1068
2-171
II ADJUSTMENT
Note:
The weight plate is a supply part. It should be
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment

Perform the LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment when the paper feed jam occurs frequently or
the up/down wire is replaced.
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
3. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the front and rear side.
4. Position the mark [5] to make the up/down plate
to be horizontal with 2 adjusting screws [4] at
the front and rear side.
[5]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
8050fs1069
2-172
9.25 LCT sheet

adjustment
feed
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
pressure
Perform the LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment

when a no feed jam or a double feed jam occurs at
the paper feed.
The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper
type and the operating environment (the no feed
jam is likely in the low temperature environment and
II ADJUSTMENT
the double feed is likely in the high temperature

environment).
A. Procedure
1. Remove LCT from the main body.
2. Check the adjusting spring mechanism [2] from
the top left side of the LCT (paper exit side) [1].
3. Change the spring hook position [2] depending
on the symptom.
The load of the spring changes approximately
10% for a change in its position.
Note:
Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom.
For example, a no feed jam becomes a double
feed jam.
[2]
Weak: Double feed jam is corrected.

Strong: No feed jam is corrected.
[1]
8050fs1070
2-173
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper

limit) adjustment
Perform the LCT paper feed height (upper limit)
adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge
of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled
paper. The adjustment is performed by changing
II ADJUSTMENT
the vertical position of the upper limit sensor

(PS109).
A. Procedure
[6]
3. Measure the height of the entrance guide upper

surface [3] and up/down plate upper surface [4]
with a scale to check whether it is within the
standard value.
[5]
[3]
Standard value: 2 to 5mm
[1]
[4]
Perform the following adjustment if it is not within

the standard value or the edge of the fed paper is
folded even if it is within the standard value.
Note:
[2]
This adjustment affects the pick-up release

amount.
When the adjustment is complete, perform
"9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment".
4. Remove the sprint [6] from the paper feed unit
[5].
6. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [8]
toward right.
[8]
[7]
8050fs1071
2-174
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

8. Move the sensor mounting bracket [2] vertically
[1]
[2]
to make the height of the entrance guide upper

surface and the up/down plate upper surface to
be within the standard value.
If it is not within the standard value and the
2-175
8050fs1072
II ADJUSTMENT
height of the up/down plate has to be raised:

When paper with a convex curl is fed:
Lower the position of the sensor mounting
bracket
If it is not within the standard value and the
height of the up/down plate has to be lowered:
When the edge of the fed paper is folded:
When paper with a concave curl is fed:
Raise the position of the sensor mounting
bracket
9. When the adjustment is complete, tighten a
screw [1].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.27 LCT pick-up release amount

adjustment
Perform the LCT pick-up release amount adjustment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. The
adjustment is performed by changing the horizontal
position of the paper feed solenoid (SD100).
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
[4]

3. Remove the sprint [4] from the paper feed unit
[3].
[3]

5. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [6]
toward right.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
8050fs1073
2-176
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
6. Pull the moving section of SD100 (paper feed

solenoid) [1] and measure the distance between
the paper feed roller [2] and the upper surface of
[2]
[1]
the up/down plate [3] to check whether it is

Standard value: 0.5 to 2.5mm
Perform the following adjustment if it is not
[3]
[4]
Note:
Before starting the operation, note the original position of the solenoid.
8. Move the paper feed solenoid (SD100) [1] horizontally to make the distance between the paper
feed roller and the upper surface of the up/down
plate to be within the standard value.
9. Tighten the screw [4] for the paper feed solenoid.
8050fs1074
2-177
II ADJUSTMENT

OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.28 PK Adjusting the tilt of the

punch hole position
3. Remove the punch unit cover by removing three

screws
A. Preparation
1. Check the following items:
Punch unit cover
II ADJUSTMENT
The finisher is connected to the main body.

The main body is loaded with the paper based
on the punch specifications.
2. Check the skew of output paper in advance.
Slide the side guide plate and the rear guide
plate for the main body's feed tray, and align the
paper loaded on the main body's tray.
Check the skew by using the platen copy or
adjustment mode.
3. To check the tilt of the punch hole position, make
a sample copy in the punch mode.
4. Make three copies each in single side copy
mode and double side copy mode with the
punch mode to check the skew.
Screws
7165field135i
4. Loosen the four adjustment screws of PK.

5. Using the mark scale as a guide, move the
punch unit horizontally by the amount of tilt for
B. Procedure
1. Measure the position of the sampled punch
holes to check the tilt of the position.
the punch hole position.

1 scale: 0.5%
Adjustment screws
Adjust to the left or right
Mark
Adjustment screws
2. Open the front cover.
7165field128i
6. Retighten the screws.

7. Reinstall the punch unit cover.
8. Make a sample copy of punch mode and
recheck the tilt of the punch hole position.
2-178
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.29 Sensitivity adjustment for

the PK paper edge sensor
4. Turn the volume fully clockwise and then turn it

back counterclockwise until the LED corresponding to each volume lights up
A. Preparation
1. Check that the finisher is connected to the main
body.
Volumes
B. Procedure
1. Open the front door of the finisher.
II ADJUSTMENT
2. Remove the punch drive board cover by removing one screw

Punch drive board cover
Screw
LED
7165field129i
7165field130i
3. Power on the main body.

5. Perform the procedure of step 4 for all five volumes.
6. Power off the main body after completing the
adjustment.
7. Reinstall the punch drive board cover.
8. Close the front door of the finisher.
2-179
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.30 PI Centering Adjustment
2. When adjusting for the lower tray, remove two

screws and slide rightward to remove the side
Note:
guide plate (rear)
PI Centering adjustement must be performed

on the upper tray first, then on the lower tray.
Pi-W-2
When it is necessary to slide the side guide

plate (rear) a lot, perform step 11 before step 3
II ADJUSTMENT
and subsequent procedures.

When tightening two screws of the side guide
plate (rear), be careful not to tighten them too
much. (Tightening torque: less than 5kg/cm)
A. Preparation
1. Check that PK adjusting the punch hole vertical
position has been completed.
Side guide plate
Screws
(rear)
3. Loosen two adjustment screws securing the

side guide plate (rear), and slide it by the twice
2. Perform Tray 1/2/3 centering adjustment.
the difference. (ie: If there is 1.5mm difference
3. Feed the three sheets from PI with the punch

mode.
in direction of rear side, slide by 3mm to rear

side.)
4. Check the position of each punch hole on the
1 scale : 2 mm
three sheets.
Side guide plate (rear)

B. Procedure
1. Release the hook and remove the adjustment
cover of the side guide plate (rear)
Adjustment cover
Adjustment
screws
Pi-W-3
4. Fasten the two adjustment screws securely to fix

the side guide plate (rear).
Side guide plate
5. In case of the lower tray, install the side guide
Hock
plate (rear).
6. Set a sheet on the tray and fit the side guide
(rear)
plate (rear) to the sheet to check that the side

Pi-W-1
guide plate (rear) is parallel to the sheet.

7. Feed the three sheets from PI with the punch
mode.
8. Check the position of each punch hole.
9. Repeat step 2 to 8 until the difference of the
holes is improved.
10. Install the adjustment cover to the side guide
plate (rear).
11. Set A4R size paper to the tray and perform the
cover sheet tray size adjustment in 36 mode.
2-180
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.31 Adjusting the tilt of PI (when

PK punch is used)
4. Using the mark as a guide, move the guide plate

laterally by the amount of tilt in the position of
punch holes.
A. Preparation
1. Check the following items:
Feed 3 sheets from PI with the Punch mode

selected to check the tilt of punch holes.
3. Loosen one screw securing the guide plate.
B. Procedure
1. Fold each of the fed 3 sheets into two as illustrated below and find out in which direction the
punch holes tilt.)
Screw securing
the guide plate
Tilting toward
Tilting toward
the right edge
the left edge
of the sheet
of the sheet
Tilting toward
the right edge
of the sheet
Tilting toward
the left edge
of the sheet
7165field143i
7165field142i
5. Retighten the screw securing the guide plate.

6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the amount of tilt in the
2. Open the FNS front cover.

3. Loosen one screw securing the guide plate.
position of punch holes is improved.
2-181
II ADJUSTMENT
PI is connected to FNS.
The tray of PI is loaded with paper.
2. Check the tilt of output paper in advance.
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Blank page
2-182
ISW
III SERVICE TOOL
1.2
1. ISW
1.1
Installing the USB driver for

ISWTrns
Note:
It is required to install the USB driver for
Description of the ISW
ISWTrns to perform ISW via USB on this
ISW (In-system Writer) is an operation to rewrite the

control program stored in the flash ROM on a variety of control boards in Minolta's digital copier without removing the boards from the main body of the
copier. ISW allows you to update the version of the
control program without replacing the board or to
install the latest program when replacing the board.
[ISWTrns (PC software)] is provided to execute ISW,
which rewrite the program by connecting a PC to
machine. See the installation procedure file

attached to ISWTrns for the installation procedure.
Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to
turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] [Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and
press the OK button.
Only ISWTrns is supported for ISW in this
machine.
program stored in the flash ROM in the copier main

body directly.
3-1
III SERVICE TOOL
the digital copier. The software rewrites the control
ISW
1.3
Setup
B. HELP + CHECK mode

The HELP + CHECK mode is started when the
1.3.1
Board used for the ISW
main switch (SW2) is pressed while pressing
ISWTrns supports the following boards for rewriting
"HELP" and "CHECK button." This mode is

designed specifically for ISW to be started when the
the control program in CF5001.
overall control program is installed but the operation
board control program is not installed because the
Printer controller board (PRCB)

Operation board/1 (OB1)
25 mode cannot be started in such case.
C. 25 mode
The 25 mode is available only if both the overall
See IP SHB for the printer controller.

ROM replacement is needed for boards other than
control program and the operation board control

program are installed.
the above.
III SERVICE TOOL
1.3.2
Data flow
The following shows the ISW data flow.

PC
OACB
OB1
PRCB
DFCB
FNSCB
Note:
The control program on other boards cannot
be written until that for the overall control
board (OACB) is written.
1.3.3
ISW transfer type
The copier supports three ISW transfer modes as

follows.
A. Power ON mode
The power ON mode is used if no program is
installed on the overall control board (OACB) or it is
faulty.
If no program is installed on OACB, the OACB program becomes possible to be written at power ON.
No display appears on the operation panel and the
timer LED flashes even if the operation board control program is installed because the OACB controls
the power for the operation board.
3-2

1.3.4
ISW
Instances of ISW transfer
A. When writing a new program (because

replacing a board or failed to rewrite the
program)
Normal startup display ISW transfer method
Condition
Overall control
board
Flashing timer LED

No display on the
operation panel
Power ON mode
Overall control program is not installed

or faulty
Operation board /1
Error code display
HELP + CHECK
mode
Others
Error code display
25 mode
The overall control program is installed

but the operation board program is not
installed or faulty
Both the overall control program and
the operation board program is
installed
B. When updating the version of the program
Overall control
board
Operation board /1
Normal
25 mode
Normal
25 mode
Others
Normal
25 mode
3-3
Condition
All program has been installed
III SERVICE TOOL
Normal startup display ISW transfer method
ISW
1.3.5
Setup procedure
B. Power on mode
a.
Procedure
A. Connecting a PC
a.
1. Turn ON the main switch (SW2).
Procedure
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side
2. Check the timer LED is flushing.

The control program becomes possible to be
written in this state.
cover/2 [2].
3. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH
ISW Trns."
Note:
Do not turn OFF the copier while writing the
ISW data is being rewritten.
4. The operation screen appears if it is completed
successfully.
III SERVICE TOOL
[1]
If it is terminated abnormally, see "E. The relationship between ISW resulting operation and
[2]
the operational LEDs."

2. Connect either of IEEE1284 port [1] or USB
(Type B) port [2] to the PC via a cable.
C. HELP + CHECK mode

a.
Procedure
1. Turn ON the copie while pressing "HELP" and

"CHECK button."
2. "ISW write mode select menu screen"
Press 1 (PC) with the numeric keys.
ISW WRITE MODE SELECT MENU
1.PC
[1]
[2]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
Note:
3-4
9.EXIT
ISW
3. "ISW device select menu screen"

Select 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) with the
numeric keys.
dures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH
Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0
ISW Trns."
(PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
"Result screen" appears once ISW is complete.
ISW DEVICE SELECT MENU

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. "ISW executing screen"

Execute the operation according to the proce-
[MODE:PC]
GRAPHIC CONTROL
PRINTER CONTROL
OPERATION CONTROL
ADF
VIF
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
EXECUTING
0. PREVIOUS
9. EXIT
Note:
Rewrite programs other than 3 (OPERATION
CONTROL) in the 25 mode because this
mode does not support them.
7. "Result screen"
The operation is completed successfully
III SERVICE TOOL
"NORMAL END" appears.
4. "Operation control - item select menu screen"

Select an item from 1 - 5 to rewrite it individually or select 6 (ALL) to rewrite all items at a
time.
*** NORMAL END ***
Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0

(PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
OPERATION CONTROL - ITEM SELECT MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
[MODE:PC]
01
02
03
04
05
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
0. CONTINUE
9. EXIT
The operation is terminated abnormally

"ABNORMAL END" appears.
Check the error code on the screen if the
6. ALL
rewriting is terminated abnormally.

PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
0. PREVIOUS
9. EXIT
*** ABNORMAL END ***
INPUT DEVICE ERROR
(ERROR CODE : XX)
5. "ISW start screen"

Select 1 (YES) to start ISW.
Select 2 (NO) to cancel.
OPERATION CONTROL - 01
[MODE:PC]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
0. CONTINUE
9. EXIT
ISW START OK ?
8. Select 0 (CONTINUE) to continue ISW or

select 9 (EXIT) to exit.
"PLEASE TURN OFF A POWER SUPPLY"
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
1. YES
appears when pressing 9, then turn OFF the
2. NO
main switch (SW2).
3-5
ISW
b.
Error code
Error code
III SERVICE TOOL
01
Causes
No. of resulting
operation
Error in the instruction against the ISW processing unit
(1)
1F
Program error
(1)
41
42
Input data format error (at ISW for the operation board program)
Model name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program)
(2)
(2)
43
Board name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program)
(2)
81
Input device error such as the input time out (at ISW for the operation
board program)
(3)
C1
C2
Flash ROM erasing failure (at ISW for the overall control program)
Flash ROM writing failure (at ISW for the overall control program)
(5)
(5)
C3
ROM check sum error (at ISW for the overall control program)
(8)
C4
Output device error such as the input time out
(6)
E1
E2
Erase error
Write error
(9)
(9)
E3
Communication error
(4)
E9
I/F communication parameter error between the overall control board

and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(4)
EA
I/F command sequence error between the overall control board and the
operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
I/F communication timeout error between the overall control board and
the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(4)
EB
F0
Flash ROM error (at ISW for the operation board program)
(4)
(7)
F1
Flash ROM verify error (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
F2
F3
Flash ROM write error (at ISW for the operation board program)
Flash ROM erase error (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
(7)
F8
I/F receive checksum error between the overall control board and the
(7)
F9
I/F receive header code error between the overall control board and the
(7)
FA
I/F receive parity error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
I/F receive framing error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
FB
FC
I/F receive overflow error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
(4)
Resulting operations
(1) The program is not operating normally. Turn OFF and
Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs,
ON the main switch (SW2) and then start ISW again.
the flash ROM on the overall control board may
(2) Check the ISW transfer data file.

(3) Check the connection of the communication
be faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace

the overall control board.
cable from the input device (PC).
(6) An error is detected from the board on which
(4) Check I/F between the overall control board
you want to rewrite the program. Check the
and the operation board.

(5) The flash ROM on the overall control board is
board on which you want to execute ISW.
faulty.
3-6
ISW
(7) The flash ROM on the operation board/1 is
D. 25 mode
faulty.
Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs,
a.
Procedure
the flash ROM on the operation board/1 may be

faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace
the operation board/1.
(8) The checksum calculated after the program is

written does not become equal to the ROM
checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the
same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file
may not be downloaded properly.
Press the [11 ISW] key.

3. "ISW mode menu screen"
Select a program for which ISW is executed.
4. Pressing the [Start] key, cause the machine to
The flash ROM may be faulty or have reached

its life. Replace the object board.
The checksum calculated after the program is
written does not become equal to the ROM
checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the
same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file
may not be downloaded properly.
be data waiting condition.

Note:
See "C. HELP + CHECK mode" since selecting "Operation panel" switches to the HELP
+ CHECK mode.
5. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH
ISW Trns."
Note:
Note:
If an error occurs during rewriting the program on the overall control board, the operation panel cannot be displayed even if the
main switch is ON because the program controlling the whole components has been lost.
Execute ISW in the power ON mode if such is
the case.
If an error occurs during rewriting the program on the operation board/1, it cannot be
started in the 25 mode because the error code
is displayed. Execute ISW in the HELP +
CHECK mode if such is the case.
3-7
Do not turn OFF the copier while rewriting

the ISW data is being written.
III SERVICE TOOL
(9) It cannot write/erase data to/from area on which

ISW is executed.
ISW
E. The relationship between ISW operation and

the operational LEDs
The following shows the display of the operation
panel in the power ON mode with ISW executed.
No.
Operation
Timer LED
Power save LED
CPU initialization
OFF
OFF
During memory check
OFF
OFF
Memory check error (waiting data from PC)
Blink
OFF
ISW processing (receiving data)
OFF
Blink
ISW processing (writing to flash ROM)
OFF
Blink
Transfer data error
Blink
Blink
Flash ROM write error
Blink
Steady lit
Memory check successful and reboot
OFF
OFF
III SERVICE TOOL
3-8
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
2. UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
2.1.2
Setting up ISW Trns
When the ISW Trns program has been installed
2.1
Setting Up ISW Trns
on the PC, run it to set up a folder in which the
Note:
The explanation screen here is used based on
transfer file (update data) is stored. When this

setting completes, the ISW Trns program is
ready to run.
another model. Therefore, there is a thing dif-
2.1.1
Step
Installing the application program
Install the ISW Trns on the PC.

Step
Procedure
Boot the PC.
Mount setup disk 1 on the PC and doubleclick the [Setup.exe] icon to start the
installer.
If an old version ISW Trns program is
present, uninstall it first, then start the
setup operation.
[Information dialog box]

Click OK as instructed by on-screen guidance.
This procedure will add an ISW Trns icon
to the Start menu.
[Setup completion window]

Click Complete as instructed by on-screen
guidance.
The ISW Trns install exits automatically.
Boot the PC.
[Select [ISW Trns] from the start menu to

run the ISW Trns program.
[ISW Trns dialog box]
[Program folder confirmation window]

Confirm the ISW Trns program installation
folder as instructed by on-screen guidance
and click Next.
By default, the ISW Trns program installs
in [ISW Trns for Minolta].
To change the installation folder, either
type a new folder name or select one from
the list of existing folders on display.
[Next disk insertion request window]
Mount setup disk 2 as instructed by onscreen guidance and click OK.
Click OK to set up a folder in which the

transfer file (update data) is stored.
This dialog box will not appear when ISW
Trns is run next time.
[ISW Trns setup window]

Confirm the installation folder as instructed
by on-screen guidance and click Next.
By default, the program installs in
[C:\Program_File\Minolta\ISWTrns for
Minolta].
To change the installation folder, click
Browse and type a new folder name.
Procedure
[Option window]
Set up a folder in which the transfer file

(update data) is stored and click Make
Folder.
By default, the folder in which the ISW Trns
program has installed
(C:\Program_File\Minolta\ISWTrns for
Minolta) has been set up as a storage
folder (data folder).
To change the storage folder, click Browse
and select a new folder or type its full-path
name in directly the edit box.
3-9
III SERVICE TOOL
ferent from an actual screen.
Step
Procedure
Note:
Clicking Make Folder will create the following hierarchy of folders branching
off from the new storage folder:
ISWTrns for Minolta
CF5001
Adf
Graphic control
Euro
Japan
Usa
Printer
Vif
Operation
III SERVICE TOOL
Fns
[Option window]
Click OK.
Note:
This procedure will save the data folders created in Step 4 to the INI file for
the ISW Trns program.
[ISW Trns main window]

The ISW Trns main window opens.
3-10

2.1.3
ISW Trns Main Window Overview
The ISW Trns program, when run, comes up

with the ISW Trns main window. The ISW Trns
main window lets you select, verify, and transfer a transfer file (update data) and display
information in it.
A detailed description of its functions follows:
50img_dc0001
2003/ 9/15
CF5001
50img_dc000.b01
50img_dc0001.b01
50img_dc0001.b00
* Sample display : Display information may be different from what you actually will see on your machine.
1 A Select Type frame
Select conditions for a transfer file (update
data). When you select all the four combo
3 Send file information frame

List the files that are transferred actually on the
basis of the information specified in frames 1
boxes, folder 5 is set up on the basis of the

information set in the INI file.
and 2 . Click File Check to view a checksum

of each file and its consistency (OK, NG or ??).
The settings of the combo boxes selected are

saved to the ISW Trns.INI file when you click
File Send. The ISW Trns program comes up
with the ISW Trns main window prefilled with
these combo box settings when runs next time.
4 File Status frame

View detailed information about the version file
as it is selected in 6 .
The table below presents differences in the
ways transfer files are displayed according to
2 Version selection frame

This frame lets you select which version of a
transfer file you want transmitted when more
than one version is stored in a single folder.
3-11
their data distribution types.
III SERVICE TOOL
CF5001
Data sources appearing in the detailed file information list
III SERVICE TOOL
Display title
ORIGINAL (Batch data)
DIVIDE (Divided data)
File Name
File name of the version selection file File name of the version selection file
File Date
Date of the version selection file
Date of the version selection file
File Time
Time of the version selection file
Time of the version selection file
File size
File size of the version selection file
File size of the version selection file
ROM Version
Footer information
Footer information (last file)
SP ROM Version
Footer information
Footer information (last file)
Message Conversion
For development use
For development use
Machine Name
Header information + INI file
Country
Combo box display
Combo box display
Board Name
Data Format
Header information (Binary)
Header information (Binary)
7 Browse Version File button
5 Version Folder edit box

When Select Type frame 1 is established, the
full-path folder name is displayed to reflect the
data folder and the INI file information set up in
the option window. If the transfer file exists in a
Click Browse button to open the folder selection

window and select a folder for 5 .
8 Send file information display list
folder different from the data folder, change the
List the names of files that are actually trans-
folder name to that folder by using Browse 7

or rewriting the folder name directly.
mitted when a version file is selected in 6 . A
Those transfer files in the folder that meet the

INI file conditions are listed in File list box 6 .
count of the number of files that are actually

transmitted is indicated in a checksum file
attached to each transfer file (write data). If not
all the transfer files are stored in folder 5 or if
Lists those display files existing in the folder set
extra files are included in it, the error message

Send files not found or invalid file name in the
folder is displayed. This check is not made.
in 5 .
Clicking the File Check button in 9 calculates
6 Version File selection list box
Display Files are marked by a wildcard name

(such as 85img*.b01) in the ISWTrns.INI file. If
multiple versions of a file exist in the folder,
therefore, multiple versions would appear in
this list box accordingly.
Example: 50img_dc0001AAA.bol
50img_dc002AAA.bol
The files in this list are sorted by name. When
the list opens, the last display item in the list is
preselected. Change the choice to establish
the version of transfer files to transmit.
3-12
a checksum of the display files as a whole and

compares it with the checksum stored in the
checksum file (*.SUM) attached to the transfer
file (write data), displaying the result of that
comparison.
9 File Check button

Click this button when send files are listed in
2.1.4
Parallel port setup
If a parallel data transfer is to be executed with
the Send File Info list in 8 , and a file check-
the ISW Trns program, the ECP mode setting
sum of the transfer files displayed (file checksum) is calculated and attached to each file.
of the PC parallel port should be cleared. ISW

Trns does not support parallel data transfers. If
Further, the calculated checksum is compared
a parallel data transfer is launched with the PC
with
(*.SUM)
set in ECP mode, the transfer could be aborted
attached to the transfer file (write data) to display the result of the comparison in the follow-
the
checksum
storage
file
by an error occurring in between. It would be

necessary, therefore, to disable ECP mode
ing format:
before run ISW Trns on a PC with the ECP setting.
[OK] = Matched
[NG] = Unmatched
[??] = Checksum file (*.SUM) not found
Instructions on how to disable ECP mode are

given below.
Step
Perform transmission of transfer files
Procedure
Boot the PC.
Open the System icon in the Control Panel

and click the Device Manager tab. Then,
search for LPT1 in Ports (COM/LPT1).
Note:
If LPT1 appears as ECP Printer Port
(LPT1), then it is an ECP port.
If LPT1 appears as Printer Port
(LPT1), then it is a regular parallel port.
With an ECP printer port, change the

BIOS setting of the PC to disable the ECP
port.
Note:
Because the BIOS setting depends on
the PC, check with your system administrator on how to disable ECP mode.
3-13
When the BIOS change is complete, open

the System icon in the Control panel and
change the parallel port driver.
Run a send test to verify the successful

operation.
Note:
If a transfer succeeds on one copier
model, then transfers would be successful on all models.
III SERVICE TOOL
10 File Send Button
2.2
Copying
Transfer
(Update Data)
Data
Run the ISW Trns program to copy transfer
To copy all the files (update data) displayed in the Original Files field, click
Copy All, instead of Copy.
The folder name created at ISW Trns
setup is displayed above the Copied
File field.
The transfer files that have been copied
successfully so far are listed in fullpath name in the lower part of the Copied File list view.
The transfer files that have not been
copied successfully are listed in the
Failed to Copy Files list view.
Causes of copy errors:
1. A file with the same name existed and
data (update data) to the PC.

Step
Procedure
Boot the PC.
Select ISW Trns from the Start menu to

Click the Option menu.
[Option window]
Click Copy to copy the selected transfer

files (update data) to the folder created at
ISW Trns setup.
Note:
III SERVICE TOOL
the O/W (overwrite) check box was not

checked.
2. The storage destination folder could
not be found.
3. Attempted to overwrite an overwrite
Click Data Copy.

5
protected file.
To update existing transfer files (update
data), check the O/W (overwrite) check
box.
[File Copy window]
When the copying completes, click

Refresh.
10
If more update disks are involved, repeat

Steps 5 to 9.
Mount an update disk on the PC and click

Browse.
11
Click Cancel to return to the option window.
Select the folder on drive A that contains

the transfer file (update data) as a source
file.
Note:
12
[Option window]
Click OK.
The selected folder is displayed in the

upper section in the Original Files field.
The transfer files (update data) that are
stored in the selected folder are displayed in the lower section in the Original Files field.
7
Select the transfer files (update data) you

want copied from the lower section in the
Original Files field.
Note:
You can select multiple transfer files
(update data).
To copy all the files (update data) displayed, skip this step to go to Step 8
directly.
3-14
Connecting the CF5001
2.4
The ISW connector is hidden under the drum
2.4.1
Updating
Update operation overview
Follow the steps below to update the ROM data
cover. Detach this cover to run ISW.

A. Procedure
on each control board using ISW Trns. For

more operational details, see the relevant parts
(1) Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover/

2 [2]
of this section.
Step
Procedure
Check the ROM version of the copier before

proceeding with updating.
(See 2.4.2 Checking the ROM version of
the copier (before updating).)
Run the ISW Trns program.

(See 2.4.4 Running ISW Trns.).
Set the copier in ISW receive mode.

(See 2.4.3 Preparing the copier to transfer.)
Select conditions for transfer files (update

data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.5 Selecting
transfer file (update data) conditions.)
Select a version of transfer files (update

data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.6 Selecting a
version of transfer files (update data).)
Verify the transfer files (update data)

selected with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.7Verifying transfer files (update data).
Transmit the transfer files (update data) with

IWS Trns. (See 2.4.8 Transmitting transfer
files (update data).)
To update ROM data on more control

boards, repeat Steps 3 to 7.
Exit the ISW Trns program.

(See 2.4.9 Exiting ISW Trns.)
10
Verify the ROM version of the copier after

updating. (See 2.4.10 Verifying the ROM
version of the copier (after updating).)
[1]
[2]
(2) Connect the PC port and the copier ISW connector with interface cable.
IEEE1284 port
PC
USB (TypeB) port
Interface cable
Note:
3-15
III SERVICE TOOL
2.3

2.4.2
Checking the ROM version of the copier
(before updating)
Selecting transfer file (update data)
conditions
Before updating ROM data, check the ROM
Select various conditions for selecting the
version of the existing control program in the 25

mode.
transfer files (update data) in the ISW Trns

main window. Conditions to select are:
Step
(Machine) The name of the model on which
Procedure
ROM data is updated.
Turn OFF the copier main switch.
Turn ON the copier main switch while holding down the copy count setup buttons 2
and 5, to enable 25 mode.
[25 mode menu window]

Check the ROM version by following the
copier-specific procedure.
Note:
2.4.3
(Country) The destination of the transfer files

(update data)
(Board) The name of the board on which ROM
data is updated
(Divide) The type of the transfer files (update
data)
For operating instructions, refer to the

Adjustment section of the service manual supplied for the copier.
III SERVICE TOOL
2.4.5
Step
1
Preparing the copier to transfer.
Start the copier with 25 mode enabled to put

the copier into ISW transfer wait state.
Step
Put the copier into ISW transfer wait state
by following the copier-specific procedure.
Note:
ISW transfer wait state is the state of
the copier with the START key being
shown in the display area.
2.4.4
Running ISW Trns.
Run the ISW Trns program.

Step
Procedure
Boot the PC.
Select ISW Trns from the Start menu and


In the ISW Trns main window, click
in
the [Machine] field in [Select Type] and
select the name of the model on which to
update ROM data from the pulldown
menu.
CF5001
Procedure
Procedure
3-16

in
the [Country] field in [Select Type] and
select the destination of the transfer files
(update data) from the pulldown menu.
CF5001
Euro
Japan
USA

2.4.6
Selecting a version of transfer files
(update data)
Step
Procedure

in
the [Board] field in [Select Type] and select
the name of the board on which to update
ROM from the pulldown menu.
When a transfer file (update data) has been

chosen to meet a given set of conditions, it may
be available in multiple versions. Here, select a
particular version of a transfer file (update data)
for use in the actual data transfer.
CF5001
Step
Procedure

In the ISW Trns main window, select a
transfer file (update data) of the version
that is used in the actual data transfer from
among the files listed in the [File] field in
[Version].

in
the [Divide] field in [Select Type] and select
a method of dividing the transfer files
(update data) from the pulldown menu.
50img_dc0001
2003/ 8/15
CF5001
50img_dc000.b01
CF5001
50img_dc0001.b01
50img_dc0001.b00
CF5001
Note:
USA
The version of a transfer file (update

data) can be determined from its file
name.
Example:
50img_DC001AAA.b01 .. Version 1
50img_DC002AAA.b01 .. Version 2
C1/C4(ALL)
ORIGINAL
DIVIDED
Note:
Normally, select ORIGINAL as the
method of division.
Select DIVIDED for large ROM data (e.g.
for Main Control Unit), that is divided
into several files (extension .001.b01,
etc.) to be stored to several floppy
disks for distribution.
The target file (update data) may not be

shown in the [File] field in [Version], if it
exists in a folder different from the data
folders set in the Option screen. Click
Browse and find the appropriate file to
select.
CF5001
Di850
Note:
Clicking Browse will open the Select
File window.
3-17
III SERVICE TOOL
USA

2.4.7
Verifying transfer files (update data)
2.4.8
Transmitting transfer files (update data)
Once a particular version of a transfer file
When transfer files (update data) are estab-
(update data) is selected, the transfer files
lished, run a data transfer to the copier.
(update data) that are transmitted actually are

listed in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main
window. Verify the validity of the transfer files
Step
Procedure
Press the START key on the copier while

it is in ISW transfer wait state.
Note:
The START key is displayed in the
display area on the copier.
(data) for transfer.

Step
1
Procedure
In the ISW Trns main window, click File
Check in [Send File Infor]..
50img_dc0001
2003/ 8/15

Click File Send in [Send File Infor] in the
ISW Trns main window.
CF5001
50img_dc000.b01
50img_dc0001
2003/ 8/15
CF5001
50img_dc000.b01
CF5001
50img_dc0001.b01
50img_dc0001.b00
CF5001
III SERVICE TOOL
50img_dc0001.b01
50img_dc0001.b00
Check to see if OK appears in the [File

Sum] field in [Send File Infor] in the ISW
Trns main window.
Note:
Transfer files (update data) are transmitted to

the copier.
Note7: While data is being transferred to a
copier, an LED or indicator flashes
to indicate a data transfer in
progress. The mode of such indication varies from one copier to
another.
Note8: ISW Trns produces an indication to
designate a data transfer in
progress.
Note9: If a data transfer is aborted due to
any trouble occurring with the copier
or ISW Trns, turn the copier main
switch OFF, then ON to retry the
data transfer by ISW Trns. In this
case, a condition indication and
necessary operation vary depending on each model. Please refer to
service manual for the copier.
To update ROM data on more control boards,

repeat the step in 2.4.5 Selecting transfer file
(update data) conditions, to 2.4.8 Transmitting transfer files (update data).
A file that is labeled NG is inappropriate

as a transfer file (update data). Try to
copy the file again. If you can not succeed to copy it again, the original file
may be corrupted.
Transfer files (update data) may be
marked ?? when enough information is
not available to verify their validity.
When a transfer file is labeled, check if
the checksum file (*.sum) was copied
correctly.
3-18

2.4.9

2.4.10
Exiting ISW Trns.

When the update of the ROM data on the control boards completes, exit the ISW Trns program.
Step
Verifying the ROM version of the copier
(after updating)
When the update of the ROM data completes,
verify the ROM version of the control program
in the 25 mode.
Procedure
Exit the ISW Trns program.
Turn OFF the PC.
Disconnect the parallel interface cable

from the PC and the copier.
Note:
Turn OFF the PC and copier before disconnecting the parallel interface cable
from them.
Procedure

Check the ROM version by following the
copier-specific procedure.
Note:
III SERVICE TOOL
Step
3-19
2.5
ISW Trns Messages
The ISW Trns program displays dialogue messages when errors occur and when processing ends. Definitions of these messages are listed below, along with the associated display status.
III SERVICE TOOL
Message
Display status
Cannot open a checksum file
Opening of a checksum file failed. Possible causes

include a corrupted file and a file in use.
Cannot read a checksum file
Loading of a checksum file into memory failed. Possible

causes include a shortage of memory and an OS problem.
Cannot open a file
Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a

corrupted file and a file in use.
File transmission complete
File transfer completed.
Cannot open the LPT port
Opening of the LPT port failed.
Communications port setup acquisition

error
A call to GetCommSate failed.
Communications port setup error
A call to GetCommSate failed.
Cannot open a send file
Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a

corrupted file and a file in use.
Cannot send a Term Test file
Transmission of a communications test block failed.

1. The copier is not ready to receive.
2. The cable is out of position.
3. Transmission of the wrong send file was attempted.
Unsuccessful file transmission
The transmission of a send file failed. Possible causes

include a cable out of position.
Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT port
Output to the LPT port failed. Possible causes include a

cable out of position.
Starting file transmission. OK?
A message seeking confirmation at the start of file

transmission.
Send file not selected
No files exist on the send file list.
Canceled
Transmission of a file in progress was canceled. CANCEL is normally hidden. Its setting can be altered with
the INI file.
Default data folder created
A data folder was created by clicking Create Folder.
Invalid folder name
An invalid folder name was entered. Start a folder name

with a drive name, such as C:\.
Default data folder not set.

Set a folder.
A data folder is not set in ISWTrns.INI. This message is

displayed when ISW Trns launches for the fist time.
Unsuccessful thread creation
The creation of a thread failed.
Copying the selected file. OK?
File copy start message
Copying all files to the default data folder.

OK?
File copy start message
No send file available
No file to copy file is selected or exists in the folder.
3-20
Message
Display status
1. The destination folder does not exist.
2. When the Overwrite check box is not checked, an
attempt is made to copy to a file having the same file
name.
3. An attempt is made to overwrite a protected file
4. Any other cause (such as a file being used by another
application or OS problem)
File copying end
File copying completed.
Send file not found, or invalid file name in

the folder. Check.
The number of divisions of a send file recorded in the

folder. Check. checksum file and the number of files
actually existing do not
match.
1. A file having an invalid file name exists in the data
folder. Delete possibly invalid file names from the
folder list.
2. The number of files in a divided file is wanting. Identify the wanting files in the folder list and recopy them.
III SERVICE TOOL
Unable to copy several files
3-21
2.6
Troubleshooting ISW Trns
2.6.5
Unsuccessful file transfer
A. Cannot open a file error

If errors occur while running the ISW Trns pro-
The file is used by any other program or by the
gram, take the actions suggested below to cor-
system.
Close that other program. If the file transfer.
rect them.
still fails, reboot Windows.
2.6.1
Unable to run ISW Trns
Corrupted ISWTrns.EXE file
B. Cannot send a Term Test file error
Set up again.
The cable is not in firm position.

Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm
The setup disk is corrupted.

Verify the setup disk and then set up again.
position or if the cable is not impaired.
2.6.2
Send file is not displayed when a
combo box item is selected
The send file is not stored in the folder.
Check to see if the send file is stored in the folder
III SERVICE TOOL
appearing in the [Folder] text box in [Versions].

Use the [File Copy] function if the file storage
The copier is not ready to receive.

Check to see if the copier is ready to receive.
C. Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT
port error
The cable is not in firm position.
Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm.
location is unknown.
Check to see if the base data folder setting in the
position or if the cable is not impaired.

Invalid data has been transmitted.
option window is not wrong.

Verify the base folder setting. Use the [File Copy]
Check to from the file information window to see
function if the file storage location is unknown.

Invalid file name (altered)
The file name of a file must be used exactly as it
is delivered. If a file is renamed, it cannot be
displayed or selected. If a file name has been
Invalid folder name (altered)
If a folder as created with [Make Folder] in the
check with its vendor.

The PC parallel port is set in ECP mode.
Compatibility between the PC parallel port and

the copier port.
option window is renamed, it cannot be located.

Restore the original folder name and check.
Verify by testing on a PC with proven trans

mission performance.
Use a cable shorter than 2 meters in length.
NG produced by a file check
Corrupted send file

Copy the file again and recheck. If NG recurs,
2.7
check with the vendor of that file.

2.6.4
copier and the send file on the PC match.

If the file is transmitted for the first time,
Consulting the manual, free the parallel port from

ECP mode.
altered, return it to its original file name.
2.6.3
if the receive mode (receiving board type) of the
?? produced by a file check
Connecting to the ISW connector
The ISW connector is at the right side of the
With any other model, the checksum file (*.SUM)

had not been copied when the send file was copied to the PC.
Copy the checksum to the same folder as the file
is copied. It would be copied automatically if the
[File Copy] function is used.
3-22
copier.
2.7.1
Procedure
Connect the PC port and the copier ISW port
with a interface cable.
Connect port is correct.
Use the USB port or Parallel port.
INTERNET ISW
3 INTERNET ISW
3.1
What is the Internet ISW?
The Internet ISW is the system to perform ISW, by indicating ISW using the Internet mail (E-mail) or
browser to let copier automatically acquire the subject program from program server and rewrite its own
program.
With this Internet ISW, you can update copier's programs just by transmitting E-mail with simple keyword
described, without visiting customer's office. With the Web function, you can perform the ISW on customer
site, without carrying the actual programs with you.
3.2
Operating environment
To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must be satisfied.
A. The copier is connected to a built in network where programs can be downloaded from the
Internet using ftp or http protocol. *1
B. The Internet ISW does not function in copier under the following conditions.
(2) The main switch (SW2) is OFF.
(3) The copier is shut OFF by the auto shut off function.
*1
Programs can be downloaded using Firewall.

Note:
The Internet ISW does not function even if the copier receives the Internet ISW designating mail,
as long as it is in any of the above conditions. The Internet ISW starts when the above conditions are released.
However, the mails are able to have period of validity.
The Internet ISW continues to function in the condition of a paper jam or SC occurs, or in the
low power mode.
3.3
Main features
With the Internet ISW, the following functions are available.

A. Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system *2
By sending simple keywords to a copier by E-Mail, the programs in the copier are rewritten automatically.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. *3
(1) Overall control board (I)
(2) Printer control board (C)
(3) Operation board /1 (O)
(4) RADF control board (F)
(5) FNS control board (N)
*
To use the function, the E-Mail remote notification system must be setup separately.
The available boards are different depending on the copier models.
2
3
B. Internet ISW using Web utility

By accessing copier main body's homepage via PC web browser, programs in the copier are rewritten
automatically. To use the function, a Web terminal that is networked to the copier is necessary. *4
4
In case it is connected to a LAN, it can only be used within the LAN.
3-23
III SERVICE TOOL
(1) The reset switch (SW1) is OFF.
INTERNET ISW
3.4
Initial setting
To use the Internet ISW, the related settings such as network parameter, program server address, firewall
address must be performed in the copier main body beforehand.
Also, to use the [1.1 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system], the related settings such as
account registration must be set on the mail server separately.
For the details, please refer to "3. Mail remote notification system".
3.4.1
Setting on Control panel
First, set the copier's IP address on the control panel, to network the copier. If it has already been set, go
to "2.4.2 Setting on Web brouser".
a.
Procedure
1. Select "Key operator mode" on the control panel.
III SERVICE TOOL
2. Select "[1] System initial setting".

3. Select "[3] IP address setting".
4. Enter [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address]. *5
5. Reboot the copier.
*
Copier's IP address, etc. are usually assigned by the system administrator.

For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator.
3.4.2
Setting on Web browser
Next, set the program server, etc. from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, prepare a networked
PC *6.
*
Prepare a PC by borrowing customer's PC or carrying laptop PC, for example.

(Considerations)
In any setting item, space cannot be set.
If there is a mistake in input process on the Web browser, be sure to correct it according to error mes-
sage displayed. If the mistake is left without correction, program download error may occur.
Web's layout may change without prior notice.
3-24

a.
INTERNET ISW
Procedure
1. Start the Web browser. *7
2. Specify the copier's IP address that you have entered at "2.4.1 Setting on Control panel".
If you access the copier's http address, the [Main page] as the top figure on next page appears.
If proxy is set on the web browser, it may not be able to access the copier's http address (web page).
For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator. As Web browser, Internet Explorer
or Netscape is recommended.
Do not perform setting from two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web Utility Main Page

3. On the [Main page], click the [Environment setup], to display [Login to Environment setup] page.
Login window to Environment setting
3-25
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
4. On [Login to Environment setup] page, enter the key operator password (the same password as key
operator mode password) and click Apply. The environment setup list appears. Then click [Extension
for maintenance].
III SERVICE TOOL
Environment setup screen

5. On [Login to Extension for maintenance] page, enter the password (the same password as mode
change menu password) and click Apply. The environment setting list appears. Then click [Internet
ISW].
Login window to Extension for maintenance
Extension for maintenance screen
3-26
INTERNET ISW
III SERVICE TOOL
6. Click [Initial Setting].
Internet ISW main screen

7. Set proxy server.
When you don't use proxy server (firewall), go to Step 9.
3-27
INTERNET ISW
Enableproxy
Select [no] if you do not use proxy

Select [Use ftp proxy] if you use ftp proxy
Select [Use http proxy] if you use http proxy
Proxy server Type *8
If you selected [Use ftp proxy] for [Use of proxy], select the type of proxy
from the following.
Type1 [USER USER@HOST]
Type2 [OPEN HOSTNAME]
Type3 [FW USERNAMEFW PASSWORDSITE HOSTNAME]
Type4 [FW USERNAMEFW PASSWORDUSER USER@HOST]
Proxy server IP Address

Port Number
If you use proxy server, enter the IP address of the proxy server.
If you use proxy server, set the port No. that is used by the proxy server.
User name on the proxy
If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set an account
server
name for the proxy server.
III SERVICE TOOL
Password for the proxy server If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set a password
for the proxy server.
*
Types 2, 3 and 4 are not guaranteed.

When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.
If all are fine, click [Next]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red.
8. Set the program server. (Proxy server is used)
3-28
Program server address
INTERNET ISW
Enter the address of the server where programs to download are stored.
Select the protocol you use from the drop down list at the left and enter
the following address in the test box at the right.
In case of ftp, it is the relative path from the home directory.
Example: ftp://210.226.5.5/EUR/8050/
User name on the program

server
Enter the account name of the program server.
Password for the program
Enter the program server password.
server
Receiving time out
Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)

If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-
9. Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)
Protocol
Select a protocol to receive programs.
Program server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the server where programs to download are
Target directory
stored.
For http, enter path that follows the host domain. For ftp, enter the relative path from the home directory.
Example: EUR/8050/
User name on the program

server
Enter the account name of the program server.
Password for the Program
Enter the program server password.
server
Receiving time out
Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)

If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
3-29
III SERVICE TOOL
sage in red.
INTERNET ISW
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red.
10. Perform the download test.
This test downloads "test.dat" from the program server set in the initial setting, to ensure all items
have been set appropriately. If the download test fails, check the setting items again according to the
error message.
When the test finished successfully, the communication speed and estimated download time are displayed
III SERVICE TOOL
as shown below. Draw upon the data to decide [Reception timeout].
3-30
INTERNET ISW
If the download test fails, response error code sent from the server is displayed as follows. There may be
III SERVICE TOOL
input errors. Check the initial setting again.
3-31
INTERNET ISW
3.5
3.5.1
Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system

Function
Customer engineer sends an E-mail with simple keyword description. Then, the copier that received the
mail downloads specified program from the program server and rewrites its program.
This function is executed by a different command (keyword) from the list print acquisition function of the [EMail remote notification system].
A. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows.
(1) Overall control board: I0
(2) Printer control board: C0
(3) Operation board /1: O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5
(4) RADF control board: F0
(5) FNS control board: N0
B. You can acquire version information of programs to be rewritten.
III SERVICE TOOL
C. You can find out how to use [Internet ISW] by mail.

To use the above functions, it is necessary to send the copier E-mail with the specified simple keyword
(command) description. The following are the commands and the options.
Command
ISW
Option
Subject board name
Description
Specifies name of a board to ISW. (must be entered)
The specifiable boards are as follows.
[I0, C0, O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5, F0, N0]
The available boards are different depending on models. File name can be specified with "=" as [Subject
board name=File name].
Timeout
Specifies period of validity of mail.

(From 5 to 1,440 minutes. Unit is minute. If none is
specified, timeout takes place at 90 minutes.)
When the time from mail transmission by CE to mail
reception at copier exceeds the specified period, ISW is
not performed due to expiration.
ISWHELP
Returns a help mail with the above command use

descriptions.
When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set
beforehand.
I0
bootI1.bin
C0
bootC1.bin
O0
O1
bootO0.bin
bootO1.bin
O2
bootO2.bin
O3
bootO3.bin
O4
O5
bootO4.bin
bootO5.bin
3-32
F0
bootF1.bin
N0
bootN1.bin

3.5.2
INTERNET ISW
Transmitting E-Mail
The following is an example of transmitting an E-mail with the aforementioned command to a copier.
You can use either upper and lower case characters when typing a command (option) in E-mail. *9
When transmitting an E-mail to a copier, take care of the following.
The ISW-designated mail has the period of validity. Therefore, set the date of mailer and time zone of
the copier *10 accurately.
One mail can be described with only one ISW command. If two or more commands are described,
the second and later ones are ignored.
Any mail software can be used. For example, mobile device mail, browser mail and so on.
With the mail software in use, transmit mails in text mode.
(Commands in mails in HTML mode cannot be handled correctly.)
Place at least one space or TAB *11 between command and option, and option and option described
in mails.
Type every command in mails only with alphanumeric one-byte characters (ASCII characters). If other
Type every command in mails from the line head. Line head starting with a space or TAB is ignored.
Do not attach files or others to the mails transmitted to copiers.

Depending on the size of files, such mails may be handled as illegal mails and copier may refuse to
receive.
Do not type signatures in the mails transmitted to copiers. If auto signature addition is set on the mail
software, turn off the setting. Signatures may be handled as commands and error mails may be
returned from the copier.
Case sensitivity is on for the file name. Take care when typing.
10
*
11
Set in the E-mail transmission setting for [E-mail transmission setting].

Linefeed is not available.
Two-byte characters also cause errors. Take care not to use them.
12
(1) Transmitting ISW command

The transmission mail must have the following descriptions.
In Subject, type a CE password that has been entered in the mail reception setting.
For the details, please refer to the "3. E-Mail remote notification system".
In To, type mail address of a copier.

In Body, type a command.
3-33
III SERVICE TOOL
characters *12 are typed, an error mail with [Command not found] is returned.
INTERNET ISW
An example of I0 ISW:
Copier's mail address
Password for authentication

aaaaa.com
Command
An example of return mail (ISW start) *13
III SERVICE TOOL
When the copier allows the ISW, it moves into the ISW mode, displaying [Remote ISW executing] on the
operation panel. The copier cannot be used while it is in the ISW mode. *14 Then, a mail like the following
is returned from the copier.
The return mail is in English regardless of the language selected for the copier's main body operation
panel display.
During the ISW, main switch (SW2) of the copier does not function. The copier cannot be shutdown.
13
14
3-34
INTERNET ISW
An example of return mail (ISW complete)

When ISW completes and copier reboots automatically, a mail like the following is returned from the copier.
III SERVICE TOOL
You can confirm that the ROM version is upgraded.
However, if transmission of the above two kinds of return mails fails, the mails are not retransmitted.
When specifying a file name
When specifying a file name for ISW command, type the name with "=" following the subject board name.
In this case, "65FAI012UGH0.bin" must exist in the program server address that has been set in the Internet ISW setting.
Transmission mail
ISW I0 = 65FAI012UGH0.bin 30
When transmission mail exceeds the period of validity
On ISW command, period of validity (timeout) can be changed set for every mail. (Default: 90 minutes) If
period from the mail transmission to mail reception at copier (duration) is longer than the timeout period,
ISW is not performed by that mail.
3-35
INTERNET ISW
Transmission mail
aaaaa.com
III SERVICE TOOL
5 minutes is set for timeout
Return mail
aaaaa.com
Timeout took place as 6 minutes had passed.
3-36
INTERNET ISW
(2) Transmitting ISWHELP command

Manual that shows how to use command is returned by mail.
It is useful if you forget how to use command and options.
Transmission mail
ISWHelp
III SERVICE TOOL
Return mail
3-37
INTERNET ISW
3.6
3.6.1
Internet ISW using Web utility

Function
Using the copier's web utility, just by clicking on the browser *15, customer engineer can let the copier
automatically download programs from the program server and rewrite its own programs.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten are the same as those of [Internet ISW using E-mail
remote notification system].
15 Usually, it is not possible to access company-inside copier from outside exceeding firewall.
3.6.2
How to use
A. Going to Internet ISW page

The same as instructed in "2.4 Initial Setting", go to the [Internet ISW] page on the Web browser.
III SERVICE TOOL
aaaaa.com
Internet ISW main screen

Next to each board name, the program version is displayed.
3-38
INTERNET ISW
B. Performing ISW
From the [ISW] items, select a board to ISW and check the box. When specifying a name of file to download, type the name in the text box of [File name]. When no file name is specified, the following files are
acquired from the program server address set beforehand.
I0
bootI1.bin
C0
bootC1.bin
O0
bootO0.bin
O1
O2
bootO1.bin
bootO2.bin
O3
bootO3.bin
O4
bootO4.bin
O5
bootO5.bin
F0
bootF1.bin
N0
bootN1.bin
When the above input completes, click [ISW].

C. Starting ISW
When ISW starts, the following screen appears. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item
III SERVICE TOOL
according to the message in red.
ISW execution screen

When ISW completes successfully, the copier automatically reboots.
If you click [Check status], you can check the current ISW status.
If you click [Cancel], you can stop the ISW only while program is being downloaded
3-39
INTERNET ISW
III SERVICE TOOL
D. Checking ISW status
ISW status check screen

This screen shows the current performance or error. The display items are as follows.
ISW is downloading
ISW is writing
Finished *16
ISW was cancelled due to transferring problem

ISW was cancelled due to transferring overtime
16
ISW was cancelled due to writing problem to flash memory

Copier reboots after ISW completes normally. Do not click [Refresh] on the browser.
E. Ending ISW
When ISW completes and copier reboots, ensure that the program version is upgraded on the [Internet
ISW main screen].
3-40
3.7
3.7.1
INTERNET ISW
Precautions for use

Prior announcement to administrator
When performing the Internet ISW, be sure to contact the copier's administrator or the like and get his/her
agreement beforehand.
Perform ISW in condition that the copier is not being used.
If the copier is being used (a job is being processed), the Internet ISW is not performed.
3.7.2
If power failure occurs during data rewriting
While ISW rewriting is in progress *17, the operation panel and main switch (SW2) are locked. However, if
the main power goes down due to power failure or other, the copier becomes unable to start up. *18
This is only the problem on rewriting the overall control board and the operation board/1. Even if errors
occur on rewriting other boards, the boards can be overwritten again with the Internet ISW.
If the copier becomes unable to start for the above reason, go to the copier's site and rewrite the program
using the ISWTrns.
Operation board /1: Turn ON the main switch (SW2) while pressing HELP and CHECK
button and then perform ISW.
For the details, please refer to "1. ISW"
*
Rewriting takes maximum 10 minute.
No problem is cased by power failure during program downloading process.
17
18
3.7.3
ISW of multiple programs
It is not possible with the Internet ISW to ISW several programs concurrently. Always perform ISW one by
one. If several programs must be rewritten at the same time, perform ISW from board of higher priority. *19
Priority 1
RADF control board (F), FNS control board (N)
Priority 2
Priority 3
Printer control board (C), Operationboard/1 (O)

Overall control board (I)
When rewriting several programs, SC may occur during rewriting intervals between programs.
However, such SC will clear when all the subject programs are rewritten.
*
19
In case of the Internet ISW using the E-mail remote notification system, the sequence of transmitted
ISW designating mails and mails received by copier may change. Transmit multiple mails while ensuring reception of completion mail or putting enough intervals.
3.7.4
If ISW fails in low power mode
If ISW fails due to errors in program download, data check, and so on, the copier recovers into normal
mode. Only in low power mode, the copier reboots when ISW fails.
3-41
III SERVICE TOOL
<How to recover> Overall control board : Turn ON the main switch (SW2) and then perform ISW.
INTERNET ISW
3.8
3.8.1
Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW

What is a proxy server?
It is a server that receives request (HTTP or FTP etc) from a client inside the firewall, and represents the
client. With this server, access to outside the firewall is enabled.
3.8.2
Authentication of proxy server
Following are the lists of commands of each authentication type:

All the 4 types below are supported in the Internet ISW.
3.8.3
Type and command list for authentication on proxy server
The following shows the brief description of each authentication type and the list of commands being used.
III SERVICE TOOL
A. Type 1: USER user@host

This type does not require an authentication to the proxy sever when accessing outside via proxy.
In case it is possible to access outside via proxy server without entering user name and password of the
proxy server, this type may be used.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
USER
user@host
331
Sends user name of the program server and program
PASS
password
230
server's address
Sends password for the above user name
B. Type 2: OPEN host

It is almost the same as Type 1. The only difference is a command at the authentication.
Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 1.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
OPEN
host
ftp expanded
function:
Sends program server's address
Defined by
each server
USER
PASS
user
password
331
230
Sends user name of the program sever

3-42
INTERNET ISW
C. Type 3: FW user FW password SITE host

This type requires an authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing outside.
It is necessary to enter information of the server that you wish to access, user name and password of the
proxy sever (firmware).
In case the user name and password of the proxy server are required when accessing outside via proxy
sever, this type may be used.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
USER
PASS
FW user
FW password
331
230
Sends user name of the proxy server

SITE
host
ftp expanded
Sends program server's address
function:
USER
user
331
Sends user name of the program sever
PASS
password
230
D. FW user name FW password USER user@host

It is almost the same as Type 3. The only difference is a command at the authentication.
Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 3.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
USER
PASS
FW user
FW password
331
230
Sends user name of the proxy server

USER
user@host
331
Sends user name of the program server and program
PASS
password
230
server's address
3.8.4
Remarks
For fwtk2.1 (for unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), authentication Type 1 is used.
Type 1 is used in many proxy servers.

If you are not sure about the authentication type of the proxy server, KC recommends that you use
Type 1 in the meantime.
3-43
III SERVICE TOOL
Defined by
each server
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
4 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

4.1
What is the Mail remote notification system?
Mail remote notification system allows to acquire machine data, that have been available as "List Output
Mode" in 36 mode from copier, through internet mail (E-mail). This function is achieved without visiting
customer site and printing on paper if the simple keyword is e-mailed.
4.2
Operation environment
Following conditions should be satisfied in order to use mail remote notification system. The function
works during JAM, SC or Low power mode, but does not work during shut-off. However, the sent mail does
not disappear and the copier process the mail after next starting up. During low power mode, the machine
operation is as usual.
A. The mail server *1 that allows copier to receive mail in POP3 or IMAP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can receive external mail and service constantly.)
B. The mail server *2 that allows copier to transmit mail in SMTP protocol.
III SERVICE TOOL
(It is preferred that mail server can send external mail and service constantly.).
C. Mail remote notification system disabling conditions on copier are as follows.
(1) Main power switch is OFF.
(2) Sub power switch is OFF.
*
Popper, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. Assign one account per one copier. It can be the same machine
*2
to the SMTP server. "Mail remote notification system" corresponds to "POP before SMTP".
Sendmail 8.9, qmail, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. It can be the same machine to the receiving
server.
4.3
Initial setting
In order to use Mail remote notification system, settings such as network parameter on copier and account
registration on mail server are necessary.
A. Setting on operation panel
In order to connect the copier main body to network, IP address of the copier should be set on operation panel. If it is already set, please go to "B. Setting on Web.
a.
Procedure
1. Select [Key operator mode] on operation panel.
2. Select [1. System initial setting].
3. Select [3. IP address setting].
4. Input [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]*1.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
System administrator usually assigns IP address and network related setting to copier. Please ask system administrator for details.
3-44
B. Setting on Web
Next, input setting for mail server from Web browser. Please use PC*2 connected to the network in
order to use Web browser.
*
Prepare PC; borrow the customer's one or bring notebook computer.

Note:
No blank space should be entered for any column. Following characters cannot be used for the
E-mail address.
()<> ;:"[]
When the error message is displayed on the web browser, correct the input error following to the
message. If the error is not corrected, mail sending or receiving may fail.
Web design is subject to change without notice.
(1) How to set
a.
Procedure
2. Type IP address of the copier you input to the [A. Setting on operation panel].
When accessing Web, the [main page] (see upper figure in next page) is displayed.
If proxy is set on Web browser, it may not possible to access web utilities of copier. Please ask system
administrator for details. KC recommends to use Internet explorer or Netscape as the Web browser. Do
not perform setting from the two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web utilities main page
3-45
III SERVICE TOOL
1. Start up Web browser *1.
3. In [Main] page, click [Environment Setup] button and display [Environment setup log in] page.
Environment setup log in page
III SERVICE TOOL
4. Input key operator password in [Environment setup log in] page, then click [Apply].
[Environment set up] page is displayed. Then click [E-Mail transmission setting].
Even key operator password set "0000" in 25-mode setting, input "0000".
Environment setup page
3-46
5. Set the transmission setting.

In order to use Mail remote notification system, registration of E-mail address of manager (machine
administrator), and sending (SMTP) server input is mandatory.
Manager Address *1
To specify E-mail address of machine manager.
DNS Server IP Address
The e-mail address to notify error from SMTP.

Input as needed. If not needed, leave it blank.
Time difference *1
The send time of mail is calculated referring this value.

Input the time difference from UTC within the range -1200 (12h00min) to +1200 (+12h00min).
If setting is not made, it is +0000 (the same as UTC).
For example, the time difference in New York is -5 hours, - 500 is
input.
Sending mail (SMTP) sever *1

Condition Informing Address *1
The IP address of SMTP sever.

It is for mail transmission system. *2
You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
It is for mail transmission system. *2
You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
*1
The same setting can be set on LCD of the copier. But do not set concurrently from web browser and
Web.
*2
Please see the "INSTRUCTION MANUAL" of copier if use the mail transmission system.
E-Mail transmission setting page
3-47
III SERVICE TOOL
E-Mail Transmission *1
III SERVICE TOOL
6. Click [Apply] button to finish input.
3-48
(2) Test mail sending

Click [Sending test] button and then a test mail is sent to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [Manager
address] set on Step5. Click [Sending test] to display result of the test mail. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message.
a.
Procedure
1. Set the reception setting.
In the [Extension for maintenance] column at the bottom of the page, input the password to change
the mode then click the initial setting.
III SERVICE TOOL
Use the password for changing modes.
Extension for maintenance page (for customer engineer)
3-49
The records of sent and received mails listed on mail log on the [Extension for maintenance] page are the
latest 10 mails. Even the main power switch is turned OFF, the communication is logged and kept though
III SERVICE TOOL
there are some restrictions.
E-Mail reception setting page
3-50
2. Set the e-mail reception screen based on the following.

Enable E-mail notification
Select [Yes] to use Mail remote notification system.

Default is [No].
Interval between fetching mails
Interval between checking mail on receiving mail server from copier.

The interval can be set within the range from 1 min. to 60 min.
Receiving mail server
Usually, set around 10 min. considering load for network.

The IP address of receiving mail server.
Kind of mail spool
Select [POP3] or [IMAP]. Default is [POP3].
User name on the server *1
The account name for copier assigned on receiving mail server.
Password *2
E-Mail Address of this copy
The password for the above user name.

E-mail address of the copier.
machine
Usually, the name is [User name@receiving mail server name].
Nickname *3
The name added to the mail subject sent from the copier.
CE Password *2
It can be blank.
Input password used for the "Subject" of the mail sent to the copier.
The copier uses this password for security check.
- No
- Only illegal mails
Default (Do not send the e-mail to the administrator)

Specify whether to transfer mail in following conditions; When the
- All mails
mail received by copier does not match to the registered password or

the mail size is 10 k-byte or larger.
Administrator E-Mail address
Transfer all sending mails from Mail remote notification system.

Input address for the transfer if above [Only illegal mail] or [all mails]
is selected.
Announce delay time in reply mail
Select whether to contain the time difference from CE`s transmission
*4
and copier reception on the mail.

Default is [No].
Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP
Select whether SMTP server transmits the mail after POP (IMAP)
server attests.
Default is [Yes].
1
2
*
*
*4
Consult system administrator and create mail account for copier on receiving mail server.
No echo back from the password.
Use it as identifier, when managing multiple copiers.
Use it to check the copier. is turned ON or not. If the time of the copier or the mail application software
is not set correctly (including time difference), wrong time is described. In that case, select [No].
3. Click "Apply" to finish input.
3-51
III SERVICE TOOL
Also Notice to the administrator (CC mail)
4. Test mail sending and receiving.

Click [Sending and receiving test] button and then sending and receiving tests are performed by one
transaction. It checks whether the sent mail is correctly received. Click [Sending and receiving test]
to display result of the test. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message.
Sending mail test
Mail sending test is performed to SMTP server.

Test mail is sent to [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on
Step2.
Receiving mail test
Receiving test from receiving mail server is performed.

Test mail is received by [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set
on Step2.
III SERVICE TOOL
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
3-52
4.4
How to use the Mail remote notification system
A. Function
CE can use following functions of Mail remote notification system by e-mailing simple keyword to copier.
CE can receive the data of the desired copier data list by the e-mail.
JOB memory list
User management list
Font pattern list
Adjustment data list
Parameter list
E.K.C. management list
Counter list
In order to use above function, the simple keyword (command) must be sent by e-mail.
The following table shows the command and options.
Command
GETLOG
Options
Explanation
Minimum
[List output]
The [List output] specified by the following is returned by
JOB
USER
[JOB memory list]

[User management list]
J
U
FONT
[Font pattern list]
MANAGEMENT
[Machine management list 1]
ADJUSTMENT
PARAMETER
[Adjustment data list]

[Parameter list]
A
P
EKC
[EKC management list]
mail.
CHPASS
HELP
2MANAGEMENT
[Machine management list 2]
COUNTER
[Counter list]
PIXEL
ALL
[Pixel ratio data list]

All of above list data.
PI
AL
Not specified
Edited [Counter list] for the cellular phone display.
[OldPasswd] [New-
To change the password used to certify mail.
Passwd]
[OldPasswd]
Specify current password
[NewPasswd]
Specify new password
Not specified
Help mail explaining usage of the above commands is sent. H
3-53
III SERVICE TOOL
Pixel ratio data list
B. Send mails
The example of the mail containing the command to the copier is shown. The command and option on
the mail are recognized by the top letters without distinction between capital and small letters. Accordingly, not all letters of the command must be typed. It is recognized by the minimum letters in the above
table *1. When sending mail to the copier, please note followings.
Note:
Mail software on any OS, handy terminal, free-mail using browser can be used without any difference.
When sending mail on mail software, be sure to use text mode.
(Mail in HTML mode cannot be handle properly.)
As for the reception on mail software, the desirable maximum displayable letters per one line is 128
and over (single-byte).
(The length of the one line reaches to 128 letters in the part of the data list mail. Accordingly, mail
may not be easily seen on the cellular phone or other mobile devices.)
Put minimum one space or TAB*2 between the command and option on the mail.
Use only single-byte alphanumeric character (ASCII character) for the command on mail. Other-
III SERVICE TOOL
wise, an error mail, [Command Not Found], is returned.

Type command from the beginning of the line. If the line starts with blank or TAB, the line is
ignored.
Maximum number of commands that can be contained in one mail is 10. The eleventh and onwards
commands are ignored.
Do not attach file to the mail sent to the copier. Depending on file size, it is handled as illegal mail.
Do not attach signature to the mail sent to the copier. If automatic attachment of the signature is
already set to the mail software, change the setting not to attach the signature. The signature is
regarded as command and error mail may be returned.
While copier is sending or receiving the mail, if the power switch of the copier is turned OFF or list
output is performed on the copier, two mails may be returned.
The maximum number of the mails that copier receives from the mail server is 5 per one time. If the
mail server has more received mails at a time, remaining mails are processed after the [interval
between fetching mails].
*
1
2
Example: All of G, GE, GET, GETL, GETLO, GETLOG equal to specify GETLOG.
Return cannot be used.
3-54
(1) Send GETLOG command

Following should be described in the sending mail.
Subject: Input "CE password" set in reception setting.
To: Input E-mail address of the copier.

Body: Input command.
Example of mail requesting counter list
Mail address
of the copier
CE password
Command
3-55
III SERVICE TOOL
a.

b.
Example of mail requesting counter list*1
Serial number
of copier
Mail address of
the sender
III SERVICE TOOL
Nickname of
the copier
Requested
counter list
Language of the returned mail is English only.
3-56

When option is not specified
GETLOG command without option is specified, Counter list for the cellular phone display is returned.
Sending mail [GetLog]
Example of returned mail
III SERVICE TOOL
c.
3-57

d.
To receive multiple data list

Data lists in reply to GETLOG command are separately returned by mails; one list per mail. If the
same list is requested twice or more in a mail, the list is returned only once.
When followings are described in a mail, both counter list mail and machine management list 1 mail
are returned.
[GetLog Counter]
[GetLog Management]
When the commands are written in one line continuously, Management (the later command) is ignored
and only counter list (the first command) is returned.
[GetLog Counter Management]
e.
When unrecognizable option is specified.

Sending mail
[GetLog Log]
Returned mail
III SERVICE TOOL
[Option Not Found GetLog Log]

(2) Send CHPASS command
The sending mail password described on the subject can be changed remotely. Specify 20 or less letters to [OldPasswd] and [NewPasswd]. Use ASCII characters except space.
Password cannot be changed by mail if you don't remember the old password. Change the [CE password] from the browser, explained in Chapter 2.
a.
Example of correct password change

In this case, old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].
Sending mail
[ChPass U-BIX Sitios]
Returned mail
[SE's Password was changed successfully. New Password [Sitios]]
When the password is changed, use [NewPasswd] from the next mail. When the mail is sent with [OldPasswd], it is treated as illegal mail.
b.
Example of invalid password change

Old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Returned mail
[Old Password is Invalid. ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Then, password was not changed. Accordingly, the password is unchanged and [U-BIX].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios]
Returned mail
[Violation on format by new password. ChPass Sitios]
When the new password is blank, password is not changed.
3-58
(3) Send HELP command

The manual describing above usage of the commands is returned by mail. Use this function when you
forget how to use command and option.
III SERVICE TOOL
Sending mail [Help]

Returned mail
4.5
Disabling system
In order to disable Mail remote notification system, in Mail reception setting, select [No] for the "Enable
E-Mail notification" and then click [Apply] button.
3-59
III SERVICE TOOL
Blank page
3-60
SERVICE SCHEDULE
IV SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.1
Service schedule
Guarantee period (5 years or 5,000,000 copies)
Main
body
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
Periodic check (1)
Every 200,000
copies
Periodic check (2)
Every 400,000
copies
Periodic check (3)
Every 600,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
Service
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
z z
Periodic check (4)

Every 1,000,000
copies
Periodic check (5)

Every 1,500,000
copies
z z
24
times
12
times
Periodic check (7)

Every 2,500,000
copies
z z z z z z z z z z z
Periodic check (1) *1

Every 1,800,000
copies
z z z z
3
times
2
times
1
time
Periodic check (8)

Every 4,000,000
copies
*1
4
times
Periodic check (6)

Every 2,000,000
copies
Maintenance
AFR-20 *1 Every 100,000
copies
8
times
49
times
1
time
z z
49
times
2
times
Perform the periodic check (1) for the AFR-20 at 2 times (1,800,000 copies and 3,600,000 copies).
4-1
IV SERVICE
Service item
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Service item
C-208
x 10,000 copies
Service
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
Periodic check (1)

Every 600,000
copies
z z z z
Periodic check (1)

Every 200,000
copies
Periodic check (2)
FN-120/
Every 400,000
FN-9
copies
Periodic check (3)

Every 1,000,000
copies
z z z z
z z
49
times
24
times
12
times
4
times
IV SERVICE
Periodic check (1)

Every 500,000
copies
Periodic check (4)

Every 2,500,000
copies
Cover Maintenance
Inserter Every 100,000
D
copies
1
time
1
time
z z z z
z z
49
times
9
times
4
times
Periodic check (2)

Every 1,000,000
copies
49
times
8
times
Periodic check (2)

Every 2,500,000
copies
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
z z
Periodic check (3)

Every 3,000,000
copies
1
time
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
z z z z
z z
49
times
Maintenance
TMG-3 Every 100,000
copies
z z z z
z z
49
times
1
time
PK-5
Periodic check (1)

Every 4,000,000
copies
4-2
1.2
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Maintenance items
A. Main body (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

Implementation classification
Service item
Preparations
(1) Image check
Drum
(1) Drum cartridge
z
z
(2) Drum unit cleaning
Charging
corona
Developer
(1) Charging wire assy /Y, /M,

/C, /K
(2) Changing grid plate /Y, /M,
/C, /K
Blower brush
(3) Charging corona dustproof filter
(1) Developer (Y, M, C, K)
(z)
z
z
(2) Developer unit cleaning
Hydro wipe
(cleaning pad
is not available)
Transfer
belt
(1) Belt cleaning blade
ADU
(1) Separation corona unit
(2) Paper feed roller /BP
(3) Feed roller /BP

(4) Double feed
prevention roller /BP
z
z
(5) Registration roller cleaning

(6) Conveyance roller section
cleaning
Exterior
Fixing
Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner
(2) Dust proof filter /1
(3) Dust proof filter /2
(1) Decurler roller

25 mode count reset
Blower brush
(3) Cleaning roller

Reverse/
exit
Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner
(2) Fixing roller /L *2
(7) ADU paper through sensor cleaning

(1) Ozone filter /1
(1) Fixing roller /U *2
Setting powder
Hydro wipe
(cleaning pad is
not available)
z
3
Materials
Tools used
Quantity CleanLubri- Replac

Check
ing
cation ement
Multemp FF-RM
(or Solvest 240)
Multemp FF-RM
(or Solvest 240)
Roller cleaner
*1
*1
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode to prevent the fixing jam when
replacing the decurler roller.
*2
When replacing the fixing roller /U or /L, be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM on the heat insulating sleeve
/U or /L, respectively.
4-3
IV SERVICE
ClassificaNo.
tion
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No.
10
Classification
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller /1, /2, /3
(3) Double feed prevention

roller /1, /2, /3
Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner
Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner/
blower brush
(1) Original glass, exposure

lamp, reflector, lens, mirror, sensor
Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner/
blower brush
Write unit
(1) Dust-proof glass (Y, M, C,

K)
Toner
supply
Toner
15
collection
(1) Toner supply unit cleaning
Vertical
(1) Conveyance roller, sensor
11 conveyance
Scanner
12
13
14
Hydro wipe
Hydro wipe
(1) Toner collection box

replacing/cleaning
(z)
Hydro wipe
16 Final check (1) W.U.T. check

(2) Exterior cleaning
Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner
(3) Image and paper through

check
(4) PM counter resetting (25
mode)
IV SERVICE
Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner
Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller /1, /2, /3
Materials
Tools used
z
z
B. AFR-20 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No.
Classification
Prepara-
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
(1) Paper through check
tions
1
Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller
(4) Pre-separation rubber
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
Exterior
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller
Materials
Tools used
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(5) Rubber roller
Blower brush
(6) Reflective sensor

(7) Conveyance belt
Blower brush
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
z
z
Final check (1) Paper through check

4-4
SERVICE SCHEDULE
C. C-208 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No.
1
2
Classification
Prepara-
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
tions
Paper feed (1)Paper feed roller
Exterior
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller
Materials
Tools used
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
(4) Paper dust removing
(5) Sensor
(6) Gear
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
Blower brush
Plus guard
No.2 *1
(z)
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
z
z
D. FN-120 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
1
2
3
Classification
Service item
Prepara-
tions
Convey-
(1) Conveyance roller
Check
ing
cation ement
z
(1) Main drive unit

(2) Tray up/down drive unit
(3) Shift drive unit
(4) Paper exit drive section
(5) Staple unit
Stapler
(1) Staple check
Exterior
*1
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
ance
Drive
Materials
Tools used
(z)
(z)
(z)
(z)
Plus guard
No.2 *1
(z)
Plus guard
No.2 *1
z
z
z
If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
4-5
Plus guard
No.2 *1
Plus guard
No.2 *1
Plus guard
No.2 *1
Actual durable
count: 5,000
IV SERVICE
No.
SERVICE SCHEDULE
E. FN-9 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No.
1
2
3
Classification
Prepara-
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
tions
Conveyance
Drive
(1) Main drive unit
(3) Shift drive unit

(4) Paper exit drive section
(5) Staple unit
(6) Folding unit
5
6
7
*1
IV SERVICE
F.
No.
1
2
Folding
Stapler
(1) Folding roller

(1) Staple check
Exterior
(z)
Plus guard No.2

*1
(z)
Plus guard No.2

*1
(z)
(z)
(z)
(z)
Plus guard No.2

*1
Plus guard No.2
*1
Plus guard No.2
*1
Actual durable
count: 5,000
Stapler
positioning jig
Cover Inserter D (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
Classification
Conveyance
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
Paper feed (1) Feed roller

(2) Paper feed conveyance
roller
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Tray up/down drive unit
Materials
Tools used

roller
Materials
Tools used
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
z
4-6
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
SERVICE SCHEDULE
G. PK-5 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No.
Classification
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
Punch unit (1) Punch die
Punch
scraps
section
(1) Punch scraps dump
(2) Punch scraps full sensor
Materials
Tools used
Blower brush
Blower brush

(2) Interior cleaning
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
H. TMG-3 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
Classification
Convey-
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
(2) Conveyance belt

2
Trimmer
Stacker
(1) Trimmer blade /U
(3) Trimming box and its

periphery
(1) Pusher section

(2) Stacker section
Drive
z
z
(z)
Plus guard No.2

*1
(z)
Plus guard No.2

*1
(1) Conveyance drive section

*1
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Trimmer blade /L
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
ance
Materials
Tools used
4-7
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
IV SERVICE
No.
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3
Periodic check items (main body)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints)

No.
Classification
Charging
corona
Service item
(1) Changing grid plate
(2) Changing grid spring
Transfer
belt
(1) 1st transfer roller /K

25 mode count reset
(2) 1st transfer roller /C
25 mode count reset
(3) 2nd transfer roller /U
Check
ing
cation ement
4
(4) Belt drive roller cleaning

(5) Transfer belt
(6) Toner collection sheet /1
3
4
*1
2nd trans-
(1) 2nd transfer roller /L
fer
Materials
Tools used
*1
1
Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner
z
1
1
z
z
Fixing
(1) Fixing cleaning unit

*2
1
z
25 mode count reset
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" to prevent a image disturbances in the 25
mode when replacing the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C/K.

*2
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mod when replacing the fixing clean-
IV SERVICE
ing unit. Otherwise, the message "You need to replace the fixing cleaning unit. Please call the service."
appears and the copy/print prohibition state is started.
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)

No.
Classification
Service item
Paper feed (1) Feed rubber

(tray/1, /2, /3)
rubber (tray/1, /2, /3)
Check
cation ement
ing
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 125,000
Actual durable
count: 125,000
4-8
SERVICE SCHEDULE
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 600,000 copies/prints)

No.
1
2
3
4
5
Classification
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
Materials
Tools used
Charging
corona
(1) Charging corona dustproof filter
Developer
(1) Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /

K
Transfer
belt
(1) Transfer belt separation

claw
(2) Belt cleaning brush unit
(1) Registration cleaning

sheet
(1) Ball bearing /U

(2) Ball bearing /L
2
2
z
z
Multemp FFRM (or Solvest

240)

240)
Registration
Fixing
(3) Heat insulating sleeve /U
(4) Heat insulating sleeve /L
(5) Fixing torque limiter
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

Classification
Fixing
Quantity Implementation classification

Service item
(1) Fixing drive gear
CleanLubri- Replac
Check
ing
cation ement
1
2nd trans-
(1) Transfer ground plate unit
fer
Materials
Tools used
240)
E. Periodic check (V) (Every 1,500,000 copies/prints)

No.
1
2
3
Classification
Registra-
Service item
(1) Registration roller
tion
Transfer
belt
ADU
(1) Separation claw solenoid

(1) Feed rubber /BP
rubber /BP
Check
ing
cation ement
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 125,000
Actual durable
count: 125,000
4-9
IV SERVICE
No.
SERVICE SCHEDULE
F.
No.
Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,000,000 copies/prints)

Classification
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
Materials
Tools used
Vertical
conveyance
(1) Intermediate conveyance

clutch /1
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000
ADU

clutch /2
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000

clutch /3
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000
G. Periodic check (VII) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)

No.
1
Fixing
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
(1) Fixing upper lamp /1

(2) Fixing upper lamp /2
1
1
z
z
(3) Fixing lower lamp
(4) Fixing temperature sensor

/3
(5) Fixing temperature sensor

/4
(tray/1, /2, /3)
IV SERVICE
Classification
4-10
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 800,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE
H. Periodic check (VIII) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints)

No.
Classification
Service item
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch

(tray/1, /2, /3)
(2) Pre-registration clutch
(tray/1, /2, /3)
ADU
Check
ing
cation ement
3
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000
Actual durable
count: 800,000
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000
(1) ADU conveyance clutch /1
2
(2) ADU conveyance clutch /2
(3) ADU pre-registration

clutch
(4) Paper feed roller /BP
(5) Paper feed clutch /BP
1.4
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000
Periodic check items (AFR-20)
No.
Classification
Service item

(2) Feed roller
roller
Check
ing
cation ement
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 625,000
Actual durable
count: 625,000
Actual durable
count: 625,000
4-11
IV SERVICE
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,800,000 copies/prints)
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.5
Periodic check items (C-208)

ClassificaNo.
tion
1
Service item

(2) Feed roller
roller

Check
ing
cation ement
1
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 500,000
Actual durable
count: 500,000
Actual durable
count: 500,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)

No.
Classification
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch

1
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000
Actual durable
count:
2,000,000
IV SERVICE
(2) Pre-registration clutch
4-12
1.6
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9)

No.
Classification
Conveyance
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
Materials
Tools used
(1) Paper exit roller /A

(sponge roller)
10
Actual durable
count: 200,000

roller /4 (sponge roller)
Actual durable
count: 200,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)

No.
Classification
Conveyance
Service item
(1) Stack assist roller (sponge
roller)
Check
ing
cation ement
1
Materials
Tools used
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

Classification
Stapler
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
(1) Stapler unit
Materials
Tools used
Stapler
positioning jig
Actual durable
count: 200,000
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)

No.
Classification
Drive
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
(1) FNS up/down motor

1
4-13
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count:
2,500,000
IV SERVICE
No.
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.7
Periodic check items (Cover Inserter D)

ClassificaNo.
tion
1
Service item

Check
ing
cation ement
Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /B

roller assembly
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 100,000
Actual durable
count: 100,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

No.
Classification
Service item

Check
ing
cation ement
Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /A
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 200,000
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 3,000,000 copies/prints)0

No. Classification
IV SERVICE
1.8
Service item
Check
ing
cation ement
Paper feed (1) Torque limiter
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 600,000
Periodic check items (TMG-3)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Trimmer
Service item
(1) Trimmer blade /U
(2) Trimmer blade /L
Check
ing
cation ement
1
4-14
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 500,000
Actual durable
count: 500,000
1.9
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Replacement parts list
Note:
No. in this list is identical with No. in "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25
No.
Unit
Parts name
Quantity
Actual durable
count
001 Toner correction

002 Main body
Toner collection box

Ozone filter /1
1
1
50,000
100,000
004
Dust proof filter /1
100,000
005
100,000
006 Charging corona

007 Drum
Charging corona dust-proof filter

Drum cartridge /Y
1
1
600,000
100,000
012
Drum cartridge /M
100,000
017
Drum cartridge /C
100,000
022
028 Charging corona
Drum cartridge /K
Charging wire assy /Y
1
1
100,000
100,000
029
Charging grid plate /Y
200,000
031
Charging wire assy /M
100,000
032
034
Charging grid plate /M

Charging wire assy /C
1
1
200,000
100,000
034
Charging grid plate /C
200,000
037
Charging wire assy /K
100,000
038
Charging grid plate /K

Charging grid spring
1
8
200,000
200,000
040 Transfer belt
Transfer belt
200,000
041
1st transfer roller /Y
200,000
042
043
1st transfer roller /M

1st transfer roller /C
1
1
200,000
200,000
044
200,000
045
200,000
046
Transfer belt separation claw
600,000
048
049
Belt cleaning brush unit

1
1
600,000
200,000
050
Belt cleaning blade
100,000
051 2nd transfer
200,000
052 ADU
053 Fixing
Separation Discharging board unit

1
1
100,000
200,000
054
Fixing roller /U
100,000
055
Fixing roller /L
100,000
4-15
IV SERVICE
mode.
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No.
Unit
Parts name
Quantity
Actual durable
count
056 Developing
Developer /Y
100,000
057
058
Developer /M
Developer /C
1
1
100,000
100,000
059
Developer /K
100,000
060
Developing unit /Y (color label included)
600,000
061
062
Developing unit /M (color label included)

Developing unit /C (color label included)
1
1
600,000
600,000
063
Developing unit /K (color label included)
600,000
069 FN-120/FN-9
FNS up/down unit
2,500,000
070
071
Stapler unit
Stapler unit
1
1
200,000
200,000
Staple
5000
108
109
IV SERVICE
Staple
5000
Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller)

Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
10
4
200,000
200,000
110
Stacking assist roller (sponge roller)
400,000
078 Cover Inserter D
Feed roller assembly /A
200,000
079
080
Feed roller assembly /B

Double feed prevention roller assembly
1
1
100,000
100,000
081
Torque limiter
600,000
083
Feed roller assembly /A
200,000
084
085
Feed roller assembly /B

Double feed prevention roller assembly
1
1
100,000
100,000
086
Torque limiter
600,000
087 TMG-3
Trimmer blade /U
500,000
087
092 AFR-20
Trimmer blade /L
Paper feed roller
1
1
500,000
625,000
093
Feed roller
625,000
095
625,000
113 Registration
112 Fixing unit
Registration cleaning sheet

Fixing torque limiter
1
1
600,000
600,000
114
Ball bearing /U (for upper roller)
600,000
115
Heat insulating sleeve /U (for upper roller)
600,000
116 Vertical conveyance

117 ADU

1
1
2,000,000
2,000,000
118
2,000,000
4-16
No.
Unit
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Parts name
Quantity
Actual durable
count
119 Main body paper feed
Paper feed rubber /1
125,000
119
120
Double feed prevention rubber /1

1
1
125,000
125,000
120
125,000
121
125,000
121
122

Paper feed rubber /BP
1
1
125,000
125,000
122
Double feed prevention rubber /BP
125,000
130
Paper feed roller /1
800,000
131
132

1
1
800,000
800,000
133
Paper feed roller (By-pass)
800,000
123 Registration
Registration roller
1,500,000
124 Transfer belt

125 Fixing
Separation claw solenoid

1
1
1,500,000
2,500,000
126
2,500,000
127
Fixing lower lamp
2,500,000
128
129

1
1
2,500,000
2,500,000
134 ADU
2,000,000
135
2,000,000
136
137 Fixing

Ball bearing /L (for lower roller)
1
2
2,000,000
600,000
138
Heat insulating sleeve/L (for lower roller)
600,000
139
Fixing drive gear
1,000,000
140 Reverse/exit unit

141 C-208
Decurler roller
Paper feed roller
1
1
100,000
500,000
Feed roller
500,000
500,000
143
144
Paper feed clutch

Pre-registration clutch
1
1
2,000,000
2,000,000
145 Main body paper feed
2,000,000
146
2,000,000
147
148

1
1
2,000,000
2,000,000
149
2,000,000
150
2,000,000
151
152 2nd transfer
Paper feed clutch /BP

Transfer ground plate unit
1
1
2,000,000
1,000,000
142
4-17
IV SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.10 Important maintenance parts

The important parts specified by Minolta in order
to maintain safety of the products are referred to
as "important maintenance parts". The important
maintenance parts for this machine are as
described below:
No.
Unit
Parts name
Quantity
Fixing unit
Thermostat /1
Fixing unit
Thermostat /L
IV SERVICE
4-18
COPY MATERIAL
2. COPY MATERIAL
2.1
Product
A. Drum cartridge
2.2
Materials
A. Single unit supply

Drum
Toner black
Toner yellow
Toner magenta
Toner cyan
B. Kit
a Developer black set
Developer black
Developer charging funnel/U
Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer yellow set
Developer yellow
IV SERVICE

Developer magenta set
Developer magenta
Developer cyan set
Developer cyan
4-19
COPY MATERIAL
2.3
PM parts kit
A. 100,000 copies/1 set (total)

Name
Quantity
North America
Europe
Toner collecting box assy

Ozone filter /1
2
1
1
1
Belt cleaning blade

Separation corona unit
1
1
1
1
Fixing roller /U
Fixing roller /L
Decurler roller
Charging wire assy
1
4
1
4
Paper for fixing speed adjustment

(16 sheets/A3)
Dust bag (rubber band)
Hand case for collection

Cotton swab (x4)
1
1
Hydro wipe (x10)
B. 200,000 copies/1set (total)

Name
IV SERVICE
Transfer belt
Quantity
*All area
1
1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C

3
1

Changing grid plate
1
4
Changing grid spring
4-20
SERVICE MATERIAL LIST
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST

Material No.
Name
Shape
Remark
4014-5007-01 Setting powder

25g
Multemp grease
FF-RM
25g
Solvest 240
Multemp FF-RM is
recommended
IV SERVICE
Plasguard No.2
4-21
CE TOOLS LIST
4. CE TOOLS LIST
Tool No.
Name
4969-1885-01
Fixing thermostat positioning jig
Shape
(for upper roller)

4969-1886-01
Remark
Fixing thermostat positioning jig

(for lower roller)
4014-5005-01
Quantity
Mirror positioning jig

2
4014-5006-01
Door switch jig

1
4969-1887-01
Color chart (metric)

1
4969-1888-01
Color chart (inch)

1
4024-2153-01
New Pyramid chart

1
4014-5010-01
Adjustment chart
IV SERVICE
1
4014-5009-01
Stapler positioning jig
For adjusting
1
4-22
FN-120/FN-9
JAM CODE LIST
V CODE LIST
1. JAM CODE LIST
J11-01
J11-11
Paper
feed
tray /2
J12-01
J12-11
Remove paper from

the by-pass feed tray
once, decrease the
stacked sheets and
set again.
When idling During operation When idling
Paper
feed
tray /1
Remove the paper

from the by-pass feed
tray once and remove
jammed paper, if any.
By-pass feed conveyance sensor

(PS26) was turned ON in the idling condition.
Remove the paper

from the by-pass feed
tray once and remove
After the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7) is

turned ON, pre-registration sensor /1
(PS29) is not turned ON within the
specified time.
If copy is progressing when

jam arises, main
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
Pull out the paper feed

tray /1 and remove
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) was

turned ON in the idling condition.
During operation
J10-11
After no paper sensor /BP (PS47) is

turned ON, tray up drive motor /BP
(M35) is not turned ON within specified
time.
After the tray up drive motor /BP (M35)
is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /
BP (PS25) is not turned ON within
specified time.
Correction
After pick-up solenoid /2 (SD8) is

(PS35) is not turned ON within specified time.

jam arises, main
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
When idling
J10-03
After the pickup solenoid /BP (SD5) is

turned ON, by-pass feed feeder sensor
specified time.
Resulting
operation
jam arises, main
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.

5-1

tray /2 and remove
V CODE LIST
J10-02
Causes
During operation
ClassifiJam
cation
code
ByJ10-01
pass
feed
Causes
Resulting
operation
Correction
J13-01
During operation
Paper
feed
tray /3
Jam
code
After the pick-up solenoid /3 (SD9) is

(PS41) is not turned ON.

jam arises, main
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.

tray /3 and remove
During operation When idling
Classification

After the paper feed solenoid (SD100)

is turned ON, paper feed sensor

jam arises, main
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
Feed sensor (PS106) was turned ON in

the idling condition.
After the loop roller motor (M31) is

turned ON, registration sensor (PS22)
is not turned ON within specified time.

jam arises, main
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
J17-02
After the ADU pre-registration clutch

(MC3) is turned ON, registration sensor
specified time.
Printer section
stops immediately.
J17-03
After the pre-registration clutch /3

(MC12) is turned ON, vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON
within specified time.
J17-04

(MC10) is turned ON, vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON
within specified time.

jam arises, main
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
J13-11
C-208
J14-01
J14-11
V CODE LIST
Paper
feed
During operation When idling
JAM CODE LIST
J17-01
5-2
Open the LCT top

cover and remove
Pull out ADU and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
Open the vertical conveyance door and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
tray /2 and remove
J17-06

(MC7) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned
ON within the specified time.
Correction

jam arises, main
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.

remove jammed
paper, if any.
J17-07
After the pre-registration clutch

(MC102) is turned ON, intermediate
conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not
turned ON within the specified time.
Open the LCT front

door and remove
J17-08
After the intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not
turned ON within specified time.
Pull out ADU and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
J17-09
After the by-pass feed conveyance sensor (PS26) is turned ON, the intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not
After the pre-registration clutch
(MC102) is turned ON, paper feed sensor (PS107) is not turned ON within the
specified time.
Remove paper from

the by-pass feed tray
and remove jammed
paper, if any.
Open the LCT top
cover and remove
C-208
J17-10
Paper
feed
J17-11
J17-12
J17-13
J17-14
C-208
After the intermediate conveyance

clutch /1 (MC13) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is
not turned ON within the specified time.
Resulting
operation
J17-15
Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) was



remove jammed
paper, if any.
Pull out ADU and
remove jammed
paper, if any.

Registration sensor (OS22) was turned
in the idling condition.
Paper feed sensor (PS107) was turned
ON in the idling condition.
5-3
Open the LCT front

door and remove
V CODE LIST
J17-05
Causes
During operation
Paper
feed
Jam
code
When idling
Classification
JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST

Jam
code
Others
J19-01
Others
C-208
Paper
exit
Causes
Resulting
operation
Correction
Vertical conveyance door open jam.

Vertical conveyance door sensor
(PS51) was turned OFF when copying /
printing.

jam arises, main
body stops after
completion of
paper exit.
Close the vertical conveyance door.
J19-02
LCT top cover open jam or LCT front

door open jam. Top cover open/close
sensor (PS100) or front door open/
close sensor (PS115) was turned OFF
when copying/printing.
In case of LCT
paper feed, main
body stops after
completion of
paper exit. In
case of paper
feed other than
LCT, main body
does not stop.
Close the LCT top

cover or LCT front
door.
J31-02
After the registration roller motor (M30)

is turned ON, fixing paper exit sensor
(PS17) is not turned ON.
Printer section
stops immediately.
Pull out ADU and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
J32-01
After the fixing paper exit sensor

(PS17) is turned ON, paper exit sensor
specified time.
(PS17) is turned ON, reverse paper exit
sensor (PS19) is not turned ON within
the specified time.
During operation
Classification
J32-02
J32-03
In the reverse paper exit mode, after

the reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is
turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is
(PS17) is turned ON, it is not turned
OFF within the specified time.
J32-04
J32-05
After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is

turned ON, it is not turned OFF within
the specified time (in straight paper exit
mode).
the specified time (in reverse paper exit
mode).
V CODE LIST
J32-07
Paper
exit
J32-11
J32-12
J32-13
When idling
J32-08
When the registration roller motor

(M30) is ON, fixing paper exit sensor
(PS17) is ON.
Paper exit sensor (PS13) is ON in the
idling condition.
Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is
Reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is
5-4
Pull out ADU and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
Jam
code
Others
J51-01
AFR-20
J61-01
J61-02
J61-03
Causes
During operation
Classification
JAM CODE LIST

Resulting
operation
Front door open jam. Front door open/

while copying/printing.
Paper feed section cover open jam.
Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) was
turned OFF when copying.
Paper feed tray open jam. Tray open/
when copying.
Paper exit section cover open jam.
Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) was
turned OFF when copying.
J62-01
Registration sensor (PS301) is not

turned OFF within specified time after
paper feed is started.
J62-02
After reversal of paper feed motor

(M301) is started, timing sensor
specified time.
J62-03
After the timing sensor (PS302) is

the specified time.
J62-04
After the reverse/paper exit motor

(M303) is turned ON, reverse sensor
specified time.
J62-05
After the reverse sensor (PS305) is

the specified time.
J62-06
In the one-sided original exit mode,

paper exit sensor (PS306) is not turned
ON within the specified time after the
start of paper exit.
In the double-sided original exit mode,
original exit sensor (PS306) is not
turned ON within the specified time
after the reverse sensor (PS305) is
turned ON.
5-5
Printer section
stops immediately.
RADF stops
immediately.
If there is paper
in or after transfer process,
main body stops
after paper exit.
Correction
Close the front door.
Close the paper feed

section cover.
Close the paper feed
tray.
Close the paper exit
section cover.
Open the paper feed
section cover and
remove jammed
paper, if any.
Remove jammed
paper in the main
body conveyance section, if any.
Open the paper exit

section cover and
remove jammed
paper, if any.
Remove jammed
paper in the main
V CODE LIST
Classification
Jam
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
Correction
AFR-20
J62-07
During operation

the specified time.
RADF stops
immediately.
If there is paper
in or after transfer process,
main body stops
after paper exit.
Open the paper exit

section cover and
remove jammed
paper, if any.
Remove jammed
paper in the main
Registration sensor (PS301) is ON in

J65-01
Open the paper feed

section cover and
remove jammed
paper, if any.
Reverse sensor (PS305) is ON in the

idling condition.
Open the paper exit

section cover and
remove jammed
paper, if any.
J65-03
Timing sensor (PS302) is ON in the

idling condition.
Open the paper feed

section cover and
remove jammed
paper, if any.
J65-04

idling condition.
Open the paper exit

section cover and
remove jammed
paper, if any.
Others
FN-120
FN-9
J71-01
FNS front door open jam. FNS interlock

switch (MS701) was turned OFF when
copying/printing.
Others
TMG-3
J71-02
FN-120
FN-9
J72-16
J72-18
During operation
J65-02
J72-17
V CODE LIST
When idling
JAM CODE LIST
Printer section
stops immediately.
TU front door open jam. Front door

MS2 (MS2) was turned OFF when
copying/printing.
FNS/main body
turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is stop immedinot turned ON within the specified time. ately.
After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is
turned ON, main tray paper exit sensor
specified time.
turned ON, stacker inlet sensor
specified time (when stapling).
5-6
Close the FNS front

door.
Close the TU front
door.
Remove jammed
paper in the FNS/main
body, if any.
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
code
Causes
FN-120
FN-9
J72-19
After the stacker inlet motor (M713) is

turned ON, stacker inlet sensor
specified time.
Resulting
operation
After the main tray paper exit sensor

OFF within the specified time (in the
large-size staple mode).
J72-22

turned ON, sub-tray paper exit sensor
specified time within the specified time
(in the sub-tray paper exit mode).
J72-23
After the sub-tray paper exit sensor

large-size staple mode).
J72-24
After completion of stapling, folding

passage sensor (PS726) is not turned
ON.
J72-25
After the folding knife motor (M719) is

turned ON, folding paper exit sensor
specified time.
After the folding paper exit sensor
J72-28
J72-29
J72-30
Remove jammed
body, if any.
After paper exit operation is started,

main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is
not turned ON within the specified time
(when stapling).
J72-21
J72-26
FNS/main body
stop immediately.
Correction
After the stacker inlet sensor (PW705)

is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within
the specified time.
non-staple mode).
small-size staple mode).
5-7
V CODE LIST
J72-20
During operation
Classification
JAM CODE LIST

Jam
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
Correction
TMG-3
J72-32
After the folding paper exit sensor

(PS725) is turned ON, inlet sensor
specified time.
TU/FNS/main
body stop immediately.
Remove jammed
paper in TU/FNS/main
body, if any.
FNS/main body
stop immediately.
Remove jammed
body, if any.
J72-34
During operation
Classification
J72-33
After the inlet sensor (PS101) is turned

ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned
After the conveyance motor (M101) is
turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS108)
is not turned OFF within the specified
time.
After the conveyance clutch /L (MC202)
is turned ON, PI passage sensor /L
Cover
Inserter
D
J72-35
PK-5
J72-43
FN-120
FN-9
J72-48
Cover
Inserter
D
J72-49
After the conveyance clutch /U

(MC201) is turned ON, PI passage sensor (PS201) is not turned ON within the
specified time.
J72-50
After the PI passage sensor (PS201) is

turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is
J72-51
After the PI passage sensor /L (PS206)

is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704)
is not turned ON within the specified
time.
J72-81
After the stapler motor /F (M714) and

clincher motor /F (M715) are turned
ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) and
clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) are not
turned ON within specified time.
J72-82
After the stapler motor /R (M709) and

clincher motor /R (M710) are turned
ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) and
clincher HP sensor (PS732) are not
FN-120
FN-9
V CODE LIST
After the punch motor (M801) is turned

ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not
After the folding passage sensor
5-8
FN-120
FN-9
J72-83
Causes
After the stapler motor /F, /R (M714),

FNS/main body
M709), and clincher motor /F, /R (M715, stop immediM710) are turned ON, stapler HP senately.
sor /F, /R (PS731, PS730) and clincher
HP sensor /F, /R (PS733, PS732) are
After operation stop signal is transmitted from the main body to FNS, FNS
does not stop within the specified time.
J73-01
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is

Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is ON in
When idling
J72-90
J73-02
Correction
Remove jammed
body, if any.
Open the FNS front

door and remove
J73-05
FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is ON in the

idling condition.
J73-07
Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is

Remove jammed
paper in the sub-tray, if
any.
J73-08
Stacker no-paper sensor (PS720) is

Folding passage sensor (PS726) is ON
Open the FNS front

door and remove
J73-09
TMG-3
Resulting
operation
J73-10
Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is

J73-11
Inlet sensor (PS101) is ON in the idling

condition.
Conveyance sensor (PS102) is ON in
J73-12
Open the TU front

door and remove

idling condition.
J73-14
PI passage sensor (PS206) is ON in

Remove paper from

the cover sheet feeder
/L and remove
J73-17
PI passage sensor /U (PS201) is ON in

Remove paper in the

cover sheet feeder /U
once and remove
ADU
J92-01
After the reverse paper exit sensor

Printer section
(PS19) is turned ON, ADU reverse sen- stops immedisor (PS21) is not turned ON within the
ately.
specified time.
Pull out ADU and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
ADU
J92-11
ADU reverse sensor (PS21) is ON in

Pull out ADU and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
Cover
Inserter
D
When idling During operation
J73-13
5-9
V CODE LIST
Jam
code
During operation
Classification
JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST
J94-02
After reversal of ADU reverse motor

(M32) is turned ON, ADU conveyance
sensor (PS20) is not turned ON within
the specified time.
ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is ON

After the ADU conveyance sensor

(PS20) is turned ON, ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is not turned ON
within the specified time.
ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is

V CODE LIST
J94-11
During operation
J93-11
Resulting
operation
When idling
J93-01
Causes
During operation
Jam
code
When idling
Classification
5-10
Printer section
stops immediately.
Printer section
stops immediately.
Correction
ERROR CODE LIST
2. ERROR CODE LIST

Note:
In the F code area of warning codes, "Contact the Service Section" is indicated and in the E
code area, "Turn ON the power switch again" is indicated. On the actual LCD screen, all the indications are SC codes.
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
Communication
abnormality
Paper
feed
motor
abnormality
F10-10
between printer control board
(PRCB) and LT drive board
(LTDB)
M41 abnormality detection signal was continuoudly detected
for the specified time when the
paper feed motor (M41) was
ON.
Main body
stops immediately and
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
LT paper
feed
motor
abnormality
Paper
feed tray
abnormality
F13-02
LT up/
down
motor
abnormality
F13-01
Estimated abnormal parts

LT drive board (LTDB)

Paper feed motor (M41)
M101 abnormality detection

signal was continuously
detected for the specified time
when the paper feed motor
(M101) was ON.
After the tray up/down motor /l
(M40) is turned ON, tray upper
limit sensor /1 (PS30) is not
turned ON.
LT drive motor (LTDB)

F18-02
After the tray up/down motor /2

turned ON.

Tray upper limit motor /2 (M39)
(PS38)
F18-03
After the tray up/down motor /3

turned ON.

Tray upper limit motor /3 (M38)
(PS42)
F18-04
After the tray up/down motor /

BP (M35) is turned ON, the
tray upper limit sensor /BP
(PS25) is not turned ON within
the specified time.
Conveyance drive board

(CVDB)
Tray up/down motor /BP (M35)
(PS25)
F18-50
When the up/down motor

(M100) was ON, M100 abnormality detection signal was
continuously detected for the
specified time.
F18-01
5-11

Tray up/down motor /1 (M40)
(PS30)
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.

UP/DOWN motor (M100)
V CODE LIST
C-208
Main body
C-208
Main body
Classification
ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
LT up/
down
motor
abnormality
F18-51
When the upper limit sensor

(PS109) or lower limit sensor
(PS101) is OFF, PS101 or
PS109 is not turned ON within
the specified time after the up/
down motor (M100) is turned
ON.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
LT paper
feed
assist fan
abnormality
F18-60
When the paper feed assist fan

/R (M137) was ON, M137
abnormality detection signal
was continuously detected for
the specified time.
When the paper feed assist fan
/F (M136) was ON, M136
the specified time.

Paper feed assist fan /R (M137)
DC power unit /2 (DCPS2)

C-208
Classification

UP/DOWN motor (M100)
Upper limit sensor (PS109)
Lower limit sensor (PS101)

Paper feed assist fan /F (M136)
LT power
abnormality
F18-70
24VDC is not supplied to LCT.
F18-71
12VDC is not supplied to LCT.
Communication
abnormality
F20-10
(PRCB) and drum drive board /
Y (DRDB /Y) or drum drive
board /M (DRDB /M).

Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y)
Drum drive board /M (DRDB /
M)
F20-11
(PRCB) and drum drive board /
C (DRDB /C) or drum drive
board /K (DRDB /K).

Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C)
Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)
F20-12
(PRCB) and transfer belt motor
(M18)

Transfer belt motor (M18)
V CODE LIST
Main body
F18-61
5-12
Main body
Classification
Precharging
exposure
lamp
abnormality
Developing motor
abnormality
Drum
motor
abnormality
ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
F21-01
Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y

(PCL Y) set cannot be
detected.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.

Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y
(PCL Y)
F21-02
Pre-charging exposure lamp /

M (PCL M) set cannot be
detected.

Pre-charging exposure lamp /M
(PCL M)
F21-03
Pre-charging exposure lamp /C

(PCL C) set cannot be
detected.

Pre-charging exposure lamp /C
(PCL C)
F21-04
Pre-charging exposure lamp /K

(PCL K) set cannot be
detected.

Pre-charging exposure lamp /K
(PCL K)
F23-01
When the developing motor /Y

(M20) was ON, M20 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the
specified time.

Developing motor /Y (M20)
F23-02
When the developing motor /M

specified time.

Developing motor /M (M21)
F23-03
When developing motor /C

specified time.

Developing motor /C (M22)
F23-04
When the developing motor /K

specified time.
When the drum motor /Y (M14)
was ON, M14 abnormality
detection signal was continuously detected for the specified
time.

Developing motor /K (M23)
F23-05
F23-06
When the drum motor /M

specified time.
5-13

Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y)
Drum motor /Y (M14)

Drum drive board /M (DRDB /
M)
Drum motor /M (M15)
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST

Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
Drum
motor
abnormality
F23-07
When the drum motor /C (M16)

time.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.

Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C)
Drum motor /C (M16)
F23-08
When drum motor /K (M17)

time.
When the transfer belt motor
specified time.

Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)
Drum motor /K (M17)
F23-10
When the 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15) is ON, PS15 is not

turned OFF within the specified time after the 1st transfer
pressing/releasing motor
(M19) is turned ON.
When PS15 is OFF, PS15 is
not turned ON within the specified time after M19 is turned
ON.

1st transfer pressing/releasing
motor (M19)
1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
Toner
supply
abnormality
F23-11
When either of the toner supply motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (M49,
M50, M51, or M52), toner bottle motor (M53), or toner bottle
clutch /Y, /M, /C, /K (MC14,
MC15, MC16, or MC17) was
ON, either abnormality detection signal was continuously
detected for the specified time.

Toner supply drive board
(TSDB)
Toner supply motor /Y (M49)
Toner supply motor /M (M50)
Toner supply motor /C (M51)
Toner supply motor /K (M52)
Toner bottle motor (M53)
Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)
Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15)
Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16)
Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17)
L detection
abnormality
F27-01
Output of toner density sensor

/Y (TDS Y) cannot be controlled.

Toner density sensor /Y (TDS
Y)
F27-02

/M (TDS M) cannot be controlled.

Toner density sensor /M (TDS
M)
F27-03

/C (TDS C) cannot be controlled.

Toner density sensor /C (TDS
C)
Main body
Classification
Transfer
belt unit
abnormality
V CODE LIST
F23-09
5-14

ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
L detection
abnormality
F27-04

/K (TDS K) cannot be controlled.
High
pressure
unit
abnormality
F28-01
When the charging /Y was ON,

charging /Y abnormality detection signal was continuously
When charging /M was ON,
charging /M abnormality detection signal was continuously
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
F28-02
F28-03
F28-04
F29-01
F29-02

Toner density sensor /K (TDS
K)
High pressure unit /1 (HV1)
When charging /C is ON,

charging /C abnormality detection signal was continuously
When charging /K was ON,
charging /K abnormality detection signal was continuously
When the primary transfer Y
was ON, primary transfer Y
the specified time.
When the primary transfer M
was ON, primary transfer M
the specified time.
F29-03
When the primary transfer C

was ON, primary transfer C
the specified time.
F29-04
When the primary transfer K

was ON, primary transfer K
the specified time.
5-15
High pressure unit /2 (HV2)

1st transfer roller
V CODE LIST
Main body
Classification
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
Abnormality
code
Process
abnormality
F29-06
Gamma sensor (PS11)

improperly adjusted while in
the Dmax control.
F29-07
Dmax control /Y resulted in an

abnormality.
F29-08
Dmax control /M resulted in an

abnormality.
F29-09
Dmax control /C resulted in an

abnormality.

Developing unit /C
Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-10
Dmax control /K resulted in an

abnormality.
F29-11
In charging potential control,

drum surface potential /Y was
out of specification.

Developing unit /K
Gamma sensor (PS11)
Drum potential sensor board /Y
(DRPSB Y)
(DRPS Y)
F29-12

drum surface potential /M was

Drum potential sensor board /M
(DRPSB M)
(DRPS M)
F29-13

drum surface potential /C was

Drum potential sensor board /C
(DRPSB C)
(DRPS C)
F29-14

drum surface potential /K was

Drum potential sensor board /K
(DRPSB K)
(DRPS K)
F29-15
Charging potential control /Y

resulted in an abnormality.
F29-16
Charging potential control /M


(DRPSB Y)
(DRPS Y)
(DRPSB M)
(DRPS M)
Main body
V CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
operation
5-16
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.

Gamma sensor (PS11)

Developing unit /Y
Gamma sensor (PS11)
Developing unit /M
Gamma sensor (PS11)
ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Process
abnormality
F29-17
Charging potential control /C

F29-18
Charging potential control /K

F29-19
Dot diameter adjustment control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
F29-20
Dot diameter adjustment control /M resulted in an abnormality.
F29-21
Dot diameter adjustment control /C resulted in an abnormality.
F29-22
Dot diameter adjustment control /K resulted in an abnormality.

(DRPSB K)
(DRPS K)
F29-23
Gamma sensor (PS11)

improperly adjusted while in
the gamma correction control

Gamma sensor (PS11)
F30-01
2nd transfer abnormality
High voltage unit /2 (HU2)
F30-02
F30-10
Separation abnormality
ADU conveyance drive board
communication abnormality
High voltage unit /2 (HU2)

(CVDB)
F32-01
When the fixing cooling fan /1

and /2 (M10, M36, M37) were
ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the
specified time.

Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10)
F32-02
When the drum unit fan /3

specified time.

Drum unit fan /3 (M47)
Main body
Classification
Motor
abnormality
Fan
abnormality
Causes
5-17
Resulting
operation
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.

(DRPSB C)
(DRPS C)
(DRPSB K)
(DRPS K)
(DRPSB Y)
(DRPS Y)
(DRPSB M)
(DRPS M)
(DRPSB C)
(DRPS C)
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST

Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
Fan
abnormality
F32-03
When the paper exit fan /F, /M,

and /R (M28, M27, and M26)
were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them
the specified time.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
F32-04
When charging air intake fan

specified time.
When the drum cooling fan /1
and /2 (M12, M13) were ON,
abnormality detection signal of
either of them was continuously detected for the specified
time.
Toner supply drive board

(TSDB)
Charging air suction fan (M48)
F32-06
When the transfer belt cooling

fan (M11) was ON, M11 abnormality detection signal was
continuoudly detected for the
specified time.

Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
F33-01
When the fixing motor (M29)

time.
Conveyance drive motor

(CVDB)
Fixing motor (M29)
F33-02
When the pressure release

sensor (PS16) is ON, PS16 is
not turned OFF within the
specified time after the fixing
motor (M29) is turned ON.
When PS16 is OFF, PS16 is
not turned ON within the specified time after M29 is turned
ON.

(CVDB)
Fixing motor (M29)
Fixing pressure release sensor
(PS16)
F33-03
After the 2nd transfer pressing/

releasing motor (M34) is
turned ON, it is not turned OFF

(CVDB)
2nd transfer pressing/releasing
motor (M34)
F33-04
Abnormality of Web motor

(M54) or circuit was detected.

(CVDB)
Web motor (M54)
Main body
Classification
F32-05
Motor
abnormality
V CODE LIST
5-18

Paper exit fan /F (M28)
Paper exit fan /M (M27)
Paper exit fan /R (M26)

Drum cooling fan /1 (M12)
Main body
Classification
Fixing
high temperature
abnormality
ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
F34-01
Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH1)

(TH1) detection temperature
over 250C was continuously
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
F34-02

F34-03
F34-04

F34-05
Fixing compensation high temperature abnormality (TH1)

Fixing compensation high temperature abnormality (TH3)
F34-06
F34-08
Fixing roller paper seizure

abnormality
J31-02 occurred 4 continuous
times.
5-19

AC drive board (ACDB)
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)
Fixing lower lamp (L4)
(TH1)
(TH2)
(TH3)
(TH4)
WARNING
When F34-**, F35-** or
F36-** (fixing temperature related abnormality)
occurs, be sure to repair
a defective part before
setting the 25 DIPSW 3-1
to 0.
If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set
to 0 without repairing a
defective part, this may
cause a fire.
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
Fixing low
temperature
abnormality
F35-01
Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH1)

under 150C was continuously
detected.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
F35-02

Main body
Classification
F35-03
F35-04

F35-05
Fixing compensation low temperature abnormality (TH1)

Fixing compensation low temperature abnormality (TH3)
V CODE LIST
F35-06
5-20

(TH1)
(TH2)
(TH3)
(TH4)
WARNING
When F34-**, F35-** or
to 0.
cause a fire.
ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Fixing
sensor
abnormality
F36-02
Fixing high temperature hardware detection abnormality

(TH2)
(TH2) detected abnormality
signal continuously for the
specified time.
F36-04
Fixing high temperature hardware detection abnormality

(TH4)
specified time.
F36-05
Fixing low temperature hardware detection abnormality

(TH1)
specified time.
Fixing low temperature hardware abnormality (TH2)
specified time.
Main body
Classification
F36-06
Causes
Resulting
operation
F36-07

(TH3)
specified time.
F36-08

(TH4)
specified time.
Fixing compensation high temperature hardware detection
abnormality (TH1)
specified time.
F36-09
5-21
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.

(TH1)
(TH2)
(TH3)
(TH4)
WARNING
When F34-**, F35-** or
to 0.
cause a fire.
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST

Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
Fixing
sensor
abnormality
F36-10
Fixing compensation low temperature hardware detection

abnormality (TH1)
specified time.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
Fixing
sensor
abnormality
F36-11
Fixing compensation high temperature hardware detection

abnormality (TH3)
specified time.
F36-12
Fixing compensation low temperature hardware detection

abnormality (TH3)
specified time.
After the main switch (SW2) is
turned ON, fixing temperature
sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature does not reach 150C
Main body
Classification
F38-02
F38-03
F39-01
V CODE LIST
Scanner
abnormality
F41-01
Motor
abnormality
F41-02
F41-03

turned ON, fixing temperature
sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature does not reach 150C
Fixing section has not been
set.

(TH1)
(TH2)
(TH3)
(TH4)
WARNING
When F34-**, F35-** or
to 0.
cause a fire.
At the home position search,

scanner HP sensor (PS1) is
not turned on within the specified time after the scanner
motor (M1) is turned ON.
When the polygon motor /Y
(M3) is started or when the
speed is switched, M3 lock signal is not detected within the
specified time.
Scanner drive board (SCDB)

Scanner motor (M1)
Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
When the polygon motor (M4)

is started or the speed is
switched, M4 lock signal is not
detected within the specified
time.

Polygon motor /M (M4)
5-22

Polygon motor /Y (M3)
ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
Motor
abnormality
F41-04
When the polygon motor /C

(M5) is started or the speed is
time.
F41-05
When the polygon motor /K

(M6) is started or the speed is
time.
When the optical scanning
returns, scanner HP sensor
(PS1) is not turned ON within
the specified time after the
scanner motor (M1) is turned
ON.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
Main body
Classification
Scanner
abnormality
F41-06
Motor
abnormality
F41-07

Polygon motor /C (M5)

Polygon motor /K (M6)

Scanner motor (M1)
Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /Y (M3) was

detected.
Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /M (M4) was
detected.

F41-09
Abnormal polygon motor /C

(M5) was detected.

F41-10
Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /K (M6) was

detected.
Temperature detection board
(TDB) detected temperature
abnormality in writing unit /K.

F42-01
When the write intake fan /1, /2

(M43, M44), and write exhaust
fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON,
abnormality detection signal of
either of them was continuously detected for the specified
time.

Writing suction fan /1 (M43)
Writing suction fan /2 (M44)
Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45)
F42-02
When scanner cooling fan (M2)

time.

Scanner cooling fan (M2)
F41-08
F41-11
Fan
abnormality
5-23


Temperature detection board
(TDB)
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST

Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
Color registration
abnormality
F45-01
Color registration base line

correction /F resulted in abnormality.
F45-03
Color registration base line

correction /R results in abnormality.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
F45-07
When laser correction motor /Y

(M7) was ON, laser correction
HP sensor /Y (PS5) was
turned OFF.
When the laser correction
motor /M (M8) was ON, laser
correction HP sensor /M (PS6)
was turned OFF,

Laser correction motor /Y (M7)
(PS5)
Laser correction motor /M (M8)
(PS6)
When the laser correction

motor /C (M9) was ON, laser
correction HP sensor /C (PS7)
was turned OFF.
After the laser correction motor
/Y (M7) is turned ON, it is not
turned OFF within the specified time. Or, laser correction
HP sensor /Y (PS5) installing
position is abnormal.

Laser correction motor /C (M9)
(PS7)
Laser correction motor /Y (M7)
(PS5)
F45-11
Laser correction motor /M (MB)

is not turned OFF within the
specified time after it is turned
ON. Or, laser correction HP
sensor /M (PS6) installing position is abnormal.

Laser correction motor /M (M8)
(PS6)
F45-12

is not turned OFF within the
specified time after it is turned
ON. Or, the laser correction HP
sensor /C (PS7) installing position is abnormal.
Color registration correction
results in abnormality.

(PS7)
Main body
Classification
F45-08
F45-09
F45-10
V CODE LIST
F45-20
5-24

(PS8)
(PS9)

(PS8)
(PS9)
Main body
Classification
Image
processing
abnormality
ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
E46-01
When scanning the image,

sub-scan beam correction APC
cannot be applied. Laser does
not light up because 12VDC
power to drive the beam is not
supplied, MPC is not correct,
or because of fault laser.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
E46-02
Address abnormality of FIFO

for scanner. When scanning
the image, compression of
scanned image data is not normally completed.
Address abnormality of FIFO
for printer. Expansion of
scanned image data is not normally completed.

FIFO interrupt error of compression/expansion chip

occurred.
Image data expansion abnormality
E46-07
Connection abnormality
between A/D conversion board
(ADB) and image processing
board (IPB)

A/D conversion board (ADB)
CCD wiring harness
E46-08
Index sensor output does not

change by the execution of
APC. Index sensor cannot
decect the laser because the
polygon mirror does not rotate,
or because of the index sensor
out of position or defective
index sensor
Writing unit /Y /M /C /K
E46-09
Connection abnormality
between index sensor /Y, /M, /
C, /K (INDX SB Y, M, C, K) or
laser drive board (LDB Y, M, C,
K) and image processing
board (IPB)
E46-03
E46-05
E46-06
5-25

Expansion memory
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
V CODE LIST
Main body
Classification
Image
processing
abnormality
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
E46-12
After negation of SVV, compression of scanned image

and evolution to page memory
are not completed.
E46-13

compression process from
scanner to memory is not completed within the specified
time. Evolution from scanner to
page memory is not completed
within the specified time. SVV
is not detected within the specified time.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
E46-14

expansion process from memory to printer is not completed
within the specified time. Output from page memory to
printer is not completed within
the specified time. PVV is not
time.

E46-15

access to expansion device or
some other improper process
took place even though there
was no resource.

Program of overall control
board (OACB)
E46-16

access to compression device
or some other improper process took place even though
there was no resource.
E46-17
When processing the image,

filter coefficient cannot be
properly prepared.
E46-19
When accessing the memory

device, software fault was
detected.
5-26

Image
processing
abnormality
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
E46-21
Expansion process from memory to page memory is not

completed within the specified
time.
Compression process from
page memory to memory is not
completed within the specified
time.
Evolution from memory to
page memory is not completed
Compressed data transfer from
memory to memory is not completed within the specified
time.
SVV is not turned OFF within
the specified time and therefore scanning of next page
cannot be started.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
E46-23
E46-24
E46-25
Shading correction abnormality

(GA abnormality)
AOC/AGC adjustment abnormality
Blocking cover and lens cover
of scanner section are out of
place.
connector is disconnected.
ADB power cable is disconnected.
ADB IC protector is broken.
Quantity of light of exposure
lamp (L1) is excess.
L1 does not light up.

board (OACB)


Program of image processing
board (IPB)
Exposure lamp (L1)
L1 inverter board (L1INVB)
V CODE LIST
Main body
Classification
ERROR CODE LIST
5-27
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
Classification
Image
processing
abnormality
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
E46-26
There is no correction data

which has been reserved by
resolution.
Abnormality
detection
process is
performed
but no abnormality code
is indicated
on the operation board
and main
body continues operation.
Abnormality
code is indicated only for
data collection, list output and
KRDS.

board (OACB)
E46-31
Before completion of MPC,

APC initial sampling was
attempted.
Execution of MPC was
attempted during execution of
APC.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.

ICP program
E46-32
E46-35
E46-36
V CODE LIST
Continuous page imaging

range abnormality.
Image cannot be evolved on
memory due to abnormal
image range on memory.
When starting APC, PVV was
ON (APC was executed during
print)
E46-40
Hard disk initialization abnormality.

Hard disk failure or improper
connector connection.
E46-41
JOB information could not be

stored in the hard disk.
E46-42
At the time of automatic hard

disk job deletion, route could
not be opened.
E46-43
Hard disk access error.

Hard disk failure or improper
connector connection.
5-28

Hard disk (HDD-7)
HDD I/F board (HDD IFB)
Main body
Classification
Image
processing
abnormality
Abnormality
code
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
operation
E46-58
Software failure.
CCD board was replaced but
I1ROM version is not compliant.
E46-59

bunch or connector is damaged.
F46-62
Before completion of paper

mis-centering correction, scanning was started (mis-centering correction cannot be
completed).
F46-63
Since the quantity of light of

exposure lamp (L1) decreased,
AGC was retried, though no
error occurred.
PWM gammer curve was not
properly prepared.
F46-64
E46-66
Shift failure at repeat.
E46-80
Message cue was not enough

or destructed.
E46-81
Parameter value exceeds

allowable range.
Message cue sender task has
an undefined ID.
E46-82
E46-83
Message receiving event is

undefined.
E46-90
E46-91
Abnormal access to memory

Header address scanning
abnormality
E46-98
Page memory cannot be

secured for printing.
E46-99
Memory initialization abnormality.

Memory may not be correctly
connected.
5-29
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.

ICP program
CCP wiring harness of A/D
conversion board (ADB)
Abnormality
detection
process is
conducted
but no code
is indicated
on the operation board
and main
body continues operation.
Abnormality
code is indicated only for
data collection, list output and
KRDS.

LCT drive board (LTDB)
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.

board (OACB)
Exposure lamp (L1)

CCD board (CCDB)
Toner density sensor /Y (TDS
Y)
Toner density sensor /M (TDS
M)
Toner density sensor /C (TDS
C)
Toner density sensor /K (TDS
K)

Expansion memory
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
Classification
Communication
abnormality
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
E50-01
12VDC abnormality.
Abnormality signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
E50-02
24VDC abnormality.
Abnormality signal was continuously detected for the specified time after the specified
time from REN /2 ON.
(CVDB) 24VDC abnormality.
Abnormality signal of 24VDC
for CVDB was detected after
specified time from REN /2
ON.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
E50-03
V CODE LIST


(CVDB)
E50-04
Laser correction motor 5VDC

abnormality.
Abnormal 5VDC for laser correction motor /Y, /M, and /C
(M7, M8, and M9) was
detected.
E50-05

(CVDB) 12VDC abnormality.
Abnormality signal of 12VDC
for CVDB was detected.

(CVDB)
E50-10
Line status error and check

sum error was detected
between the overall control
board (OACB) and image processing board (IPB) and
demand for re-transmission
was sent but recovery could
not be attained.
Re-transmission was
demanded and answered but
recovery could not be attained.
Space is not obtained in the
transmission ring buffer within
the specified time.

E50-11
Communication with the coin

vendor cannot be performed.

Coin vendor
5-30
ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
Fan
abnormality
F52-01
When the DCPS cooling fan

specified time.
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
F52-02
When the IP cooling fan (M24)

time.
When the IPB cooling fan
specified time.

IP cooling fan (M24)
E56-02

turned ON, communication
between the printer control
board (PRCB), overall control
board (OACB), and operation
board /1 (OB1) is not started.

E56-11
When the main switch (SW2)

was turned ON, unwritten control program 01 of operation
board /1 (OB1) was detected.
E56-12

E56-13

E60-01
Communication error.
F61-01
Registration sensor (PS301)

error.

F61-02
Timing sensor (PS302) error.

Timing sensor (PS302)
F61-03
Reverse sensor (PS305) error.
F61-04
Paper exit sensor (PS306)

error.

Reverse sensor (PS305)
Main body
Classification
F52-03
AFR-20
Operation board
abnormality
AFR-20
abnormality
5-31

DCPS cooling fan (M42)

IPB cooling fan (M25)
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST

Abnormality
code
AFR-20
abnormality
F61-05
Size VR (VR301) error.
F61-06
Non-volatile memory error.
F61-07

was ON, unwritten control program of RADF control board
(DFCB) was detected.
F61-08
Paper feed motor (M301) error.

F61-09
Conveyance motor (M302)

error.

F61-10
Reverse paper exit motor

(M303) error.

Reverse paper exit motor
(M303)
E70-01
Communication error.
F77-01
Shift unit does not reach the

shifting position or home position within the specified time.
F77-02
After the tray up/down motor

(M703) was turned ON, tray
upper limit sensor (PS702) is
F77-03
After the alignment motor /U

(M705) was turned ON, the
alignment HP sensor /U
(PS708) is not turned ON or

Alignment motor /U (M705)
(PS708)
F77-04
After the paper exit roller motor

(M707) was turned ON, speed
does not reach the specified
level within the specified time.

Paper exit roller motor (M707)
F77-05
After the paper exit motor

(M708) is turned ON, paper
exit opening HP sensor

Paper exit opening motor
(M708)
Paper exit opening sensor
(PS712)
F77-06
After the stapler moving motor

(M711) is turned ON, stapler
moving HP sensor (PS711) is
not turned ON or OFF within
the specified time.

Stapler movement motor
(M711)
Stapler movement HP sensor
(PS711)
AFR-20
Classification
FN-120, FN-9
V CODE LIST
FN-120
and FN-9
abnormality
Causes
Resulting
operation
5-32
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
Main body
and FNS
stop operation immediately and
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.

Size VR (VR301)

Shift motor (M702)
Shift HP sensor (PS718)
Tray upper limit sensor (PS702)
FN-120, FN-9
Classification
FN-120
and FN-9
abnormality
ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
F77-07
After the clincher rotating

motor (M704) is turned ON,
clincher rotating HP sensor

Clincher rotation motor (M704)
Clincher rotation HP sensor
(PS714)
F77-08
After the stapler rotating motor

rotating HP sensor (PS713) is
not turned ON or OFF within
the specified time.
After the stapler motor /F
HP sensor /F (PS731) is not
turned ON within the specified
time.
Main body
and FNS
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
F77-11
F77-12

Stapler rotation motor (M706)
Stapler rotation HP sensor
(PS713)
Stapler motor /F (M714)
Stapler HP sensor /F (PS731)
After the stapler motor /R

HP sensor /R (PS730) is not
time.
After the clincher motor /F
(M715) is turned ON, clincher
HP sensor /F (PS733) is not
time.

Stapler motor /R (M709)
Stapler HP sensor /R (PS730)
After clincher motor /R (M710)

is turned ON, clincher HP sensor /R (PS732) is not turned
After the stopper motor (M718)
is turned ON, stopper HP sensor (PS723) is not turned ON

Clincher motor /R (M710
Clincher HP sensor /R (PS732)
F77-22
After the alignment motor /L

(M716) is turned ON, alignment HP sensor /L (PS724) is

Alignment motor /L (M716)
(PS724)
F77-25
After the folding knife motor

(M719) is turned ON, folding
knife HP sensor (PS722) is not
time.

Folding knife motor (M719)
(PS722)
F77-13
F77-14
F77-21
5-33

Clincher motor /F (M715)
Clincher HP sensor /F (PS733)

Stopper motor (M718)
Stopper HP sensor (PS723)
V CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
FN-120, FN-9
abnormality
F77-26
After the folding conveyance

motor (M720) is turned ON,
speed does not reach the
specified level within the specified time.
TMG-3
Classification
abnormality
F77-31
After the conveyance motor

(M101) is turned ON, speed
Main body
and FNS
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
F77-32
After the cutter motor (M102) is

turned ON, cutter HP sensor
(PS106) is not turned ON

TU drive board (TUDB)
Cutter motor (M102)
Cutter HP sensor (PS106)
F77-33
After the stopper motor (M103)

is turned ON, stopper HP sensor (PS103) is not turned ON

Stopper motor (M103)
F77-34
After the stopper release motor

(M104) is turned ON, stopper
release HP sensor (PS104) is

Stopper release motor (M104)
Stopper release HP sensor
(PS104)
F77-35
After the press motor (M105) is

turned ON, press HP sensor

Press motor (M105)
Press HP sensor (PS105)
F77-36
After the pressure motor

(M107) is turned ON, pressure
HP sensor (PS112) is not
time.

Pusher motor (M107)
Pusher HP sensor (PS112)
F77-37
After the holder motor (M106)

is turned ON, upper limit PS
sensor (PS110) is not turned
ON.

Holder motor (M106)
Upper limit PS sensor (PS110)
F77-41
After the tray up/down motor /L

(M202) is turned ON, tray
upper limit sensor /L (PS209)
or tray lower limit sensor /L

PI drive board (PIDB)
Tray up/down motor /L (M202)
Tray upper limit sensor /L
(PS209)
Tray lower limit sensor /L
(PS210)
Cover Inserter D
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
abnormality
5-34

(M720)

ERROR CODE LIST
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
abnormality
F77-42
After the tray up/down motor /U

(M201) is turned ON, tray
upper limit sensor /U (PS204)
or tray lower limit sensor /U
Main body
and FNS
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
F77-43
After the PI conveyance motor

(M203) is turned ON, speed
After the punch shift motor
(M802) is turned ON, punch
shift HP sensor (PS803) is not
time.
PK-5
Cover Inserter D
Classification
PK-5
abnormality
F77-44
F77-47
FN-120, FN-9
F77-54
FN-120,
FN-9
abnormality
F77-81
F77-91
F77-92
F77-98
F77-99

Tray up/down motor /U (M201)
Tray upper limit sensor /U
(PS204)
Tray lower limit sensor /U
(PS205)
PI Conveyance motor (M203)
Punch shift motor (M802)
Punch shift HP sensor (PS803)
between FNS control board
(FNSCB) and punch drive
board (PKDB)
After punch motor (M801) is
turned ON, punch HP sensor

After the gate drive motor

(M712) is turned ON, gate HP
sensor (PS716) is not turned
when sub-CPU in FNS control
board (FNSCB) receives data

Gate drive motor (M712)
Gate HP sensor (PS716)
when the main CPU in FNS
control board (FNSCB)
receives data.
was turned ON, unwritten control program of FNS control
Board (FNSCB) was detected.
Abnormality other than those
known to control program of
was detected.
5-35

Punch motor (M801)
Punch HP sensor (PS801)

V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
Classification
Communication
abnormality
ISW
abnormality
Abnormality
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
E80-01
When the main switch (SW2) is

ON, no response is received
from the printer control board
(PRCB) within the specified
time.
E80-02

communication abnormality
Main body
main relay
(RL1) is
turned OFF.
E80-03
Operation board communication abnormality

was ON, unwritten range of
ISW was detected in the
printer control program.

was ON, unwritten range of
ISW was detected in the GIF
control program.
In the data transfer by ISW,
regular header information
cannot be received within the
specified time.
VIF control program
In the data transfer by ISW,

check sum error or header
error was detected in the
downloaded data.
When transferring data by ISW,
data cannot be correctly written to flash ROM.
Printer cable
USB cable
Program file abnormality
Engine continued operation

without preparing image or
process patch for the specified
time.
Printer control program
E80-11
E80-21
E80-30
E80-31
E80-32
V CODE LIST
E80-40
5-36
Printer control program
Printer cable
USB cable
PC parallel port
PC USB port
Printer cable
USB cable
Program transferred board
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
3. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION

In the event of following abnormalities, the failed unit can be isolated so that other functions may be temporarily operated.
If any abnormality code is issued, press the Auto Reset key and turn OFF and ON the SW2 (auxiliary
power switch). The unit subjected to abnormality is isolated in the software system and other functions can
be operated. If SW2 is turned OFF or ON without correcting the faulty unit, the abnormality is detected and
the abnormality code is indicated again (a function effective only one time).
Error code
Error
Unit to be cut off
Remarks
18-01
Error in paper feed tray /1 up
Paper feed tray /1
Tray can not be selected.
18-02
Paper feed tray /2
18-03
18-05

Error in LT tray up
Paper feed tray /3

LT tray

13-02
LT paper feed motor abnormality
46-40 to 43
HDD abnormality
HDD
HDD can not be used.
77-22, 25, 26
77-31, 37
Folding drive abnormality

Cutting drive abnormality
Folding machine
TMG-3
Folding mode, stitch-andfold mode, and cutting
77-41, 42, 43
CF tray drive abnormality
Cover Inserter D
Cover sheet mode can not
77-44, 47, 55
Punch rocking motor abnormality
PK-5
be selected.
Punch mode can not be
mode can not be selected.
V CODE LIST
selected.
5-37
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
V CODE LIST
Blank page
5-38
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1
CF5001 parts layout drawing
A. Switches and sensors

(1) Rear of the main body
[11]
[10]
[9]
[12]
[8] [7] [6] [5]

[4] [3] [2] [1]
[1]
[2]
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS60)

Encoder sensor /M1 (PS62)
[7]
[8]
Encoder sensor /C2 (PS65)

Encoder sensor /K2 (PS67)
Encoder sensor /C1 (PS64)
[9]
Waste toner full sensor (PS52)
[4]
Encoder sensor /K1 (PS66)
[10]
Waste toner door sensor (PS53)
[5]
[6]
Encoder sensor /Y2 (PS61)

Encoder sensor /M2 (PS63)
[11]
[12]
Encoder sensor/belt 2 (PS68)

Encoder sensor/belt 1 (PS69)
VI DIAGRAMS
[3]
8050fs6600
6-1
(2) Top of the main body
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
DF reset switch (RS1)
8050fs6601
[4]
APS sensor /S (PS3)
[2]
Toner supply unit open/close sensor (PS14)
[5]
[3]
APS sensor /L (PS4)
[6]
AAPS timing sensor (PS2)
(3) Front of the main body
[3]
[4]
VI DIAGRAMS
[2]
[1]
[1]
Front door open/close sensor (PS18)
[3]
Main switch (SW2)
[2]
Front door interlock switch (MS1)
[4]
Reset switch (SW1)
6-2
8050fs6602
(4) Right side of the main body
[1]
[1]
8050fs6603
Temp/humidity sensor (TEMP/HUM)
(5) Front side of the main body
[1]
1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6604
6-3
(6) Write unit
[5] [6] [7]
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[1]
8050fs6605
Index sensor board /Y (INDX SB Y)
[5]
Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)*
[2]
Index sensor board /M (INDX SB M)
[6]
Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)*
[3]
Index sensor board /C (INDX SB C)
[7]
Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)*
[4]
Index sensor board /K (INDX SB K)
* Laser correction HP sensor does not attached to write unit /K.

(7) Process unit
[4] [3] [2] [1]
8050fs6606
Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K)
[3]
Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
[2]
Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C)
[4]
Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-4
(8) Developing unit
[4]
[3] [2]
[1]
8050fs6607
[1]
Toner density sensor /K (TDS K)
[3]
Toner density sensor /M (TDS M)
[2]
Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)
[4]
Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)
(9) Image correction unit
[2]
[3]
[1]
Gamma sensor (PS11)
[2]
Color registration sensor /F (PS8)
[3]
Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6608
6-5
(10) Toner supply unit
[4]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6609
[1]
Toner level detection sensor /K (TLD K)
[4]
Toner supply door open/close sensor (PS54)
[2]
[3]
Toner level detection sensor /C (TLD C)

Toner supply interlock switch (MS2)
[5]
[6]
Toner level detection sensor /M (TLD M)

Toner level detection sensor /Y (TLD Y)
(11) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[4] [5] [6]
[9] [8] [7]

[3] [2] [1]
VI DIAGRAMS
[18] [17] [16]
[15] [14] [13]
[12] [11] [10]
8050fs6630
[1]
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29)
[10]
Paper size VR/1 (VR1)
[2]
[11]
[3]
[4]

No paper sensor /1 (PS31)
[12]
[13]

Paper size /S1 (PS33)
[5]
[14]
[6]
[15]
[7]
[8]
Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30)

[16]
[17]
Paper size /L1 (PS34)

[9]
[18]
6-6
(12) By-pass feed unit
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
Paper size /LBP (PS49)

No paper sensor /BP (PS47)
[1]
[3]
[4]
8050fs6610
Paper size VR/BP (VR4)

Paper size /SBP (PS48)
(13) Vertical conveyance unit
[2]
[1]
8050fs6631
Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51)
[2]
Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-7
(14) ADU
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[4]
[8]
[3]
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27)

Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28)
[9]
[10] [11]
[2]
[1]
[7]
[8]
ADU conveyance sensor (PS20)

ADU reverse sensor (PS21)
8050fs6611
[3]
ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23)
[9]
[4]
2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24)
[10]
By-pass conveyance sensor (PS26)
[5]
[6]
Conveyance lever sensor (PS55)

Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)
[11]
(15) Paper exit section (left side of the main body)
[2]
[1]
8050fs6612
[2]
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-8
Paper exit full sensor (PS12)
(16) Fixing unit
[1]
[8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)
[5]
[6]
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
[3]
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
[7]
Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17)
[4]
Fixing pressure/release sensor (PS16)
[8]
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
8050fs6632
6-9
B. Loads
[12]
[13]
[14] [15] [16] [17]
[18]
[19] [20] [21] [22]
[5] [4] [3] [2]

[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19)
[13]
DCPS cooling fan (M42)
[2]
Drum motor /Y (M14)
[14]
Developing motor /K (M23)
[3]
Drum motor /M (M15)
[15]
Developing motor /C (M22)
[4]
[5]
Drum motor /C (M16)

Drum motor /K (M17)
[16]
[17]
Developing motor /M (M21)

Scanner motor (M1)
[6]
[18]
Developing motor /Y (M20)
[7]
IP cooling fan (M24)
[19]
[8]
[9]
IPB cooling fan (M25)

Tray up drive motor /1 (M40)
[20]
[21]

[10]
[22]
[11]
[23]
[12]
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-10
[23]
[1]
8050fs6613
[1]
[2]
[1]
Scanner cooling fan (M2)
8050fs6614
[2]
Exposure lamp (L1)
[1]
Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6615
6-11
(4) Right side of the main body
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[7]
[1]
[1]
[5]
Writing intake fan /1 (M43)
[2]
Heater /1 (HTR1)
[6]
[3]
[4]
Heater /2 (HTR2)
Writing intake fan /2 (M44)
[7]
Drum unit fan (M47)
8050fs6616
(5) Left side of the main body
[3]
Paper exit fan /F (M28)
[2]
Paper exit fan /M (M27)
[1]
[3]
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
6-12
8050fs6617
Paper exit fan /R (M26)
(6) Write unit
[7] [6] [5]
[4] [3] [2] [1]
[1]
[5]
Laser correction motor /Y (M7)*
[2]
[6]
Laser correction motor /M (M8)*
[3]
[4]

[7]
Laser correction motor /C (M9)*
8050fs6618
* Laser correction motor does not attached to write unit /K.

(7) Process unit
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6619
Pre-charging lamp /Y (PCL Y)
[4]
Pre-charging lamp /K (PCL K)
[2]
Pre-charging lamp /M (PCL M)
[5]
Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)
[3]
Pre-charging lamp /C (PCL C)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-13
(8) Image correction unit
[2]
[1]
[1]
Gamma shutter solenoid (SD3)
[2]
8050fs6620
Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2)
(9) Toner supply unit
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[8]
Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[4] [3]
[6]
Toner supply motor /C (M51)
Toner bottle motor (M53)
[7]
Toner supply motor /M (M50)
Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16)
[8]
Charger intake fan (M48)
Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17)

Toner supply motor /K (M52)
[9]
[10]
Toner supply motor /Y (M49)

Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
[7] [6] [5]
6-14
8050fs6621
(10) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[7] [8] [9]
[6] [5] [4]

[3] [2] [1]
8050fs6633
[1]
Pick up solenoid /1 (SD7)
[6]
Paper feed clutch /3 (MC11)
[2]
[7]
Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8)
[3]
[4]

[8]
[9]

[5]
(11) Vertical conveyance unit
[1]
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6634
6-15
(12) ADU
[9]
[10] [11] [12]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[6] [5]

[13]
[14]
[4] [3] [2]

[9]
[10]
[15]
[1]
ADU reverse motor (M32)

2nd transfer pressure/release motor (M34)
ADU lock solenoid (SD6)
[11]
Registration motor (M30)
[4]
ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3)
[12]
Loop roller motor (M31)
[5]
[6]
ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1)

Reverse/exit motor (M33)
[13]
[14]
Pick up solenoid /BP (SD5)

Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6)
[7]
ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2)
[15]
Tray up drive motor /BP (M35)
[8]
Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)
VI DIAGRAMS
[3]
6-16
8050fs6622
(13) Fixing unit
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050fs6635

[3]
Web motor (M54)
[4]
[5]
Fixing motor (M29)

VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
6-17
C. PCBs and others

[17]
[18] [19]
[20]
[21]
[22] [23]
[24]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[8]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[13]
[2] [1]
8050fs6623

Noise filter (NF)
[13]
[14]
[3]
Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)
[15]
Extended memory: option
[4]
Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1)
[16]
Memory board (MB)
[5]
[6]
Transformer /LCT (TRNS2)

Transformer /main body (TRNS1)
[17]
[18]
High voltage unit /1 (HV1)

[7]
DC power supply unit /2 (DCPS2)
[19]
[8]
DC power supply unit /1 (DCPS1)
[20]
[9]
[10]
Drum drive board /Y (DRDB Y)

Drum drive board /M (DRDB M)
[21]
[22]
DC power supply unit /4:Option (DCPS4)

High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
[11]
Drum drive board /C (DRDB C)
[23]
[12]
Drum drive board /K (DRDB K)
[24]
Fixing heater control board : only in EU (FHCB)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
6-18
HDD: option (HDD-7)

HDD I/F board: option (HDD IFB)
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6624
[1]
CCD board (CCDB)
[2]
Key counter (C (K))
[3]
L1 inverter board (L1 INVB)
[4]
[2]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[1]
8050fs6625
[1]
Black counter (C (BK))
[5]
OB inverter board (OB INVB)
[2]
Total counter (C (T))
[6]
LCD board (LCDB)
[3]
[7]
Touch panel board
[4]
[8]
6-19
VI DIAGRAMS
[3]
(4) Write unit
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1]
[1]
[2]
8050fs6626
Temp detection board (TDB)
[3]
Laser drive board /M (LDB M)
(attached to write unit /K only)
[4]
Laser drive board /C (LDB C)
Laser drive board /Y (LDB Y)
[5]
Laser drive board /K (LDB K)
(5) Process unit
[4]
Drum potential sensor board /K (DRSPSB K)
Drum potential sensor board /C (DRSPSB C)
[2]
[3]
[4]
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
[3]
6-20
[1]
8050fs6627
Drum potential sensor board /M (DRSPSB M)

Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRSPSB Y)
(6) Toner supply section
[1]
[1]
8050fs6628
Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
(7) ADU
[1]
Conveyance drive board (CVDB)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6629
6-21
1.2
AFR-20 parts layout drawing

[18]
[3]
[11]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[7]
[15]
[1]
[16]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[17]
[4]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[1]
[2]

[11]
[12]
Paper exit cover sensor (PS307)

Tray open/close sensor (PS308)
[3]
Reverse/exit motor (M303)
[13]
Size sensor /S (PS309)
[4]
Registration clutch (MC301)
[14]
Size sensor /L (PS310)
[5]
[6]

Timing sensor (PS302)
[15]
[16]
Paper exit solenoid (SD301)

Reverse solenoid (SD302)
[7]
Paper feed cover sensor (PS303)
[17]
Size VR (VR301)
No paper sensor (PS304)
[18]
[9]
[10]
Reverse sensor (PS305)

[19]
Size sensor board (SSB)
VI DIAGRAMS
[8]
6-22
8050fs6031
1.3
C-208 parts layout drawing

[13] [14]
[15]
SW100 SD100 [1]
FRONT
[2]
[3]
[12]
[11] [10]
[4]
[9]
M100
[8]
M101 [16]
[7]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6700
Front door interlock switch (MS101)
[9]
Remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105)
[2]
Paper mis-centering sensor (PS120)
[10]
[3]
No paper sensor (PS108)
[11]
[4]
[5]
Paper feed sensor (PS107)

Feed sensor (PS106)
[12]
[13]

Top cover interlock switch (MS102)
[6]
[14]
Top cover open/close sensor (PS100)
[7]
Pre-registration clutch (MC102)
[15]
Paper feed clutch (MC101)
[8]
[16]
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-23
1.4
FN-120/FN-9 parts layout drawing

[26]
[25]
[27]
[24]
[23]
[1]
[2]
[21]
[22]
[20]
[3]
[19]
[4]
[18]
[5]
[6]
[17]
[16]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
VI DIAGRAMS
FRONT
[15]
[14]
[13]
8050fs6701
[1]
Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701)
[15]
Stopper HP sensor (PS723) (FN-9 only)
[2]
Paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712)
[16]
Stacker inlet sensor (PS705)
[3]
[4]
Gate HP sensor (PS716)

FNS inlet sensor (PS704)
[17]
[18]
Stacker no paper sensor (PS720)

Stacker auxiliary solenoid (SD702)
[5]
Stapler movement motor (M711)
[19]
Stack auxiliary motor (M722)
[6]
FNS interlock switch (MS701)
[20]
Alignment HP sensor/U (PS708)
[7]
[8]
Clincher rotation motor (M704)

Alignment HP sensor/L (PS724) (FN-9 only)
[21]
[22]
Paper exit belt HP sensor (PS709)

Stacker inlet motor (M713)
[9]
Alignment motor/L (M716) (FN-9 only)
[23]
Shift HP sensor (PS718)
[10]
Folding knife HP sensor (PS722) (FN-9 only)
[24]
Shift motor (M702)
[11]
[12]
Folding knife motor (M719) (FN-9 only)

Stopper motor (M718) (FN-9 only)
[25]
[26]
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706)

Sub-tray full sensor (PS719)
[13]
Clincher rotation HP sensor(PS714)
[27]
Paper exit opening solenoid (SD704)
[14]
Folding passage sensor (PS726) (FN-9 only)
6-24
[12]
[13]
[14]
[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
8050fs6702
[1]
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
[2]
(PS707)
[8]
Relay board (RB)
[9]
[3]
Counter rest sensor (PS715)
[10]
Gate drive motor (M712)
[4]
By-pass gate solenoid (SD705)
[11]
FNS conveyance motor (M701)
[5]
[6]
Tray lower limit sensor (PS703)

[12]
[13]
Paper exit opening motor (M708)

Sub-tray paper exit motor (M721)
[7]
Folding conveyance motor (M720)
[14]
Paper exit opening roller motor (M707)
VI DIAGRAMS
(FN-9 only)
6-25
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6703
[1]
Folding paper exit sensor (PS725)

(FN-9 only)
[5]
Three-folding gate solenoid (SD706)

(FN-9 only)
[2]
Folding full LED (LED729) (FN-9 only)
[6]
Stapler rotation motor (M706)
Folding full sensor (PS729) (FN-9 only)
[7]
Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)
[4]
Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713)
[8]
Alignment motor/U (M705)
VI DIAGRAMS
[3]
6-26
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Clincher motor/R (M710)
[4]
Clincher motor/F (M715)

[2]
8050fs6704
Stapler HP sensor/R (PS730)

Stapler HP sensor/F (PS731)
Clincher HP sensor/R (PS732)
[5]
Clincher HP sensor/F (PS733)
Cartridge switch/R (SW701)

Cartridge switch/F (SW703)
Stapler motor/R (M709)
[6]
Stapler motor/F (M714)
Stapler switch/R (SW702)

Stapler switch/F (SW704)
VI DIAGRAMS
[3]
[1]
6-27
1.5
TMG-3 parts layout drawing

[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6705
[7]
Relay 2 (RL28)
[2]
[3]
DC power unit (DCPS)

[8]
[9]
Coil (COL)
Scrap box detection sensor (PS107)
[4]
Holder motor (M106)
[10]
[5]
Circuit breaker (CBR)
[11]
[6]
Relay 1 (RL1)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-28
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6706
[1]
Scrap removal fan motor (M108)
[9]
Front door MS2 (MS2)
[2]
Scrap full LED (LED101)
[10]
[3]
Scrap full sensor (PS109)
[11]
Stacker S3 (MS3)
[4]
[5]
Entrance sensor (PS101)

Trimmer motor (M102)
[12]
[13]
Stacker door sensor (PS114)

Stacker MS4 (MS4)
[6]
Trimmer HP sensor (PS106)
[14]
Stacker full sensor (PS113)
[7]
Press HP sensor (PS105)
[15]
Pusher HP sensor(PS112)
[8]
Press motor (M105)
[16]
Pusher motor (M107)
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Stopper movement motor(M103)
[4]
Stopper release motor (M104)
[2]
Conveyance sensor (PS102)
[5]
[3]
Stopper release HP sensor (PS104)
6-29
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6707
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1
Main Body connector layout drawing
A. Printer control board

650 (W : 20 pin) 357 (W : 9 pin) 360 (W : 40 pin) 391 (GY : 18 pin)
651 (W : 20 pin)
384 (W : 30 pin)
340 (W : 28 pin)
700 (W : 26 pin)
572 (W : 4 pin)
376 (W : 28 pin)
620 (BN : 7 pin)
600 (BN : 20 pin)
564 (W : 2 pin)
393 (W : 24 pin)
309 (W : 36 pin)
573 (W : 3 pin)
300 (BN : 18 pin)
353 (BN : 12 pin)
303 (W : 2 pin)
302 (W : 6 pin)
574 (W : 3 pin)
500 (BN : 34 pin)

467 (BN : 6 pin)
400 (BN : 32 pin)

2 (N.C.)
1 (N.C.)
4 (N.C.)
414 (B : 32 pin)
428 (BN : 30 pin)
459 (W : 10 pin)
151 (GY : 8 pin)
36 (N.C.)
730 (W : 32 pin)
301 (W : 4 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
464 (BN : 19 pin)

736 (W : 24 pin)
442 (W : 34 pin)
150 (GY : 24 pin)
37 (N.C.)
6-30
8050fs6033
B. AC drive board
120 (W : 5 pin)
156 (W : 5 pin)
152 (W : 11 pin)
121 (W : 8 pin)
153 (W : 4 pin)
155 (W : 5 pin)
8050fs6034
157 (W : 4 pin)
C. CCD drive board
511 (W : 50 pin)
8050fs6035
D. Conveyance drive board

534 (W : 12 pin) 536 (W : 6 pin)
3 (N.C.) 5 (N.C.) 539 (W : 22 pin)
524 (W : 7 pin)
518 (W : 15 pin)
527 (W : 15 pin)
569 (B : 4 pin)
1 (N.C.)
513 (W : 6 pin)
503 (W : 34 pin)
510 (W : 11 pin)
507 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6036
VI DIAGRAMS
548 (W : 6 pin)
6-31
E. DC power unit/1
102 (W : 4 pin)
103 (W : 6 pin)
108 (W : 4 pin)
106 (W : 8 pin)
101 (W : 3 pin)
107 (W : 7 pin)
104 (W : 10 pin)
105 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6037
F.
DC power unit/2
111 (W : 12 pin)
110 (W : 4 pin)
112 (W : 6 pin)
113 (W : 4 pin)
114 (W : 9 pin)
115 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6038
G. DC power unit/3
109 (W : 6 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6100
6-32
H. Drum drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K

316,323,330,337 (W : 3 pin)
313,320,327,334 (W : 6 pin)
312,319,326,333 (W : 2 pin)
8050fs6039
311,318,325,332 (W : 9 pin)
I.
Fixing heater control board
158 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6040
High voltage unit/1
731 (W : 8 pin)
732 (W : 8 pin)
735 (W : 3 pin)
733 (W : 8 pin)
734 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6041
VI DIAGRAMS
J.
6-33
K. High voltage unit/2
737 (W : 12 pin)
739 (W : 3 pin)
738 (W : 10 pin)
740 (N.C.)
8050fs6042
L.
Image processing board

271 (W : 6 pin)
270 (BK : 60 pin)

260 (W : 68 pin)
253 (BK : 100 pin)
272 (W : 34 pin)
220 (W : 120 pin)
254 (BK : 120 pin)
280 (B : 34 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
9 (N.C.) 8 (N.C.)
6-34
8050fs6043
M. Index sensor/Y,/M,/C,/K
274,278,282,286 (GY : 5 pin)
8050fs6044
N. L1 inverter board
606 (W : 3 pin)
?? (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6045
O. Laser drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K
275,279,283,287 (W : 12 pin)
8050fs6046
Memory board
141 (W : 40 pin)
142 (W : 20 pin)
8050fs6047
VI DIAGRAMS
P.
6-35
Q. Overall control board

250 (W : 18 pin)
217 (BN : 50 pin)
258 (N.C.)
13 (N.C.)
251 (W : 16 pin)
270 (W : 60 pin)
252 (W : 4 pin)
9 (N.C.)
12 (N.C.)
257 (BK : 9 pin)
253 (W : 100 pin)
10 (N.C.)
256 (BK : 36 pin)
259 (BK : 4 pin)

254 (W : 120 pin)
255 (BK : 8 pin)
11 (N.C.)
6 (N.C.)
5 (N.C.)
7 (N.C.)
14 (N.C.)
8 (N.C.)
8050fs6048
R. OB inverter board
166 (W : 4 pin)
165 (W : 3 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6049
6-36
S. Operation board/1
176 (W : 6 pin)
173 (W : 6 pin)
172 (W : 12 pin)
175 (W : 4 pin)
174 (W : 14 pin)
8050fs6050
T.
Operation board/2
162 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6051
U. Operation board/3
158 (W : 3 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6101
6-37

V.
Scanner drive board

607 (W : 3 pin) 609 (W : 14 pin)
1 (N.C.)
601 (W : 20 pin)
603 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6052
602 (W : 4 pin) 605 (W : 3 pin)
W. Temperature detection board
670 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6053
X. Toner supply drive board

704 (W : 6 pin)
724 (W : 18 pin)
702 (W : 26 pin)
711 (W : 8 pin)
726 (W : 12 pin)
706 (W : 6 pin)
Y.
8050fs6054
708 (W : 11 pin)
705 (W : 7 pin)
Gamma sensor
558 (W : 5 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6055
6-38
2.2
AFR-20 connector layout drawing
A. DF drive board
14 (W : 9 pin)
13 (W : 15 pin)
3 (W : 7 pin)
12 (W : 5 pin)
2 (W : 6 pin)
1 (N.C.)
5 (W : 5 pin)
4 (W : 6 pin)
8 (N.C.)
7 (W : 9 pin)
6 (W : 2 pin)
8050fs6102
C-208 connector layout drawing

802 (W : 10 pin)
807 (W : 14 pin)
5 (N.C.)
804 (W : 12 pin)
805 (W : 11 pin)
4 (N.C.)
800 (W : 6 pin)
808 (W : 2 pin)
3 (N.C.)
801 (W : 11 pin)
803 (W : 6 pin)
806 (W : 15 pin)
2 (N.C.) 1 (N.C.)
8050fs6103
VI DIAGRAMS
2.3
10 (W : 8 pin)
6-39
2.4
FN-120/FN-9 connector layout drawing
A. FNS control board

61 (W : 2 pin) 51 (W : 32 pin)
33 (W : 38 pin)
12 (W : 24 pin)
62 (W : 40 pin)
8 (W : 8 pin)
1 (W : 18 pin)
52 (W : 6 pin)
10 (W : 4 pin)
11 (W : 9 pin)
43 (W : 8 pin) FS-215 only

42 (W : 5 pin) FS-215 only
7 (W: 6 pin)
5 (W : 22 pin)
6 (W : 5 pin)
41 (GY : 30 pin) FS-215 only
9 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only

2 (W : 5 pin) 3 (W : 11 pin)
4 (W : 40 pin)
8050fs6104
B. Relay board
6 (W : 30 pin)
5 (W : 30 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin)
8 (W : 34 pin)
4 (W : 24 pin) FS-215 only
9 (W : 2 pin) FS-215 only

1 (W : 40 pin)
7 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only
VI DIAGRAMS
2 (W : 22 pin) 3 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only
6-40
8050fs6105
TMG-3 connector layout drawing

402 (GY : 28 pin) 404 (GY : 18 pin)
406 (GY : 20 pin)
403 (W : 5 pin)
401 (GY : 40 pin)
405 (W : 4 pin)
408 (W : 3 pin)
407 (W : 2 pin)
409 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6106
VI DIAGRAMS
2.5
6-41
6-42
4969fs6324a
To chart 2/2
Reverse/exit solenoid
ADU reverse motor

SD4
MC2
MC1
MC3
F
M33
R
F M32
R
M19
M34
1st transfer pressure/release motor

2nd transfer pressure/release motor
Reverse/exit motor
PS17
PS13
PS19
PS21
PS20
PS23
F
M29
R
Fixing paper exit sensor

Paper exit sensor
Reverse/exit sensor
ADU reverse sensor
ADU conveyance
ADU pre-registration sensor
Fixing motor
Loop roller motor

Register out roller motor
M31
M30
MC13
MC4
MC5

V_TOP
PS29
PS27
PS28
PS22
Registration sensor
Code
M41
SD7
MC7
MC8
Time (sec)
3.1
Paper feed motor

Pick up solenoid /1
Item
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
3. TIMING CHART
Main Body timing chart
A. Full color, life size, ADF single sided original document of 2 sheets, double sided original document of 2 copies, paper feed tray /1 paper feed
Chart 1/2
6-43
To chart 1/2
Time (sec)
VI DIAGRAMS
4969fs6324b
2nd transfer
Separation AC/DC
Transfer Drum separation claw solenoid
Developer bias AC /Y
Developer bias AC /M
Developer bias AC /C
Developer bias AC /K
1st transfer /Y
1st transfer /M
1st transfer /C
1st transfer /K
Charging /Y
Charging /M
Charging /C
Charging /K
Developer bias DC /Y
Developer bias DC /M
Developer bias DC /C
Developer bias DC /K
Drum motor /Y
Drum motor /M
Drum motor /C
Drum motor /K
Transfer belt motor
Item
SD1
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
Code

TIMING CHART
Chart 2/2
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Timing sensor
PS302
Conveyance motor
M302
6-44
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Reverse sensor
PS305
Reverse/exit motor
M303
Paper exit sensor

PS306
Reverse solenoid
SD302
Paper exit solenoid
SD301
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
CW 300mm/s
CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
3.2
No paper sensor
PS304
Registration sensor
PS301
Registration clutch
MC301
Paper feed motor
M301
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
AFR-20 timing chart
A. A4, life size, single-sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/3)
4969fs6310
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Timing sensor
PS302
Conveyance motor
M302
6-45
8050fs6311
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper exit sensor

PS306
Reverse solenoid
SD302
Paper exit solenoid
SD301
VI DIAGRAMS
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Reverse sensor
PS305
Reverse/exit motor
M303
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
CW
CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
No paper sensor
PS304
Registration sensor
PS301
Registration clutch
MC301
Paper feed motor
M301

TIMING CHART
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (2/3)
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Timing sensor
PS302
Conveyance motor
M302
6-46
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Reverse sensor
PS305
Reverse/exit motor
M303
Paper exit sensor

PS306
Reverse solenoid
SD302
Paper exit solenoid
SD301
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
CW 300mm/s
CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
No paper sensor
PS304
Registration sensor
PS301
Registration clutch
MC301
Paper feed motor
M301
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (3/3)
4969fs6312
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Timing sensor
PS302
Conveyance motor
M302
6-47
4969fs6313
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper exit sensor

PS306
Reverse solenoid
SD302
Paper exit solenoid
SD301
VI DIAGRAMS
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Reverse sensor
PS305
Reverse/exit motor
M303
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
CW 300mm/s
CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
No paper sensor
PS304
Registration sensor
PS301
Registration clutch
MC301
Paper feed motor
M301

TIMING CHART
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/4)
Paper unloaded
Timing sensor
PS302
Conveyance motor
M302
6-48
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Reverse sensor
PS305
Reverse/exit motor
M303
Paper exit sensor

PS306
Reverse solenoid
SD302
Paper exit solenoid
SD301
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
CW 300mm/s
CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
No paper sensor
PS304
Registration sensor
PS301
Registration clutch
MC301
Paper feed motor
M301
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
4969fs6314
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Timing sensor
PS302
Conveyance motor
M302
6-49
4969fs6315
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper exit sensor

PS306
Reverse solenoid
SD302
Paper exit solenoid
SD301
VI DIAGRAMS
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Reverse sensor
PS305
Reverse/exit motor
M303
Stop
CCW 138mm/s
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
CW 300mm/s
CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
No paper sensor
PS304
Registration sensor
PS301
Registration clutch
MC301
Paper feed motor
M301

TIMING CHART
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original documents of 3 sheets (3/4)
6-50
Paper exit sensor

PS306
Reverse solenoid
SD302
Paper exit solenoid
SD301
Reverse sensor
PS305
Reverse/exit motor
M303
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Timing sensor
PS302
Conveyance motor
M302
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper unloaded
CCW 900mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CW 350mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 138mm/s
Stop
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF
ON
CW 300mm/s
CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
No paper sensor
PS304
Registration sensor
PS301
Registration clutch
MC301
Paper feed motor
M301
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
4969fs6316
6-51
4969fs6317
PS106
PS27
Feed sensor
VI DIAGRAMS
PS107
Paper feed sensor
MC102
SD100
Paper feed solenoid
Pre-registration clutch
MC101
Paper feed clutch
Code
M101
Time (sec)
0
Start button ON
3.3
Paper feed motor
Item

TIMING CHART
C-208 timing chart
A. A4, single sided, 2-sheet paper feed
6-52
Copy - Page
Tray up/down motor
2-2
PS702
UP
DOWN
PS706
M703
M707
M702
PS718
SD704
M701
PS704
Code
Shift motor
Shift HP sensor
253mm/s
Paper exit roller motor
400mm/s
400mm/s
670mm/s
Time (sec)
0
3-1
FNS operation start

signal ON
3-2
1-1
1-2
2-1
Item
M707
SD704
M702
PS718
M701
PS704
Code
PS706
PS702
UP
Tray up/down motor M703
DOWN

253mm/s Paper exit roller
400mm/s motor
Shift motor
Shift HP sensor
FNS Entrance sensor

670mm/s FNS Conveyance
400mm/s motor
Time (sec)
3.4
FNS Conveyance motor
Item
FNS Entrance sensor
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
FN-120/FN-9 timing chart
A. Sort, A4, document of 2 sheets, 3-copy setting, single sided
6-53
4969fs6319
VI DIAGRAMS
Copy - Page
FNS operation
start signal ON
Time (sec) Code

Item
FNS Entrance sensor
PS704
M701
FNS Conveyance drive motor
SD705
PS705
M713
M722
Stack drive motor
Stack drive solenoid
SD702
Close
M705
Alignment motor /U
Open
M711
Stapler, clincher motor /F
M714/715
Stapler, clincher motor /R
M709/710
PS709
PS706
SD704
950mm/s
660mm/s M707
280mm/s
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS707
UP
Tray up/down motor
M703
DOWN
26
27
1-1
2-9
28
2 - 10
29
2 -11
1-2
1-3
30
14
670mm/s
31
1 - 10
15
32
2-1
17
2-2
18
2-3
19
20
2-4
Item Code
Time (sec)
FNS Entrance sensor
PS704
M701
SD705
PS705
M713
M722
Stack drive motor
Stack drive solenoid
SD702
Close
Alignment motor /U
M705
Open
M711
Stapler, clincher motor /F
M714/715
Stapler, clincher motor /R
M709/710
PS709
PS706
SD704
950mm/s
660mm/s Paper exit roller motor
M707
280mm/s
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS707
UP
Tray up/down motor
M703
DOWN
1 - 11
16

TIMING CHART
B. Flat stapling at 2 points, A4, document of 11 sheets, 2-copy setting
PS725
M719
PS722
PS726
PS712
M706
M720
M714/715
M709/710
PS723
M718
M716
PS724
M705
PS708
Code
PS704
M701
PS705
M713
6-54
2-1
10
11
2-2
FNS Operation Open start signal ON
Time (sec)
Item
FNS Entrance sensor
Stacker Entrance sensor
670mm/s
500mm/s
Close
Alignment motor /U
Open
Close
Alignment motor /L
Open
Stapler motor, clincher motor /F
Stapler motor, clincher motor /R
Stopper HP sensor
Down
Stopper motor
Up
670mm/s
500mm/s
Folding conveyance sensor
Folding knife motor
VI DIAGRAMS
12
2-3
13
14
1-1
16
1-2
Copy - Page
15
17
7
8
Time (sec)
Item
FNS Entrance sensor
670mm/s Stacker entrance motor
500mm/s
Close
Alignment motor /U
Open
Close
Alignment motor /L
Open
Stapler motor, clincher motor /F
Stapler motor, clincher motor /R
Stopper HP sensor
Down
Stopper motor
Up
670mm/s Folding conveyance motor
500mm/s
Folding conveyance sensor
Folding knife motor
1-3
PS725
M719
PS722
PS726
PS712
M706
M720
M718
M714/715
M709/710
PS723
M716
PS724
M705
PS708
Code
PS704
M701
PS705
M713
TIMING CHART
C. Stitch and fold, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
4969fs6320
VI DIAGRAMS
SD706
M720
PS725
M718
PS726
M719
PS722
M701
M713
PS705
M716
M707
PS709
PS704
M712
M705
Code
FNS operation start signal ON
Time (sec)
Item
Paper exit belt HP senFNS Entrance sensor
Gate drive motor
Close
Alignment motor /U
Open
Close
Alignment motor /L
Open
Stacker entrance motor 670mm/s
500mm/s
Folding knife motor
Down
Stopper motor
Up
Folding Conveyance motor
Folding exit sensor
0
16
17
18
19
20
8
11
12
13
14
Item
FNS Entrance sensor
Gate drive motor
Close
Alignment motor /U
Open
Close
Alignment motor /L
Open
670mm/s
500mm/s Stacker entrance motor
Folding knife motor
Down
Stopper motor
Up
Folding Conveyance motor
Folding exit sensor
10
Time (sec)
6-55
SD706
M720
PS725
M718
PS726
M719
PS722
M701
PS705
M713
M716
Code
M707
PS709
PS704
M712
M705

TIMING CHART
D. Three-folding, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
Code
M720
M101
PS101
M103
PS102
M105
M102
M104
M106
M107
PS108
Folding Conveyance motor (FNS)

Conveyance motor
Entrance sensor
Stopper motor
Conveyance sensor
Press motor
Cutter motor
Stopper clear motor
Holder motor
Pressure motor
Paper exit sensor
Item
-52
-51
Copy 1
82
83
84
86
Copy 2
85
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
3.5
Time (sec)
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
TMG-3 timing chart
A. Cutting mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
6-56
4969fs6322
Code
M720
M101
PS101
M103
PS102
M105
M102
M104
M106
M107
PS108
Time (sec)
Folding Conveyance motor (FNS)

Conveyance motor
Entrance sensor
Stopper motor
Conveyance sensor
Press motor
Cutter motor
Stopper clear motor
Holder motor
Pressure motor
Paper exit sensor
6-57
VI DIAGRAMS
Item
-52
-51
Copy 1
82
83
84
86
Copy 2
85
87
88
89
90
91
92
93

TIMING CHART
B. Through mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
4969fs6323
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
Blank Page
6-58
Copyright
2003 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Printed in Japan
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of confidential information.
7662-4969-11 0309xxxx

KONICA MINOLTA C500 CF5001 Service Manual Field Service

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KONICA MINOLTA C500 CF5001 Service Manual Field Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

Dual references may be used on the following:

Popular Options name

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

Replacing the dust filter /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Replacing the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Replacing the toner collection box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Removing and reinstalling the main board unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Removing and reinstalling the exposure lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Reinstalling the scanner wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Screw that must not be removed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

III SERVICE TOOL

Flow of the disassembly of the process unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Cleaning the charging corona unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

Replacing the belt cleaning brush unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Replacing the belt cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

Replacing the belt separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38

4.10 Replacing the transfer belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39

4. PROCESS UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

4.14 Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

Opening and closing the toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53

6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Removing and reinstalling the paper feed trays /1 to /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

Replacing the double feed prevention rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60

III SERVICE TOOL

6.6 Removing and reinstalling the tray up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62

Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68

7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69

Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71

Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74

Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76

Replacing the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77

Replacing the fixing lower heater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79

9.9 Replacing the fixing drive gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96

10.5 Replacing the registration roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

11.2 Installation / Remove of the Memory Unit (OPTION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115

Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119

Removing and reinstalling the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120

1.4 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121

Cleaning the no paper sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122

Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123

11.1 Installation of the Key Counter Socket (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114

11. OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114

Cleaning the registration roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129

Cleaning the registration sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130

4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

Cleaning the paper exit roller/the paper exit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

4.2 Cleaning the reverse roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

III SERVICE TOOL

3. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129

2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139

Cleaning the paper dust removing brush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139

Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140

Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142